Antique Airport - DOTR

PHILIPPINE BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Government of the Republic of the Philippines

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Procurement of
INFRASTRUCTURE
PROJECTS
ANTIQUE AIRPORT
DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
(Site Development and Extension of
Runway including Drainage System)
CBAC-AIR-INFR-2023-02
Sixth Edition
July 2020
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GLOSSARY OF TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND ACRONYMS.................................4

SECTION I. INVITATION TO BID ............................................................................6
Invitation to Bid for ............................................................................................................7
SECTION II. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS .............................................................9
1. Scope of Bid ............................................................................................................10
2. Funding Information ...............................................................................................10
3. Bidding Requirements .............................................................................................10
4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, and Obstructive Practices ....................10
5. Eligible Bidders .......................................................................................................11
6. Origin of Associated Goods ....................................................................................11
7. Subcontracts ............................................................................................................11
8. Pre-Bid Conference ...............................................................................................111
9. Clarification and Amendment of Bidding Documents..........................................111
10. Documents Comprising the Bid: Eligibility and Technical Components ...............12
11. Documents Comprising the Bid: Financial Component .......................................122
12. Alternative Bids ......................................................................................................13
13. Bid Prices ................................................................................................................13
14. Bid and Payment Currencies ...................................................................................13
15. Bid Security...........................................................................................................133
16. Sealing and Marking of Bids.................................................................................133
17. Deadline for Submission of Bids ............................................................................14
18. Opening and Preliminary Examination of Bids ......................................................14
19. Detailed Evaluation and Comparison of Bids .........................................................14
20. Post Qualification ..................................................................................................144
21. Signing of the Contract ...........................................................................................15
SECTION III. BID DATA SHEET ......................................................................... 16
Bid Data Sheet ..................................................................................................................17
SECTION IV. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ..................................... 211
1. Scope of Contract ..................................................................................................222
2. Sectional Completion of Works ............................................................................222
3. Possession of Site ..................................................................................................222
4. The Contractor’s Obligations ................................................................................222
2
5. Performance Security ............................................................................................233
6. Site Investigation Reports .....................................................................................233
7. Warranty................................................................................................................233
8. Liability of the Contractor .....................................................................................233
9. Termination for Other Causes ...............................................................................233
10. Dayworks ..............................................................................................................244
11. Program of Work...................................................................................................244
12. Instructions, Inspections and Audits .....................................................................244
13. Advance Payment..................................................................................................244
14. Progress Payments ................................................................................................244
15. Operating and Maintenance Manuals....................................................................255
SECTION V. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ......................................... 266
Special Conditions of Contract .......................................................................................277
SECTION VI. SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................... 288
SECTION VII. DRAWINGS ................................................................................ 192
SECTION VIII. BILL OF QUANTITIES .............................................................. 193
SECTION IX. CHECKLIST OF TECHNICAL AND FINANCIAL DOCUMENTS ...... 195
3
Glossary of Terms, Abbreviations, and Acronyms
ABC – Approved Budget for the Contract.
ARCC – Allowable Range of Contract Cost.
BAC – Bids and Awards Committee.
Bid – A signed offer or proposal to undertake a contract submitted by a bidder in response to and
in consonance with the requirements of the bidding documents. Also referred to as Proposal and
Tender. (2016 revised IRR, Section 5[c])
Bidder – Refers to a contractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor and/or consultant who

submits a bid in response to the requirements of the Bidding Documents. (2016 revised IRR,
Section 5[d])
Bidding Documents – The documents issued by the Procuring Entity as the bases for bids,
furnishing all information necessary for a prospective bidder to prepare a bid for the Goods,
Infrastructure Projects, and/or Consulting Services required by the Procuring Entity. (2016
revised IRR, Section 5[e])
BIR – Bureau of Internal Revenue.
BSP – Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.
CDA – Cooperative Development Authority.
Consulting Services – Refer to services for Infrastructure Projects and other types of projects or
activities of the GOP requiring adequate external technical and professional expertise that are
beyond the capability and/or capacity of the GOP to undertake such as, but not limited to: (i)
advisory and review services; (ii) pre-investment or feasibility studies; (iii) design; (iv)
construction supervision; (v) management and related services; and (vi) other technical services
or special studies. (2016 revised IRR, Section 5[i])
Contract – Refers to the agreement entered into between the Procuring Entity and the Supplier or
Manufacturer or Distributor or Service Provider for procurement of Goods and Services;
Contractor for Procurement of Infrastructure Projects; or Consultant or Consulting Firm for
Procurement of Consulting Services; as the case may be, as recorded in the Contract Form signed
by the parties, including all attachments and appendices thereto and all documents incorporated
by reference therein.
Contractor – is a natural or juridical entity whose proposal was accepted by the Procuring Entity
and to whom the Contract to execute the Work was awarded. Contractor as used in these Bidding
Documents may likewise refer to a supplier, distributor, manufacturer, or consultant.
CPI – Consumer Price Index.
DOLE – Department of Labor and Employment.
DTI – Department of Trade and Industry.
4
Foreign-funded Procurement or Foreign-Assisted Project – Refers to procurement whose
funding source is from a foreign government, foreign or international financing institution as
specified in the Treaty or International or Executive Agreement. (2016 revised IRR, Section
5[b]).
GFI – Government Financial Institution.
GOCC – Government-owned and/or –controlled corporation.
Goods – Refer to all items, supplies, materials and general support services, except Consulting
Services and Infrastructure Projects, which may be needed in the transaction of public businesses
or in the pursuit of any government undertaking, project or activity, whether in the nature of
equipment, furniture, stationery, materials for construction, or personal property of any kind,
including non-personal or contractual services such as the repair and maintenance of equipment
and furniture, as well as trucking, hauling, janitorial, security, and related or analogous services,
as well as procurement of materials and supplies provided by the Procuring Entity for such
services. The term “related” or “analogous services” shall include, but is not limited to, lease or
purchase of office space, media advertisements, health maintenance services, and other services
essential to the operation of the Procuring Entity. (2016 revised IRR, Section 5[r])
GOP – Government of the Philippines.
Infrastructure Projects – Include the construction, improvement, rehabilitation, demolition,

repair, restoration or maintenance of roads and bridges, railways, airports, seaports,
communication facilities, civil works components of information technology projects, irrigation,
flood control and drainage, water supply, sanitation, sewerage and solid waste management
systems, shore protection, energy/power and electrification facilities, national buildings, school
buildings, hospital buildings, and other related construction projects of the government. Also
referred to as civil works or works. (2016 revised IRR, Section 5[u])
LGUs – Local Government Units.
NFCC – Net Financial Contracting Capacity.
NGA – National Government Agency.
PCAB – Philippine Contractors Accreditation Board.
PhilGEPS - Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System.
Procurement Project – refers to a specific or identified procurement covering goods,

infrastructure project or consulting services. A Procurement Project shall be described, detailed,
and scheduled in the Project Procurement Management Plan prepared by the agency which shall
be consolidated in the procuring entity's Annual Procurement Plan. (GPPB Circular No. 06-2019
dated 17 July 2019)
PSA – Philippine Statistics Authority.
SEC – Securities and Exchange Commission.
SLCC – Single Largest Completed Contract.
UN – United Nations.
5
Section I. Invitation to Bid
6
Republic of the Philippines
Invitation to Bid for

ANTIQUE AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
Site Development and Extension of Runway including Drainage System
Project ID No.: CBAC-AIR-INFR-2023-02
1. The Department of Transportation (DOTr), through the 2023 GAA Locally

Funded Projects intends to apply the sum of Two Hundred Seventy Million Four
Hundred Fifty Six Thousand Three Hundred Seventeen Pesos and Eight
Centavos (Php270,456,317.08) being the Approved Budget for the Contract (ABC)
to payments under the contract for Antique Airport Development Project (Site
Development and Extension of Runway including Drainage System). Bids
received in excess of the ABC shall be automatically rejected at bid opening.
2. The DOTr now invites bids for the above Procurement Project. Completion of the
Works is required three hundred sixty (360) calendar days inclusive of 40 pre-
determined unworkable days. Bidders should have completed a contract similar to
the Project. The description of an eligible bidder is contained in the Bidding
Documents, particularly, in Section II (Instructions to Bidders).
3. Bidding will be conducted through open competitive bidding procedures using non-
discretionary “pass/fail” criterion as specified in the 2016 revised Implementing Rules
and Regulations (IRR) of Republic Act (RA) No. 9184.
4. Interested bidders may obtain further information from the DOTr and inspect the
Bidding Documents at the address given below from Monday to Friday, 7:00 AM to
4:00 PM.
5. A complete set of Bidding Documents may be acquired by interested bidders on 17

February 2023 until 10:00 AM of 14 March 2023 from the given address and
website/s below and upon payment of the applicable fee for the Bidding Documents,
pursuant to the latest Guidelines issued by the GPPB, in the amount of Fifty
Thousand Pesos (Php50,000.00). The Procuring Entity shall allow the bidder to
present its proof of payment for the fees in person.
6. The DOTr will hold a Pre-Bid Conference on 01 March 2023 at 11:00AM at the
Conference Room, Unit 61, The Columbia Tower, Ortigas Avenue, Barangay Wack-
Wack, Mandaluyong City, and/or through videoconferencing via Google Meet at
https://bit.ly/CBAC-01MAR2023, which shall be open to prospective bidders. The
said Conference can be viewed via Facebook Live at DOTr’s Official Facebook Page
at Department of Transportation-Philippines (@DOTrPH).
7. Bids must be duly received by the BAC Secretariat through manual submission at
the office address as indicated below on or before 10:00AM of 14 March 2023. Late
bids shall not be accepted.
7
8. All bids must be accompanied by a bid security in any of the acceptable forms and in
the amount stated in ITB Clause 16.
9. Bid opening shall be on 14 March 2023, 10:00AM at the Conference Room, Unit 61,
The Columbia Tower, Ortigas Avenue, Barangay Wack-Wack, Mandaluyong City.
Bids will be opened in the presence of the bidders’ representatives who choose to
attend the activity, provided that an Authorization Letter shall be submitted to the
BAC on or before the scheduled opening of bids. Only one (1) representative for each
Bidder may physically attend the bid opening.
10. The DOTr reserves the right to reject any and all bids, declare a failure of bidding, or
not award the contract at any time prior to contract award in accordance with Sections
35.6 and 41 of the 2016 revised Implementing Rules and Regulations (IRR) of RA
No. 9184, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected bidder or bidders.
11. For further information, please refer to:
TIMOTHY JOHN R. BATAN

Chairperson, Centralized Bids and Awards Committee
Thru:
THE BAC SECRETARIAT

Unit 61, The Columbia Tower, Ortigas Avenue
Barangay Wack-Wack, Mandaluyong City
Tel No. (02) 8790-8300 loc. 235
Email: proc-bsd@dotr.gov.ph
Website: www.dotr.gov.ph
Issued this 17th day of February 2023.
____________________________
ORIGINAL SIGNED
TIMOTHY JOHN R. BATAN
Chairperson, Centralized Bids and Awards Committee
8
Section II. Instructions to Bidders
9
1. Scope of Bid
The Procuring Entity, DOTr invites Bids for the Antique Airport Development
Project (Site Development and Extension of Runway including Drainage System)
with Project Identification Number CBAC-AIR-INFR-2023-02.
The Procurement Project (referred to herein as “Project”) is for the construction of

Works, as described in Section VI (Specifications).
2. Funding Information
2.1. The GOP through the source of funding as indicated below for GAA 2023 in
the amount of Two Hundred Seventy Million Four Hundred Fifty Six
Thousand Three Hundred Seventeen Pesos and Eight Centavos
(Php270,456,317.08)
2.2. The source of funding is:
a. NGA, the General Appropriations Act (GAA) CY 2023.
3. Bidding Requirements
The Bidding for the Project shall be governed by all the provisions of RA No. 9184
and its 2016 revised IRR, including its Generic Procurement Manual and associated
policies, rules and regulations as the primary source thereof, while the herein clauses
shall serve as the secondary source thereof.
Any amendments made to the IRR and other GPPB issuances shall be applicable only
to the ongoing posting, advertisement, or invitation to bid by the BAC through the
issuance of a supplemental or bid bulletin.
The Bidder, by the act of submitting its Bid, shall be deemed to have inspected the
site, determined the general characteristics of the contracted Works and the conditions
for this Project, such as the location and the nature of the work; (b) climatic
conditions; (c) transportation facilities; (c) nature and condition of the terrain,
geological conditions at the site communication facilities, requirements, location and
availability of construction aggregates and other materials, labor, water, electric
power and access roads; and (d) other factors that may affect the cost, duration and
execution or implementation of the contract, project, or work and examine all
instructions, forms, terms, and project requirements in the Bidding Documents.
4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, and Obstructive Practices

The Procuring Entity, as well as the Bidders and Contractors, shall observe the
highest standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of the contract. They
or through an agent shall not engage in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive, and
obstructive practices defined under Annex “I” of the 2016 revised IRR of RA No.
9184 or other integrity violations in competing for the Project.
10
5. Eligible Bidders
5.1. Only Bids of Bidders found to be legally, technically, and financially capable
will be evaluated.
5.2. The Bidder must have an experience of having completed a Single Largest
Completed Contract (SLCC) that is similar to this Project, equivalent to at
least fifty percent (50%) of the ABC adjusted, if necessary, by the Bidder to
current prices using the PSA’s CPI, except under conditions provided for in
Section 23.4.2.4 of the 2016 revised IRR of RA No. 9184.
A contract is considered to be “similar” to the contract to be bid if it has the

major categories of work stated in the BDS.
5.3. For Foreign-funded Procurement, the Procuring Entity and the foreign
government/foreign or international financing institution may agree on another
track record requirement, as specified in the Bidding Document prepared for
this purpose.
5.4. The Bidders shall comply with the eligibility criteria under Section 23.4.2 of
the 2016 IRR of RA No. 9184.
6. Origin of Associated Goods

There is no restriction on the origin of Goods other than those prohibited by a
decision of the UN Security Council taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the
UN.
7. Subcontracts
The Procuring Entity has prescribed that Subcontracting is not allowed.
8. Pre-Bid Conference
The Procuring Entity will hold a pre-bid conference for this Project on the specified
date and time either at its physical address and/or through videoconferencing as
indicated in paragraph 6 of the IB.
9. Clarification and Amendment of Bidding Documents

Prospective bidders may request for clarification on and/or interpretation of any part
of the Bidding Documents. Such requests must be in writing and received by the
Procuring Entity, either at its given address or through electronic mail indicated in the
IB, at least ten (10) calendar days before the deadline set for the submission and
receipt of Bids.
11
10. Documents Comprising the Bid: Eligibility and Technical
Components
10.1. The first envelope shall contain the eligibility and technical documents of the
Bid as specified in Section IX. Checklist of Technical and Financial
Documents.
10.2. If the eligibility requirements or statements, the bids, and all other documents
for submission to the BAC are in foreign language other than English, it must
be accompanied by a translation in English, which shall be authenticated by
the appropriate Philippine foreign service establishment, post, or the
equivalent office having jurisdiction over the foreign bidder’s affairs in the
Philippines. For Contracting Parties to the Apostille Convention, only the
translated documents shall be authenticated through an apostille pursuant to
GPPB Resolution No. 13-2019 dated 23 May 2019. The English translation
shall govern, for purposes of interpretation of the bid.
10.3. A valid PCAB License is required, and in case of joint ventures, a valid
special PCAB License, and registration for the type and cost of the contract for
this Project. Any additional type of Contractor license or permit shall be
indicated in the BDS.
10.4. A List of Contractor’s key personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project

Engineers, Materials Engineers, and Foremen) assigned to the contract to be
bid, with their complete qualification and experience data shall be provided.
These key personnel must meet the required minimum years of experience set
in the BDS.
10.5. A List of Contractor’s major equipment units, which are owned, leased, and/or
under purchase agreements, supported by proof of ownership, certification of
availability of equipment from the equipment lessor/vendor for the duration of
the project, as the case may be, must meet the minimum requirements for the
contract set in the BDS.
11. Documents Comprising the Bid: Financial Component

11.1. The second bid envelope shall contain the financial documents for the Bid as
specified in Section IX. Checklist of Technical and Financial Documents.
11.2. Any bid exceeding the ABC indicated in paragraph 1 of the IB shall not be
accepted.
11.3. For Foreign-funded procurement, a ceiling may be applied to bid prices

provided the conditions are met under Section 31.2 of the 2016 revised IRR of
RA No. 9184.
12
12. Alternative Bids
Bidders shall submit offers that comply with the requirements of the Bidding
Documents, including the basic technical design as indicated in the drawings and
specifications. Unless there is a value engineering clause in the BDS, alternative Bids
shall not be accepted.
13. Bid Prices

All bid prices for the given scope of work in the Project as awarded shall be
considered as fixed prices, and therefore not subject to price escalation during
contract implementation, except under extraordinary circumstances as determined by
the NEDA and approved by the GPPB pursuant to the revised Guidelines for Contract
Price Escalation guidelines.
14. Bid and Payment Currencies

14.1. Bid prices may be quoted in the local currency or tradeable currency accepted
by the BSP at the discretion of the Bidder. However, for purposes of bid
evaluation, Bids denominated in foreign currencies shall be converted to
Philippine currency based on the exchange rate as published in the BSP
reference rate bulletin on the day of the bid opening.
Payment of the contract price shall be made in Philippine Pesos.
15. Bid Security

15.1. The Bidder shall submit a Bid Securing Declaration or any form of Bid
Security in the amount indicated in the BDS, which shall be not less than the
percentage of the ABC in accordance with the schedule in the BDS.
15.2. The Bid and bid security shall be valid until one hundred twenty (120)
calendar days from date of opening of bids. Any bid not accompanied by an
acceptable bid security shall be rejected by the Procuring Entity as non-
responsive.
16. Sealing and Marking of Bids

Each Bidder shall submit one copy of the first and second components of its Bid.
The Procuring Entity may request additional hard copies and/or electronic copies of
the Bid. However, failure of the Bidders to comply with the said request shall not be a
ground for disqualification.
If the Procuring Entity allows the submission of bids through online submission to the
given website or any other electronic means, the Bidder shall submit an electronic
copy of its Bid, which must be digitally signed. An electronic copy that cannot be
opened or is corrupted shall be considered non-responsive and, thus, automatically
disqualified.
13
17. Deadline for Submission of Bids
The Bidders shall submit on the specified date and time at its physical address as
indicated in paragraph 7 of the IB.
18. Opening and Preliminary Examination of Bids

18.1. The BAC shall open the Bids in public at the time, on the date, and at the
place specified in paragraph 9 of the IB. The Bidders’ representatives who are
present shall sign a register evidencing their attendance. In case
videoconferencing, webcasting or other similar technologies will be used,
attendance of participants shall likewise be recorded by the BAC Secretariat.
In case the Bids cannot be opened as scheduled due to justifiable reasons, the
rescheduling requirements under Section 29 of the 2016 revised IRR of RA
No. 9184 shall prevail.
18.2. The preliminary examination of Bids shall be governed by Section 30 of the

2016 revised IRR of RA No. 9184.
19. Detailed Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

19.1. The Procuring Entity’s BAC shall immediately conduct a detailed evaluation
of all Bids rated “passed” using non-discretionary pass/fail criteria. The BAC
shall consider the conditions in the evaluation of Bids under Section 32.2 of
2016 revised IRR of RA No. 9184.
19.2. If the Project allows partial bids, all Bids and combinations of Bids as
indicated in the BDS shall be received by the same deadline and opened and
evaluated simultaneously so as to determine the Bid or combination of Bids
offering the lowest calculated cost to the Procuring Entity. Bid Security as
required by ITB Clause 15 shall be submitted for each contract (lot)
separately.
19.3. In all cases, the NFCC computation pursuant to Section 23.4.2.6 of the 2016
revised IRR of RA No. 9184 must be sufficient for the total of the ABCs for
all the lots participated in by the prospective Bidder.
20. Post Qualification

Within a non-extendible period of five (5) calendar days from receipt by the Bidder of
the notice from the BAC that it submitted the Lowest Calculated Bid, the Bidder shall
submit its latest income and business tax returns filed and paid through the BIR
Electronic Filing and Payment System (eFPS), and other appropriate licenses and
permits required by law and stated in the BDS.
14
21. Signing of the Contract
The documents required in Section 37.2 of the 2016 revised IRR of RA No. 9184
shall form part of the Contract. Additional Contract documents are indicated in the
BDS.
15
Section III. Bid Data Sheet
16
Bid Data Sheet
ITB Clause
5.2 For this purpose, contracts similar to the Project refer to contracts which have
the same major categories of work, which shall be:
Road, Highways, Pavements, Railways, Airport Horizontal Structure, and

Bridges
with a contract amount of not less than Php135,228,158.54.

7 Subcontracting is not allowed.
10.3 The PCAB Registration required for this project is Medium B for Road,
Highways, Pavements, Railways, Airport Horizontal Structure, and
Bridges.
For joint venture bidders, a Joint License issued by the PCAB pursuant to
Section 38 of RA 4566, and not the PCAB license and registration individually
issued to each joint venture partner must be submitted. Failure of the joint
venture bidder to submit a Joint License shall be a ground for its
disqualification despite the submission of the individual licenses of each joint
venture partner.
Medium B for Road, Highways, Pavements, Railways, Airport Horizontal

Structure, and Bridges.
10.4 The key personnel must meet the required minimum years of experience set
below:
Key Personnel General Experience Relevant Experience

1. Project Manager 5 years 2 years
2. Licensed Civil Engineer 3 years 2 years
3. Licensed Geodetic 3 years 2 years
Engineer
4. Materials Engineer I, duly 2 years 2 years
accredited by DPWH
5. Health and Safety 2 years 2 years
Engineer/Officer
with Certificate of Training
in Construction Safety and
Health Training (COSH)
The bidders shall submit the following documents as part of the Technical
Proposal:
1. List of Contractors Personnel (SF-INFR-48) to be assigned to the
contract to be bid with their respective curriculum vitae showing, among
others, their educational attainment, professional qualification and
experiences.
17
 The supporting documents stated in Form SF-INFR-48 shall be
submitted as part of post-qualification requirements.
 Duplication of function of Key Personnel for the project shall not be
allowed.
 In the event that the bidder intends to participate in the procurement of
two (2) or more projects, overlapping of Key Personnel shall not be
allowed.
2. Duly signed Statement of Availability of Key Personnel and

Equipment (FORM SF-INFR-18).
10.5 List of Equipment:
Particular Owned Lease/Purchased
Agreement Total
Unit Capacity Unit Capacity
Dump Truck 1 10 cu.m. 3 10 cu.m. 4
Backhoe 1 0.80 cu.m. 1
Payloader 1 1.50 cu.m. 1
Roadgrader 1 135 hp 1
Vibratory
1 10 MT 1
Compactor
One Bagger
1 - 1
Concrete Mixer
Concrete Vibrator 2 - 2
Towerlight with
4 - 4
Genset
Service Truck 1 - 1
Water Tank Truck 1 4,000 Liters 1
Bulldozer 2 165 hp 2
Transit Mixer 1 5 cu.m 1
Asphalt Distributor 1 5T 1
At least 1
Asphalt Paver 1
3.0m width
Pneumatic Tire
1 10MT 1
Roller
Generator Set 1 40KVA 1
Asphalt Batching
Plant or Certification
of Availability of 1 -
Ready-Mix 1
(Asphalt); if any
Improvised Concrete
Batch Plant or
*Certification of
1 -
Availability of 1
Ready-Mix
(Concrete); if any
Power Broom
(Tower Type with 1 - 1
Engine)
18
Service Vehicle
Pick up at least 2020 1 - 1
Model
TOTAL 13 15 28
List of Contractor’s Equipment assigned to the Proposed Contract (Form
SF-INFR-49).
 Proof of Ownership or certification of availability of equipment from the

equipment lessor/vendor for the duration of the project, as the case may
be, shall be submitted during post-qualification evaluation.
 In the event that the bidder intends to participate in the procurement of
two (2) or more projects, overlapping of Pledged Equipment shall not be
allowed.
12 No further instructions.
15.1 The bid security shall be in the form of a Bid Securing Declaration or any of
the following forms and amounts:
a. The amount of not less than Five Million Four Hundred Nine Thousand
One Hundred Twenty-Six Pesos and Thirty-Four Centavos
(Php5,409,126.34) (2% of ABC), if bid security is in cash,
cashier’s/manager’s check, bank draft/guarantee or irrevocable letter of
credit;
b. The amount of not less than Thirteen Million Five Hundred Twenty-
Two Thousand Eight Hundred Fifteen Pesos and Eighty-Five
Centavos (Php13,522,815.85) (5% of ABC) if bid security is in Surety
Bond.
16 Each Bidder shall submit one (1) original hard copy and one (1) soft copy
in a Flash drive. (in PDF format except for the Bill of Quantities and
Detailed Estimates which must be in Excel format).
In the event of any discrepancies between the Original hard copy and soft
copy, the original hard copy shall prevail.
19.2 Partial bids are not allowed. The infrastructure project is packaged in a single
lot and the lot shall not be divided into sub-lots for the purpose of bidding,
evaluation, and contract award.
20 1. Latest income and business tax returns for the last six months preceding
the date of bid submission filed and paid through BIR Electronic Filing
and Payment System (eFPS);
2. The supporting documents of the following Forms:
(a) Statement of All On-going Government and Private Contracts (SF-
INFR-15);
(b) List of Contractors Personnel (SF-INFR-48); and
(c) List of Contractor’s Equipment assigned to the Proposed Contract
(Form SF-INFR-49).
21 Additional contract documents relevant to the Project that may be required by
existing laws and/or the Procuring Entity, such as:
1. Duly signed PERT/CPM Network Diagram, Bar Chart with S-Curve, Cash
Flow Projection and Payment Schedule on monthly basis;
2. Duly signed Manpower Schedule;
19
3. Duly signed Equipment Utilization Schedule;
4. Duly signed Construction Method in Detailed Narrative Form;
5. Contractor’s All Risk Issuance (CARI);
6. Certification under oath stating that the contractor is free and clean of all
tax liabilities to the Government; and
7. Construction Safety and Health Program approved by the DOLE that shall
also include requirements under the DPWH Department Order No. 30
Series of 2021, Revised Construction Safety Guidelines for the
Implementation of Infrastructure Projects During the COVID-19 Public
Health Crisis, Amending Department Order No. 39 Series of 2020.
20
Section IV. General Conditions of Contract
21
1. Scope of Contract
This Contract shall include all such items, although not specifically mentioned, that
can be reasonably inferred as being required for its completion as if such items were
expressly mentioned herein. All the provisions of RA No. 9184 and its 2016 revised
IRR, including the Generic Procurement Manual, and associated issuances, constitute
the primary source for the terms and conditions of the Contract, and thus, applicable
in contract implementation. Herein clauses shall serve as the secondary source for the
terms and conditions of the Contract.
This is without prejudice to Sections 74.1 and 74.2 of the 2016 revised IRR of RA
No. 9184 allowing the GPPB to amend the IRR, which shall be applied to all
procurement activities, the advertisement, posting, or invitation of which were issued
after the effectivity of the said amendment.
2. Sectional Completion of Works

If sectional completion is specified in the Special Conditions of Contract (SCC),
references in the Conditions of Contract to the Works, the Completion Date, and the
Intended Completion Date shall apply to any Section of the Works (other than
references to the Completion Date and Intended Completion Date for the whole of the
Works).
3. Possession of Site
3.1 The Procuring Entity shall give possession of all or parts of the Site to the
Contractor based on the schedule of delivery indicated in the SCC, which
corresponds to the execution of the Works. If the Contractor suffers delay or
incurs cost from failure on the part of the Procuring Entity to give possession
in accordance with the terms of this clause, the Procuring Entity’s
Representative shall give the Contractor a Contract Time Extension and certify
such sum as fair to cover the cost incurred, which sum shall be paid by
Procuring Entity.
3.2 If possession of a portion is not given by the above date, the Procuring Entity
will be deemed to have delayed the start of the relevant activities. The
resulting adjustments in contract time to address such delay may be addressed
through contract extension provided under Annex “E” of the 2016 revised IRR
of RA No. 9184.
4. The Contractor’s Obligations

The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Schedule of Key
Personnel indicating their designation, in accordance with ITB Clause 10.3 and
specified in the BDS, to carry out the supervision of the Works.
The Procuring Entity will approve any proposed replacement of key personnel only if
their relevant qualifications and abilities are equal to or better than those of the
personnel listed in the Schedule.
22
5. Performance Security
5.1. Within ten (10) calendar days from receipt of the Notice of Award from the
Procuring Entity but in no case later than the signing of the contract by both
parties, the successful Bidder shall furnish the performance security in any of
the forms prescribed in Section 39 of the 2016 revised IRR.
5.2. The Contractor, by entering into the Contract with the Procuring Entity,
acknowledges the right of the Procuring Entity to institute action pursuant to
RA No. 3688 against any subcontractor be they an individual, firm,
partnership, corporation, or association supplying the Contractor with labor,
materials and/or equipment for the performance of this Contract.
6. Site Investigation Reports

The Contractor, in preparing the Bid, shall rely on any Site Investigation Reports
referred to in the SCC supplemented by any information obtained by the Contractor.
7. Warranty
7.1. In case the Contractor fails to undertake the repair works under Section 62.2.2
of the 2016 revised IRR, the Procuring Entity shall forfeit its performance
security, subject its property(ies) to attachment or garnishment proceedings,
and perpetually disqualify it from participating in any public bidding. All
payables of the GOP in his favor shall be offset to recover the costs.
7.2. The warranty against Structural Defects/Failures, except that occasioned-on

force majeure, shall cover the period from the date of issuance of the
Certificate of Final Acceptance by the Procuring Entity. Specific duration of
the warranty is found in the SCC.
8. Liability of the Contractor

Subject to additional provisions, if any, set forth in the SCC, the Contractor’s liability
under this Contract shall be as provided by the laws of the Republic of the
Philippines.
If the Contractor is a joint venture, all partners to the joint venture shall be jointly and
severally liable to the Procuring Entity.
9. Termination for Other Causes

Contract termination shall be initiated in case it is determined prima facie by the
Procuring Entity that the Contractor has engaged, before, or during the
implementation of the contract, in unlawful deeds and behaviors relative to contract
acquisition and implementation, such as, but not limited to corrupt, fraudulent,
collusive, coercive, and obstructive practices as stated in ITB Clause 4.
23
10. Dayworks
Subject to the guidelines on Variation Order in Annex “E” of the 2016 revised IRR of
RA No. 9184, and if applicable as indicated in the SCC, the Dayworks rates in the
Contractor’s Bid shall be used for small additional amounts of work only when the
Procuring Entity’s Representative has given written instructions in advance for
additional work to be paid for in that way.
11. Program of Work

11.1. The Contractor shall submit to the Procuring Entity’s Representative for
approval the said Program of Work showing the general methods,
arrangements, order, and timing for all the activities in the Works. The
submissions of the Program of Work are indicated in the SCC.
11.2. The Contractor shall submit to the Procuring Entity’s Representative for
approval an updated Program of Work at intervals no longer than the period
stated in the SCC. If the Contractor does not submit an updated Program of
Work within this period, the Procuring Entity’s Representative may withhold
the amount stated in the SCC from the next payment certificate and continue
to withhold this amount until the next payment after the date on which the
overdue Program of Work has been submitted.
12. Instructions, Inspections and Audits

The Contractor shall permit the GOP or the Procuring Entity to inspect the
Contractor’s accounts and records relating to the performance of the Contractor and to
have them audited by auditors of the GOP or the Procuring Entity, as may be
required.
13. Advance Payment

The Procuring Entity shall, upon a written request of the Contractor which shall be
submitted as a Contract document, make an advance payment to the Contractor in an
amount not exceeding fifteen percent (15%) of the total contract price, to be made in
lump sum, or at the most two installments according to a schedule specified in the
SCC, subject to the requirements in Annex “E” of the 2016 revised IRR of RA No.
9184.
14. Progress Payments

The Contractor may submit a request for payment for Work accomplished. Such
requests for payment shall be verified and certified by the Procuring Entity’s
Representative/Project Engineer. Except as otherwise stipulated in the SCC,
materials and equipment delivered on the site but not completely put in place shall not
be included for payment.
24
15. Operating and Maintenance Manuals
15.1. If required, the Contractor will provide “as built” Drawings and/or operating
and maintenance manuals as specified in the SCC.
15.2. If the Contractor does not provide the Drawings and/or manuals by the dates
stated above, or they do not receive the Procuring Entity’s Representative’s
approval, the Procuring Entity’s Representative may withhold the amount
stated in the SCC from payments due to the Contractor.
25
Section V. Special Conditions of Contract
26
Special Conditions of Contract
GCC Clause
2 Not applicable.
4.1 The DOTr shall give possession of all parts of the Site to the Contractor
beginning on the date of effectivity of contract until the date of its
termination and/or project completion.
6 The site investigation reports are: Not applicable.
7.2 Fifteen (15) years.
10 Dayworks are applicable at the rate shown in the Contractor’s original
Bid.
11.1 The Contractor shall submit the Program of Work to the Procuring
Entity’s Representative within ten (10) calendar days of delivery of the
Notice of Award.
11.2 The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated Program of
Work is five percent (5%) of the contract amount.
14 No further instructions.
15.1 The date by which operating and maintenance manuals are required is
Not applicable.
The date by which “as built” drawings are required is fifteen (15)
calendar days after project completion.
15.2 The amount to be withheld for failing to produce “as built” drawings
and/or operating and maintenance manuals by the date required is five
percent (5%) of the contract amount.
27
Section VI. Specifications
28
Name of Project : ANTIQUE AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
CY 2023
Project Description : SITE DEVELOPMENT AND EXTENSION OF RUNWAY
INCLUDING DRAINAGE SYSTEM
Location : San Jose de Buenavista, Antique
Duration : Three Hundred Sixty (360) Calendar Days inclusive of 40 pre-
determined unworkable days
Source of Fund : GAA 2023
SCOPE OF WORK
The project covers the supply of labor, materials, tools /equipment and construction related
permits necessary for the ANTIQUE AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT. The details of
works are best enumerated below, however, it is understood that the Contract includes all
works and services though not specifically mentioned herein, but are needed to fully
complete the project shall be undertaken by the Contractor.
The following scope of works which shall be done in accordance with the approved plans,
specifications and provision of contract.
A. STRIP GRADE CORRECTION (STA 1+430 to STA 1+860)
ITEM 100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. This item covers supply of labor and
equipment necessary for clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing all
vegetation and debris with an area of 69,139.00 sq.m. All surfaces objects
and all trees, stumps, roots and other protruding obstructions, not designated to
remain, shall be cleared and/or grubbed. This item also includes disposal of
grubbed objects to a location designated by the supervising engineer within
airport property. (Please refer to plans)
ITEM 102 EXCAVATION AND DISPOSAL. This item covers the supply of labor and
equipment to finish the excavation & disposal works with a total volume of
42,797.00 cu.m. The work shall conform to lines, grades and dimension as
indicated on the approved plans.
ITEM 104 EMBANKMENT (from other source). This item covers the supply of labor
and equipment to finish the embankment shall be composed of common
borrow (suitable materials) with a loose volume of 83,099.00 cu.m. (inclusive
20% shrinkage factor). The work shall conform to lines, grades and dimension
as indicated on the approved plans.
ITEM 508 CLASS II ROCKS (100-900kgs. /pc). This item covers the supply of labor,
materials and equipment necessary for the formation of the Class II Rocks with
the total volume of 9,783.00 cu.m. (Pls. refer to plans)
B. CONCRETING OF RUNWAY (STA 1+430 to STA 1+710) - 280m x 45m width
ITEM 105 SUBGRADE PREPARATION. This item covers the supply of labor and
equipment for the preparation of subgrade for the support of overlying
structural layers. Unless authorized by the Engineer, subgrade preparation
29
shall not be done unless the Contractor is able to start immediately the
construction of the pavement structure. It covers a total area of 12,600.00
sq.m.
ITEM 201 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (0.3m thk.). This item covers the supply of
materials, labor and equipment required for the furnishing, placing and
compacting an aggregates base course in accordance with the design grade,
dimensions, and cross-sections as shown on the approved plans. It covers
loose volume of 4,347.00 cu.m. (inclusive 15% shrinkage factor). (see
attached plans for reference).
ITEM 207 CEMENT TREATED BASE COURSE (0.15m thk). This item covers the
supply of materials, labor and equipment required for the provision of a
foundation for the surface course composed of aggregated, Portland cement
and water in proper proportions, mixed by a travel plant or in a central plant
and spread and compacted on a prepared subgrade/subbase course in
accordance with the design grade, dimensions, cross-sections as shown on the
approved plans. It covers a total volume of 1,890.00 cu.m. excluding
shrinkage factor (see attached plans for reference).
ITEM 311 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT (0.30m. thick) @

4,500 psi. This item covers the supply of materials, labor and equipment
required in concrete paving of 0.30 meter thick Portland Cement Concrete
Pavement constructed on a prepared base course and also the provision of steel
reinforcing bars and formworks necessary in accordance with the
specifications and shall conform to the lines, grade, thickness and typical cross
section shown on approved plans. This covers a total area of 12,600.00 sq.m.
or a total volume of 3,780.00 cu.m. Also, provide additional wastage factor on
all works under this item (see attached plans for reference).
C. CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE BOX CULVERT WITH WINGWALLS
ITEM 102 EXCAVATION AND DISPOSAL. This item covers the supply of labor and
equipment to finish the excavation & disposal works with a total volume of
1,881.00 cu.m. The work shall conform to lines, grades and dimension as
indicated on the approved plans.
ITEM 405 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE (4,500psi). The work includes the supply of
materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the construction and
cast-in place of 120.00 l.m of reinforced concrete box culvert; fabrication and
installation of reinforcing steel bars; and fabrication and installation of
formworks and scaffoldings as indicated on the approved plans.
- Total Weight of Rebars = 186,843.00 kgs.
- Total Volume of Concrete = 696.00 cu.m.
30
D. ASPHALT OVERLAY OF RUNWAY (4” thick) INCLUDING SHOULDER
GRADE CORRECTION
ITEM 302 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT. This item covers the supply of materials,
labor and equipment consist of preparing and treating an existing pavement
with bituminous materials for 2-layer in accordance with the approved plans
and specifications, preparatory to the construction of a bituminous surface
course. This covers a total area of 12,600.00 sq.m and a coverage of 26.00
M.T. Also, provide additional wastage factor on all works under this item
(see attached plans for reference).
Project Coverage: From Sta. 1+430 to Sta. 1+710 x 45m width
ITEM 310 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACE COURSE, HOT-LAID (4”

thick). This item covers the supply of materials, labor and equipment
necessary on constructing a bituminous concrete surface course composed of
aggregates, mineral filler and bituminous material mixed in a central plant,
constructed and laid hot on the prepared base (2-layer) in accordance with this
specification and in conformity with lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-
section shown on plans. This covers a total area of 12,600.00 sq.m. Also,
provide additional wastage factor on all works under this item (see attached
plans for reference).
SPL-1 CUTTING & REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY TRANSITION. This item

covers the supply of materials, labor and equipment necessary on constructing,
cutting and removal of bituminous concrete surface course which has been
placed as a temporary transition at the end of the partially completed asphalt
overlay in accordance with this specification and in conformity with lines,
grades, thickness and typical cross-section shown on plans. This covers a total
area of 7,200.00 sq.m. Also, provide additional wastage factor on all works
under this item (see attached plans for reference).
SPL-2 RUNWAY MARKINGS. This includes the supply of labor and equipment
for the painting/repainting of the affected runway pavement markings using
reflectorized paint (white, gray and yellow) for runway center line, runway
markings (18 & 36), runway edge marking, runway centerline, aiming point
marking & touchdown with a total coverage of 7,811.00 sq.m. Temporary
marking using flat latex paint also included under this item. The work shall
conform to lines, grades and dimensions as indicated on the approved plans
(see attached plans for reference).
ITEM 201 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE (0.30m. thick) – SHOULDER GRADE

CORRECTION. This item covers the supply of materials, labor and
equipment required for the furnishing, placing and compacting an aggregates
base course on a prepared subgrade in accordance with the design grade,
dimensions, and cross-sections as shown on the approved plans. It covers
31
loose volume of 1,449.00 cu.m (inclusive 15% shrinkage factor). (see
attached plans for reference).
Project Coverage: From Sta. 1+430 to Sta. 1+710 x 7.5m width

both sides
E. CONSTRUCTION OF BARBED WIRE FENCE (343.00 l.m.)
ITEM 101 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS. This item covers the
supply of labor and equipment
for the demolition of existing fence for the proposed construction of fence as shown
on the approved plans and in accordance with specifications and in conformity with
the lines, grades and dimensions.
Project Coverage: 188.00 l.m
ITEM I SITEWORKS. This item covers the supply of labor and minor tools
necessary excavate for the construction of column footings and column.
Excavation, backfilling works and filling of gravel base indicated in the
approved plans are also included under this item. (Pls. refer to plans)
Project Coverage: 20.00 cu.m
ITEM II CONCRETE WORKS (3,500 psi). This item covers the supply of labor,
materials and equipment to finish concreting works for the construction of
column footings, and columns including fabrication / installation /dismantling
of steel bars and formworks. (Pls. refer to plans)
ITEM III METAL WORKS. This covers the supply of labor, materials and
equipment/tools needed to complete the metal works including fabrication,
installation and painting of G.I. pipe, barbed wire and other materials as
indicated on the approved plans. (Pls. refer to plans)
F. CONSTRUCTION OF CHB PERIMETER FENCE (624.00 l.m.)
ITEM I SITEWORKS. This item covers the supply of labor and minor tools
necessary excavate for the construction of column footings and column.
Excavation, backfilling works and filling of gravel base indicated in the
approved plans are also included under this item. (Pls. refer to plans)
ITEM II CONCRETE WORKS (3,500 psi). This item covers the supply of labor,
materials and equipment to finish concreting works for the construction of
column footings, and columns including fabrication / installation /dismantling
of steel bars and formworks. (Pls. refer to plans)
ITEM III MASONRY WORKS. This covers the supply of labor, materials and
equipment/tools necessary for the laying of 6” thick CHB wall including
32
mortar, installation of reinforcing steel bars as indicated on the approved
plans. (Pls. refer to plans)
Project Coverage: 1,282.00 sq.m
ITEM IV METAL WORKS. This covers the supply of labor, materials and
equipment/tools needed to complete the metal works including fabrication,
installation and painting of G.I. pipe, barbed wire and other materials as
indicated on the approved plans. (Pls. refer to plans)
G. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I TEMPORARY FACILITIES
The following provisions must be delivered within ten (10) calendar days upon receipt
of the Notice to Proceed (NTP)
1.0 Staff House

This item covers the Contractor’s provision of PMO Staff House with a minimum
area of 100 sq.m. on rental basis. The facilities shall be provided with air-con
including the supply of kitchen utensils, gas and stove, beds and beddings and dining
sets for the exclusive use of DOTr PMO in supervising the project. The Contractor
shall be responsible for the payment of utility bills (water and electric) for the whole
duration of the project.
2.0 Service Vehicle

This covers the provision of one lease/rent service vehicle, latest model 4x2pick-up
with cab, air conditioned, automatic transmission, power window, and diesel; for the
exclusive use of DOTr Engineers supervising the project for the period of Three
Hundred Sixty (360) Calendar Days. Service driver, insurances and maintenance for
the said service shall be included under this item. Land Transportation Office (LTO)
registration for the service vehicle will be provided by the Contractor. Moreover,
driver, fuel and periodic maintenance for the service vehicle will also be provided by
the Contractor that are incorporated in the Contractor’s overhead cost throughout the
duration of the project, but will not be considered as per item.
II MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
This works includes mobilization and demobilization of the Contractor’s personnel,

and equipment necessary for performing the work required under the contract.
a. Mobilization shall include all activities and associated costs for the transportation of
Contractor’s personnel, equipment and establishment of offices and other necessary
facilities for the Contractor’s operations at the site.
b. Demobilization shall include the disassembly of offices and other facilities on site, as
well as removal and hauling of debris and rubbish materials.
33
III PROJECT BILLBOARD
This item covers the provisions of materials and labor of two (2) printed tarpaulin (8ft
x 8ft) project billboard needed in the execution of the project.
IV HEALTH AND SAFETY

This item covers the provisions of Safety and Health including the materials and
facilities for regular disinfection, temperature check and COVID-19 Rapid Test,
supply of Personal Protective Equipment for each personnel/worker, safety signage;
1. Materials and Facilities for regular disinfection - 1 lot

Temperature check and COVID-19 Rapid Test
2. PPE - safety shoes - 100 pairs

- safety helmet - 100 pieces
- safety gloves - 400 pairs
- safety vest - 100 pieces
- face mask - 36,000 pieces
3. Safety Signage - 1 lot
This item also includes the provision of Safety Officer for the whole duration of the
project of Three Hundred Sixty (360) Calendar Days. The contractor should also
ensure compliance with Health and Safety Program as approved by DOLE.
In addition to the above item, the contractor shall ensure that the Revised
Construction Safety Guidelines for the Implementation of Infrastructure Projects
during the COVID-19 Public Health Crisis of the DPWH Department Order No.39,
Series of 2020 are strictly followed.
V PERMITS AND CLEARANCES

This item covers the expenses for all permits, clearances, other National and Local
Government requirements prior to the construction and other related permits
necessary during the implementation and completion of the project.
The contractor shall be responsible in coordination with DOTr-PMO for all

laboratory, material testing, environmental compliance certificate (ECC), and
construction permit, etc.) necessary in the project implementation.
34
A.STRIP GRADE CORRECTION (STA 1+430 to
STA 1+860)
ITEM 100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
100.1 DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of clearing, grubbing, removing and disposing all vegetation
and debris as designated to remain in the Contract, except those objects that are
designated to remain in place or are to be removed in consonance with the provisions
of these Specifications. The work shall also include the preservation from injury of
defacement of all objects designated to remain.
100.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

100.2.1 General
The Engineer will establish the limits of work and designate all trees, shrubs,
plants and other things to remain. The Contractor shall preserve all objects
designated to remain. Paint required for cut or scared surface of trees or shrubs
selected for retention shall be approved asphalt base paint prepared especially
for tree surgery.
100.2.2 Clearing and Grubbing
All surface objects and trees, stumps, roots and other protruding obstructions
not designated to remain shall be cleared and/or grubbed including mowing as
required, except provided below:
1. Removal of undisturbed stumps and roots and nonperishable solid objects

with a minimum of 900 mm (36 inches) below sub-grade or slope of
embankments will not be required.
2. In areas outside of the grading limits of cut and embankment areas, stumps
and nonperishable solid objects shall be cut off not more than 150mm (6
inches0 above ground line or low water level.
3. In areas to be rounded at the top of cut slopes and stumps shall be cut off
or flush with below the surface of the final slope line.
4. Grubbing of pits, channel changes and ditches will be required only to the
depth necessitated by the proposed excavation within such areas.
Except in areas to be excavated, stump holes and other holes from which
obstructions are removed shall be back filled with suitable material and
compacted to the required density.
If perishable material is burn, it shall be burned under the constant care of

competent watchmen at such times and in such a manner that the surrounding
vegetation and other adjacent property or anything designated to remain on the
35
right of way will not be jeopardized. If permitted, burning shall be done in
accordance with applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations.
The Contractor shall use high intensity burning procedures, (i.e. incinerators,
high stacking or pit and ditch burning with forced air supplements) that
produce intense burning with little or no visible smoke emission during the
burning process. At the conclusion of each burning session, the fire shall be
completely extinguished so that no smoldering debris remains.
In the event that the Contractor is directed by the Engineer not to start the
burning operations or to suspend such operations because of hazardous
weather conditions, material to be burned which interferes with subsequent
construction operations shall be moved by the Contractor to temporary
locations clear of construction operations. And later, if directed by the
Engineer shall be placed on a designated spot and burned.
Materials and debris, which cannot be burned and perishable materials may be
disposed of by methods and the locations approved by the Engineer, on or off
the project. If disposal is burying, the debris shall be placed in layers with the
material to disturb and avoid nesting. Each layer shall be covered or mixed
with earth material by landfill method to fill all voids. The top layer of
material buried shall be covered with at least 300mm (12 inches) of earth fill
or other approved material and shall be graded, shaped and compacted to
present a pleasing appearance. If the disposal location is off the project, the
Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with property owners in
writing for obtaining suitable disposal locations, which are outside the limits
of view from the project. The cost involved shall be included in the unit bid
price. A copy of such agreement shall be furnished to the Engineer. The
disposal areas shall be seeded, fertilized and mulched at the Contractor’s
expense.
Woody material shall be disposed by chipping. The wood chips may use for
mulch, slope erosion control or may be uniformly spread over selected areas
as directed by the Engineer. Wood chips used as mulch for soil erosion control
shall have a maximum thickness of 12mm (1/2 inch) and faces not exceeding
3900 square mm (6 square inches) on any individual surface area. Wood chips
not designated for use under other sections shall be spread over the designated
areas in layers not to exceed 75 mm (3 inches) loose thickness. Diseased trees
shall be buried or disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
All merchantable timber in the clearing area which have not been removed
from the right of way prior to the beginning of construction, shall become the
property of the Contractor, unless otherwise provided.
Low hanging branches and unsound or unsightly branches on trees or shrubs

designated to remain shall be trimmed as directed. Branches trees extending
over the limits shall be trimmed to give a clear height of 6-m (20 feet) above
the runway or roadway surface. All trimming shall be done by skilled
workmen and in accordance with good tree surgery practices.
36
Timber cut inside the area staked for clearing shall be filled within the area to
be cleared.
100.2.3 Individual Removal of Trees or Stumps
Individual trees or stumps designated by the Engineer for removal and located
in areas other than those establish for clearing and grubbing roadside cleanup
shall be removed and disposed of as specified under subsection 100.2.2.
Except trees removed shall be cut as nearly flush with the ground as
practicable without removing stumps.
100.2.4 Demolition
When shown on the Plans or directed by the Engineer structures of stone,

masonry, and timber and like material shall be demolished. Where part only of
the structure has to be demolished the Contractor shall take all possible care to
ensure that only part is demolished and shall make good at his own expense
any damage beyond that part. During demolition the Contractor shall take
every precaution to protect the roadway, embankment and all other existing
works from damage and to ensure the safety of his workmen and the general
public.
100.3 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT

Measurement must be by one or more of the following alternate methods:
1. Area Basis. The work to be paid for shall be the number of hectares and fractions
thereof acceptably cleared and grubbed within the limits indicated on the Plans or
as may be adjusted in the filed staking by the Engineer. Areas not within the
clearing and grubbing limits shown on the Plans or not staked for clearing and
grubbing will not be measured for payment.
2. Lump-Sum Basis. When the Bill of Quantities or Contract contains a Clearing and
Grubbing Lump-sum Item, no measurement of area will be made for such Item.
3. Individual Unit Basis (Selective Clearing). The diameter of trees will be measured
at a height of 1.4m (54 inches) above the ground. Trees less than 150mm (6
inches) in diameter will not be measured for payment.
When the Bill of Quantities or Contract indicates measurement of trees by individual
unit basis, the units will be designated and measured in accordance with the following
schedule of sizes:
Diameter at height 1.4 m Pay Item Designation
Over 150 mm to 900 mm Small

Over 900 mm Large
37
100.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 151.3, shall be paid for at
the contract price for each of the Pay Items listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities. The price and payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this
Item.
Payment will be under:
UNIT OF
PAY ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION
MEASUREMENT
100 (1) Clearing and Grubbing Hectare

100 (2) Clearing and Grubbing Lump Sum
Individual Removal of Trees,
100 (3) Each
Small
Individual Removal of Trees,
100 (4) Each
Large
38
ITEM 102 EXCAVATION
102.1 DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of excavation, removing and satisfactorily disposing of all materials
within the limits of the work required to conduct the purpose in accordance with these
specifications and in conformity with the dimensions and typical section shown on the plans
and with the lines and grades established by the Engineer. All suitable material taken from
excavation shall be used in the formation of embankment, sub-grade, and back filling as
indicated on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. When the volume of the excavation
exceeds that required to construct the embankments to the grades indicated, the excess shall
be used to grade the areas of ultimate development or constructing the fill to the grades
indicated, the deficiency shall be supplied from borrow sources at locations within the
authorized areas.
102.2 CLASSIFICATION
All material excavated shall be defined as “Unclassified Excavation” unless, in the proposal
form, prices are asked and bids are taken for “Solid Rock Excavation” and “Common
Excavation”. “Unclassified Excavation” shall include all excavation performed under this
item regardless of the material encountered. “Solid Rock Excavation” when provided in the
proposal shall include all solid rock in ledges, in bedded deposits, in unstratified masses, and
conglomerate deposits which are firmly cemented they present all the characteristics of solid
rock and which cannot be removed without drilling and blasting. All boulders contain a
volume of more than 0.5 cubic meter will be classified as “Solid Rock Excavation”,
“Common Excavation”, when provided in the proposal, shall include all solid excavation not
included in “Solid Rock Excavation”. Frozen condition of any of the different classified
materials taken from excavation does not constitute a basis for a calm for higher classification
or for extra work on the part of the contractor.
102.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS

102.3.1 General
The rough excavation shall be carried to the necessary depth to obtain the specified
depth of sub-grade classification shown on the plans. Likewise, on embankments, the
depth of sub-grade densification shall be as shown on the plans. Should the
Contractor, through negligence or other fault, excavate below the designated lines, he
shall replace the excavation with approved materials, in an approved material, in an
approved manner and condition at his own expense. The Engineer shall have
complete control over the excavation, moving, placing, and disposition of all material
and shall determine the suitability of material to be placed in embankments. All
material determined unsuitable should be disposed of in waste areas or as directed.
Topsoil shall not be used in fills or in sub-grades should be disposed of in waste areas
or as directed. The Contractor shall inform and satisfy himself to as to the character,
quantity and distribution of all materials to be excavated. No payment will be made
for any excavated material, which is used for purpose other than those designated. All
39
spoil areas shall be leveled to a uniform line and section and shall present a neat
appearance before project acceptance.
Those areas outside the pavement in which the top layer of soil material becomes
compacted due to hauling or to any other activity of the contractor, shall be scarified
and disc harrowed or plowed to a depth of 100 mm, as directed, to loosen and
pulverized the soil. It is necessary to interrupt existing surface drainage, conduits,
utilities, or similar underground structure, or parts thereof, the contractor shall be
responsible for and shall take all necessary precautions to protect and preserve or
provide temporary services. When such facilities are encountered, the contractor shall
notify the Engineer, who shall arrange for their removal, if necessary. The contractor
at his own expense, satisfactorily repair all damage to such facilities or structures
which may result from any at his operations during the period of the contract.
102.3.2 Excavation
Excavation shall be performed as indicated on the contract plans to the lines, grades,
and elevation shown or as directed by the Engineer, and shall be made so that the
requirements for formation of embankment can be followed. No excavation or
stripping shall be started until the Engineer shall have taken cross-sectional elevations
and measurement of the existing ground surface, and has staked out the proposed
work. All material encountered within the limits indicated shall be removed and
disposed as of directed. When directed, temporary drains and drainage ditches shall
be installed to intercept or divert surface water, which may affect the work. When
selected grading is specified or required as indicated on the plans, the placed in the
embankment and pavement sub-grades as determined from the solid profile and soil
characteristics. This material shall be deposited within the designated areas as shown
on the plans or as directed by the Engineer. If, at the time of excavation, it is possible
to place any material in its proper section of the permanent construction, it shall be
stockpiled in approved areas for later use. Rock, shale, hardpan, loose rock, boulders,
or other material unsatisfactory for sub-grades, intermediate areas or any areas
intended for turning shall be excavated to a minimum depth of 300 mm, or to depth
specified by the Engineer, below the contemplated surface of the sub-grade or the
designated grades. Muck, peat, matted roots, or other suitable material for sub-grade
foundation, shall be removed to the depth specified, to provide a satisfactory
foundation. Unsatisfactory materials shall be disposed at locations designated by the
Engineer. All materials excavated shall be paid at the contract unit price per cubic
meter for “Unclassified Excavation”, “Common Excavation”, or Solid Rock
Excavation”, as the case maybe, when classification for the last two items is provided
in the proposal. The portion so excavated shall be refilled with suitable selected
material is specified, obtained from the grading operations or borrow area and
thoroughly compacted by rolling. The necessary refilling will constitute a part of the
embankment. Where trenching out is done to provide for a course of pavement, the
depth thus created shall be ditched at frequent intervals to provide adequate drainage.
The contractor shall make the grade to avoid haul will not be permitted. The right is
reserve to make minor adjustment or revisions in lines or grades, if found necessary,
as the work progresses due to discrepancies in the plans or to obtain satisfactory
construction. Over-break including slides, is that portion of any material displaced or
loosen beyond the finish work as planned or authorized by the Engineer. The
40
Engineer shall determine if the displaced of such material was unavoidable and his
decision shall be final. All over-break shall be removed by the contractor and
disposed as directed; however, payment will not be made under for the removal and
disposal of over-break which the Engineer determines as avoidable. Unavoidable
over-break will be classified as ‘Unclassified Excavation”, except when the contract
provides for the classification of “Common Excavation”, or “Solid Rock Excavation”,
in which case unavoidable over-breakage from slides will be classified as such.
The removal of existing structures and utilities required to permit orderly progress of
work will be accomplished by local agencies, unless otherwise shown on the plans.
All existing foundations shall be excavated for at least 60 mm below the top of the
sub-grade and the material disposed as directed.
All foundations thus excavated shall be backfill with suitable material and compacted.
In cut areas, the sub-grade under areas to be paved shall be compacted to the depths
and to the densities at optimum moisture as shown on the plans or as specified in the
specification, or when not otherwise shown or specified, to a minimum depth of
150mm and to a density of not less than 95%, for cohesive soils, and 100% for non-
cohesive soils, the maximum density at optimum moisture as determined by the
compaction control tests specified in ASTM D698 / D1557. Any suitable materials
encountered shall be removed and paid for as specified. No payment or measurement
for payment will be made for suitable materials remove, manipulated and replaced in
order to obtain density. Any removal, manipulation, aeration, replacement, and re-
compaction of suitable materials necessary to obtain the required density shall be
considered as incidental to the excavation and embankment operation, and shall be
performed by the contractor at no additional cost to the project. Stones or rock
fragments larger than 100mm in their greatest dimension will not be permitted in the
top 150mm of the sub-grade. The finished grading operations conforming to the
typical cross-section shall be completed and maintained at least 300 meters ahead of
the paving operations. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slope shall be
barred loose or otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill
slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slopes, cross section, and alignment shown on
the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Blasting when necessary will be permitted only when proper precautions are taken for
the protection and safety of all persons, the work, and the property. All damage done
to the work or property shall be repaired at the contractor’s expense. All operations of
the contractor in connection with the transportation, storage, and use of explosives
shall be approved by the Engineer. Any approval given will not relieve the contractor
of his responsibility in blasting operations.
102.3.3 Borrow Excavation

When provided for in the proposal, borrow excavation shall consist of excavation
made from borrow areas within the limits of the property outside the normal grading
limits, or the property from which borrow may be obtained will be designated.
Borrow Excavation shall be made only at these designated locations within the
41
horizontal and vertical limits as staked or as directed. On completion of the borrow
operations, the borrow area shall be finished to a neat and uniform grade acceptable to
the Engineer.
When borrow sources are outside the boundaries it shall be the Contractor’s
responsibility to locate and obtain the supply, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, sufficiently in advance of the beginning of
excavation, so necessary measurements and test can be made. All objectionable
material shall be disposed of as directed. All borrow pits shall be opened up
immediately to expose the vertical face of various product. Borrow pits shall be
excavated to regular lines to permit accurate measurement and shall be drained and
left in a neat and presentable condition with all slopes dressed uniformly.
The borrow excavation shall be handled and placed as specified in these specifications
for excavation.
103.2.4 Ditch Excavation

Ditch excavation shall consist of excavating for drainage ditches such as intercepting,
inlet or outlet, temporary levee construction, or any other type as designed or as
shown on the plans. The work shall be performed in the proper sequence with the
other construction. The location of all ditches or levees shall be established on the
ground. All satisfactory material shall be placed in fills; unsatisfactory material shall
be placed in spoil areas or as directed. Waste or surplus material shall be disposed of
as shown on the plans or as directed. Intercepting ditches shall be constructed prior to
the starting of adjacent excavation operations. All necessary handwork shall be
performed to secure a finish true to line, elevation, and cross section, as designated.
Ditches constructed on the project shall be maintained to the required cross-section
and shall be kept free from debris or obstructions until the project is accepted. Where
necessary, sufficient openings shall be provided through spoil banks to permit
drainage from adjacent lands. Unless otherwise specified, no separate payment will be
made for ditch excavation other than for the material removed which will be paid for
at the unit price for “Unclassified Excavation,” “Common Excavation,” or “Solid
Rock Excavation,” or as the case may be, if the proposal includes classification of
these excavated materials.

Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per cubic meter for “Unclassified, Common,
Solid Rock and Borrow Excavation.” This price shall be full compensation for furnishing all
materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
Pay Item Description Unit
Item 102 (1) Unclassified Excavation cu.m.

Item 102 (2) Common Excavation cu.m.
Item 102 (3) Solid Rock Excavation cu.m.
42
ITEM 104 EMBANKMENT
104.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of construction of embankment and other areas of fill by
furnishing, placing, compacting and shaping suitable materials of acceptable quality
obtained from approved sources in accordance with this specification and to the lines,
grades and dimensions and cross-sections shown in the drawing or as required by the
Engineer. Unless otherwise stated, the term “embankment “shall include all areas of
fill.
104.2 MATERIALS
Embankment shall be constructed of suitable materials with a minimum California

Bearing Ratio (CBR) rating of 8.0 %.
104.3 PREPARATION OF EMBANKMENT
Embankment areas shall be cleared and grubbed in accordance with the requirements
in Item 100. All depressions or holes below the ground surface, whether caused by
grubbing or otherwise shall be backfilled with suitable material and compacted to
ground surface before the construction of the embankment will be permitted to start.
Immediately prior to the placing of the fill materials, the entire area upon which the
embankment is to be placed, except where limited by rocks, shall be scarified and
broken by means of 150 mm. Scarifying shall be done approximately parallel to the
axis of fill. All roots, debris, large stones, or objectionable material that would cause
interference with the compaction of the foundation or fill shall be removed from the
area and disposed of as directed. A thin layer (approximately 75 mm) of the fill
material shall be spread over the scarified foundation and the whole area compacted
as required in the specifications.
Where embankments are to place on natural slopes steeper than 3:1, horizontal
benches shall be constructed as shown on the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Suitable excavated material shall be incorporated in embankments. Payment will be
made for the material excavated at the unit price for excavation.
No direct payment shall be made for the work performed under this section. The
necessary clearing and grubbing and the quantity removed or used will be paid for
under the respective item of work.
104.4 STRIPPING
All vegetation such as brush, heavy sods, heavy growth of grass, decayed vegetable
matter, rubbish, and any other unsuitable material within the area upon which
embankment is to be placed shall be stripped or otherwise removed before the
embankment is started, and in no case shall such objectionable material be allowed in
or under the embankment. No direct payment will be made for stripping. The
quantity removed and disposed of shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic
43
meter for “Unclassified Excavation”, or for “Common Excavation”, when the latter
classification is provided for in the proposal.
104.5 COMPACTION OF EXISTING GROUND
The surface of the existing ground shall be compacted to a depth of 150 mm to the
requirements of Table 105-A. This work shall comply with the requirements for
compaction of earthwork.
TABLE 105-A COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS

Soil Type Classification Test Method for Minimum Relative
according to AASHTO Determining (% Compaction )
M – 125
A–1 AASHTO T 180 95 %
A-2–4 ( 4.54 kg rammer )
A-2–5 Method D
A–3
A - 2 –6 AASHTO T 99
A–2–7 ( 2.50 kg rammer )
A–4 Method D 100 %
A–5
A–6
A–7
104.6 PLACING AND FORMATION OF EMBANKMENTS
1. Embankment shall be formed of satisfactory materials placed in successive horizontal

layers of not more than 200 mm in loose depth for full width of the cross-section.
2. The grading operations shall be conducted, and the various soil strata shall be placed, to
produce a soil structure as shown on the typical cross-section or as directed. All materials
entering the embankment shall be reasonably free of organic matter such as leaves, grass,
roots, and other objectionable material. Soil, granular material, shale, and any other
material permitted for use in embankment shall be spread successive layers as specified.
3. Operations on earthwork shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory results cannot
be obtained because of rain, freezing weather, or other unsatisfactory conditions of the
field. The contractor shall drag, blade, or slope the embankment to provide proper
surface drainage.
4. The material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before rolling to obtain
the prescribed compaction. Wetting or drying of the material and manipulation when
necessary to secure a uniform moisture content throughout the layer shall be required.
Should the material be too wet to permit proper compaction of rolling, all work on
portions of the embankment affected shall be suspended until the material has dried to the
required moisture content.
44
5. Materials of different characteristics shall not be mixed and the Contractor shall carry out
selection, processing or stockpiling as necessary. Each layer shall contain only one type
of material.
6. Embankments in or over swamps or in water shall be placed as shown in the drawings or

as specified in the Special Specification or as instructed by the Engineer.
7. Except as otherwise specified, rock embankments shall be constructed in successive

layers not more than 0.5 meter deep for the full width of the cross-section. When the rock
necessitates a greater depth of layer and the height of the fill will permit, the layer depth
may be increased as necessary, not to exceed 1 meter. Each layer shall be constructed by
starting at the one end of the section of embankment under construction and dumping the
rock on top of the layer being constructed then pushing ahead with crawler dozer
weighing not less than 15T in such manner that the larger rock will be placed on the
ground or proceeding layer and the voids between the larger stones will be filled with
small stones and spalls by this operation. The surface of the layer shall be blended with
fine material and sealed by watering so that all voids on the surface are completely filled.
8. The maximum dimension of any rock shall be less than the depth of the embankment
layer. All oversized rock which; is suitable for the construction shall be broken to the
required dimension and used in embankment construction or placed at the points of
embankment where the layer is of greater depth. No additional payment for this work
will be allowed. Where excavated rock in wasted, the contractor shall at his own
expense, replace the rock wasted with other suitable materials.
104.7 EQUIPMENT
The contractor may use any type of earth moving compaction and watering equipment
he may desire or has at his disposal, provided the equipment is in a satisfactory
condition and of such capacity that the construction schedule can be maintained as
planned by the Contractor and as approved by the “Engineer” in accordance with the
total calendar days in the contract period. The Contractor shall furnish, operate and
maintain such equipment as necessary to control uniform density, layer, section and
smoothness of grade.
104.8 PREPARATION AND PROTECTION OF THE TOP OF THE SUB-GRADE
On the areas to be paved, the specified depth in cut areas and the top of embankment
shall be compacted to the density specified. When completed, the “Engineer” shall
true to lines, grades and cross-section shown on the plans or as direct the surface.
After all drains, structures, ducts, and other underground appurtenances along the
edges or under the pavement have been completed, the sub-grade shall be compacted
to the depth specified at not less than 95% density for cohesive soils and 100% for
non-cohesive soils, as determined by the compaction control tests specified in FAA T
611. Any irregularities or depressions that developed under rolling shall be corrected
by loosing the material at these places and adding, removing or replacing material
until the surface is smooth and uniform. Any portion of the area, which is not
accessible to a roller, shall be compacted to the required density by approved
mechanical tampers. The material shall be sprinkled with water during rolling or
tampering, when directed by the “Engineer”.
45
All soft and yielding material and material, which will not be compacted readily when
rolled or tampered, shall be removed as directed by the “Engineer” and replaced with
suitable material. After grading operations are completed, all loose stones larger than
50mm in their greatest dimensions shall be removed from the surface of all proposed
graded paving areas and disposed of as directed by the “Engineer”.
At all times, the top of the sub-grade shall be kept in such condition that it will drain
readily and effectively. In handling materials, tools and equipment, the Contractor
shall protect the sub-grade from damage by 7 laying planks when directed and take
other precautions as needed. In no case will vehicles be allowed to travel in a single
track. If ruts are formed, the sub-grade shall be reshaped and rolled. Storage or any
stockpiling of materials on the top of the sub-grade will not be permitted. Until sub-
grade has been checked and approved, no sub-base, base surface course, or pavement
shall be laid thereon.
104.9 HAUL
No payment will be made separately or directed for haul or any part of the work. All
hauling will be considered as necessary and incidental work and its cost shall be
considered by the Contractor and included in the contract unit price for the pay items
of work involved.
104.10 TOLERANCE
In those areas upon which a sub-base or base course is to be placed, the top of the
sub-grade shall be of such smoothness that when tested with a 5-meter straight-edge
applied parallel and at right angles to the center lines, it shall not show any deviation
in excess of 12.5 mm. Any deviation in excess of these amounts shall be corrected by
loosening, adding, or removing materials, reshaping and re-compacting by sprinkling
and rolling.
On landing strips, intermediate and other designated areas, the surface shall be of such
smoothness that it will not vary more than 30 mm from true grade as established by
grade hubs. Any deviation in excess of this amount shall be corrected by loosening,
adding or removing materials and reshaping.
104.11 TOPSOIL
When topsoil is specified or required, as shown on the plans, it shall be salvaged from
stripping or other grading operations. The topsoil shall meet the requirements of
Item-101 or shall be approved by the Engineer. If, at the time of excavation or
stripping, the topsoil cannot be placed in its proper place and final section of finished
construction, the materials shall be stockpiled within 15 meters of pavement areas and
shall not be placed on areas which subsequently will require any excavation or
embankment.
Upon completion of grading operations as specified, topsoil shall be handled and

placed as directed, or as required in Item-101. The Engineer shall set grade for
grading operation in both cut and fill so that the topsoil will be placed at the finished
plan elevation.
46
No direct payment will be made for topsoil as such under Item-105. The quantity
replaced or stockpiled shall be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic meter for
“COMMON EMBANKMENT” or for “SELECTED EMBANKMENT’ when the
latter classification is provided in the proposal.
When stockpiling of topsoil and later re-handling of such material is directed by the
Engineer to produce the specified soil structure, the material so re-handled shall be
paid for at the contract unit price for placing and compaction per cubic meter of
“COMMON EMBANKMENT” or “SELECTED EMBANKMENT” when the latter
classification is provided in the proposal.
The quantities for compacting existing ground below embankment shall be the area of
the base of the embankment at original ground level, compacted and accepted by the
Engineer.
The quantities for breaking up or scarifying existing pavement shall be the surface
area of the pavement to be broken up or scarified and accepted by the Engineer.
The quantities, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the appropriate
contract unit price for each of the particular pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities
which price and payment shall be full compensation for all the costs of furnishing,
placing, compacting and shaping material from any source in embankments and other
areas of fill including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to
complete this Item.
Item 104 (1) Common Embankment cu.m.

Placing and Compaction of Common
Item 104 ( 1.1) cu.m.
Embankment
Item 104 (2) Selected Embankment cu.m.
Placing and Compaction of Selected
Item 104 (2.1) cu.m.
Embankment
47
ITEM 508 ROCKWORKS
508.1 SCOPE OF WORK
This specification covers rockworks and the construction of the rock causeway. The
works can be carried out shall be, but not limited to the following:
1. Supply and laying of the core stones bedding.

2. Supply and laying of the Armor Stones (1st layer).
3. Supply and laying of the Armor Stones (2nd layer).
4. Placement of concrete curb.
5. Construction of concrete pavement.
508.2 SETTING OUT WORKS
1. Topographic / Hydrographic Survey: Prior to the commencement of the work, the

Contractor shall conduct a topographic/hydrographic survey in conjunction with
the Engineer’s instructions. This survey shall form the basis for quantity
measurement.
2. The Contractor shall set out works and be solely responsible for accuracy of such
setting out.
508.3 MATERIALS
1. Concrete for curb shall be in accordance with the provision of Item 405, Concrete
Works,
2. Concrete works for pavement shall be in accordance with Item 311- Portland
Cement Concrete Pavement.
3. All rocks to be used shall be angular, hard, durable with the long dimension not
more than three times the short. It shall not be likely to disintegrate in sea water
and if subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test, the
weighted loss shall not exceed 12 mass percent.
4. All rocks shall have a minimum weight of 1000 kgs. Per cubic meter (specific
gravity 2.6) of solid materials when measured dry.
5. Rocks with specific gravity higher than the above specified is preferable and will
readily be accepted. But no adjustment (increase) in the contract price will be
made on this account.
6. Rocks that are sub-angular may be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Rounded or well rounded pieces will not be accepted.
7. Rocks of the primary cover layer should be sound, durable, and hard. It should be
free from laminations, weak cleaveges, and undesirable weathering, and should be
of such character that it will not disintegrate from the action of the air, sea water,
or in handling and placing. All stone should be angular quarry stone.
8. The greatest dimensions of individual rock unit should not greater than three times
the least dimension.
9. All rocks should conform to the following test designations: Apparent specific
gravity, ASTM C-127 and abrasion, AS0TM C-131.
48
10. Weight of the individual pieces of rock.
a. Armor Rock
Refer to the Drawings for the required sizes of the armor rocks for the 1st and
2nd layers.
b. Core Rock
Refer to the Drawings for the required sizes of the core rock.
Core rock bedding shall be reasonably well graded in weight between the
minimum and maximum sizes.
c. Quarry run filler shall consists of pieces of varied sizes of small rocks from
quarry (minimum of 10% of the weight of core rocks) to fill the voids of top
rocks prior to the placing of subbase course)
508.4 CONSTRUCTION METHOD
1. Construction method of concrete pavement shall be in accordance with the

provisions of Item 311 – Portland Cement Concrete Pavement
2. The core stone shall be placed at convenient height and width for each delivery of
materials.
3. The armor stone shall cover the sides, berm and top of the causeway for core stone
protection.
4. The armor stone filler shall not be less than one half (1/2) of the weight and size
of the armor stone.
5. The armor stone shall be placed with the longitudinal section perpendicular to the
slope and longitudinal section of the causeway.
6. No cutting, spalling or coursing of the stones shall be allowed, but it is expected
that the work shall be done in a workmanlike and skilled manner, which implies
careful selection of stones.
7. The armor stone shall be wedded firmly in between the facing of armor rocks so
that the latter shall be in the stable position.
8. Armor stones shall be placed individually by crane equipped with suitable bucket
or by other means acceptable to the Engineer.
9. The rock mole/rock causeway can be constructed by any method acceptable to the
Engineer. Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
for approval his method and sequence of construction. The Engineer’s approval
of the method and sequence of construction shall not release the Contractor from
responsibility to achieve the satisfactory implementation of the work.
10. Quarry run fillers shall be wedged firmly in between the facing of top core rocks
at minimum depth of 300mm below the neat line and elevation so that the latter
shall be in stable position.
11. Permissible Tolerance
a. Core Stones
Alignment: plus or minus 0.30 m
Elevation: plus or minus 0.20 m
b. Armor Stones
Alignment: plus or minus 0.30 m
Elevation: plus or minus 0.20 m
49
The quantities, determined as provided above, shall be paid for at the appropriate
contract unit price for each of the particular pay items shown in the Bill of Quantities
which price and payment shall be full compensation for all the costs of furnishing,
placing, compacting and shaping material from any source of rocks and other areas of
fill including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this
Item.
Supply and laying of the core stones

Item 508 (1) cu.m.
bedding.
Supply and laying of the Armor Stones
Item 508 (2) cu.m.
(1st layer).
Supply and laying of the Armor Stones
Item 508 (3) cu.m.
(2nd layer).
Item 508 (4) Placement of concrete curb. cu.m.
Item 508 (5) Construction of concrete pavement. cu.m.
50
B.CONCRETING OF RUNWAY (STA 1+430 to
STA 1+710) - 280m x 30m width
ITEM 105 SUBGRADE PREPARATION

105.1 DESCRIPTION
This Item shall consist of the preparation of the subgrade for the support of overlying
structural layers. It shall extend to full width of the roadway. Unless authorized by the
Engineer, subgrade preparation shall not be done unless the Contractor is able to start
immediately the construction of the pavement structure.
105.2 MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract and except when the subgrade is in rock cut,
all materials below subgrade level to a depth 150 mm or to such greater depth as may
be specified shall meet the requirements of Section 104.2, Material Requirements.
105.3.1 Prior Works

Prior to commencing preparation of the subgrade, all culverts, cross drains,
ducts and the like (including their fully compacted backfill), ditches, drains
and drainage outlets shall be completed. Any work on the preparation of the
subgrade shall not be started unless prior work herein described shall have
been approved by the Engineer.
105.3.2 Subgrade Level Tolerances

The finished compacted surface of the subgrade shall conform to the allowable
tolerances as specified hereunder:
Permitted variation from

20 mm
design LEVEL OF SURFACE
Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY
30 mm
MEASURED BY 3-m STRAIGHT EDGE
Permitted variation from design
0.5 %
CROSSFALL OR CAMBER
Permitted variation from
design LONGITUDINAL GRADE 0.1 %
over 25 m length
105.3.3 Subgrade in Common Excavation

Unless otherwise specified, all materials below subgrade level in earth cuts to
a depth 150 mm or other depth shown on the Plans or as directed by the
Engineer shall be excavated. The material, if suitable, shall be set aside for
future use or, if unsuitable, shall be disposed of in accordance with the
requirements of Subsection 102.2.9. Where material has been removed from
51
below subgrade level, the resulting surface shall be compacted to a depth of
150 mm and in accordance with other requirements of Subsection 104.3.3. All
materials immediately below subgrade level in earth cuts to a depth of 150
mm, or to such greater depth as may be specified, shall be compacted in
accordance with the requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.
105.3.4 Subgrade in Rock Excavation

Surface irregularities under the subgrade level remaining after trimming of the
rock excavation shall be leveled by placing specified material and compacted
to the requirements of Subsection 104.3.3.
105.3.5 Subgrade on Embankment

After the embankment has been completed, the full width shall be conditioned
by removing any soft or other unstable material that will not compacted
properly. The resulting areas and all other low sections, holes be or
depressions shall be brought to grade with suitable material. The entire
roadbed shall be shaped and compacted to the requirements of Subsections
104.3.3. Scarifying, blading, dragging, rolling or other methods of work shall
be performed or used as necessary to provide a thoroughly compacted roadbed
shaped to the cross-sections shown on the Plans.
105.3.6 Subgrade on Existing Pavement

Where the new pavement is to be constructed immediately over an existing
Portland Cement Concrete Pavement and if so specified in the Contract, the
slab shall be broken into pieces with greatest dimension of not more than 500
mm and the existing pavement material compacted as specified in Subsection
104.3.3, as directed by the Engineer. The resulting subgrade level shall, as part
of pavement construction be shaped to conform to the allowable tolerances of
Subsection 105.3.2 by placing and compacting where necessary a leveling
course comprising the material of the pavement course to be placed
immediately above. 105.5 Basis of Payment The accepted quantities,
measured as prescribed in Section 105.4, shall be pa id for at the appropriate
contract unit price for Pay Item listed below that is included in the Bill of
Quantities which price and payment Where the new pavement is to be
constructed immediately over an existing asphalt concrete pavement or gravel
surface pavement and if so specified in the Contract, the pavement shall be
scarified, thoroughly loosened, reshaped and recompacted in accordance with
Subsection 104.3.3. The resulting subgrade level shall conform to the
allowable tolerances of Subsection 105.3.2.
105.3.7 Protection of Completed Work

The Contractor shall be required to protect and maintain at his own expense
the entire work within the limits of his Contract in good condition satisfactory
to the Engineer from the time he first started work until all work shall have
been completed. Maintenance shall include repairing and recompacting ruts,
ridges, soft spots and deteriorated sections of the subgrade caused by the
traffic of the Contractor's vehicle/equipment or that of the public.
105.3.8 Templates and Straight-edges
52
The Contractor shall provide for use of the Engineer, approved templates and
straight-edges in sufficient number to check the accuracy of the work, as
provided in this Specification.
105.4.1 Measurement of Items for payment shall be provided only for:
1. The compaction of existing ground below subgrade level in cuts of

common material as specified in Subsection 105.3.3. 2.
2. The breaking up or scarifying, loosening, reshaping and recompacting of

existing pavement as specified in Subsection 105.3.6. The quantity to be
paid for shall be the area of the work specified to be carried out and
accepted by the Engineer.
105.4.2 Measurement of Items for payment shall be provided only for:

Payment for all work for the preparation of the subgrade, including shaping to
the required levels and tolerances, other than as specified above shall be
deemed to be included in the Pay Item for Embankment.

The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 105.4, shall be pa id for at
the appropriate contract unit price for Pay Item listed below that is included in the Bill
of Quantities which price and payment shall be full compensation for the placing or
removal and disposal of all materials including all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this Item.
Payment will be made under:
Unit of
Pay Item Number Description
Measurement
Subgrade Preparation
105 (1) Square Meter
(Common Material)
(Existing Pavement)
(Unsuitable Material)
53
ITEM 201 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
201.1 DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of base course composed of crushed, partially crushed or
uncrushed coarse aggregate bonded with either soil or fine aggregate. Or both
spreading and compacting crushed aggregate base material of crushed gravel, crushed
stone or crushed rock constructed on a prepared sub-grade or sub-base in one or more
layers in accordance with the specifications. And shall conform to the dimensions and
typical cross section shown on the plans and with the lines and grades established by
the Engineer.
Crushed aggregate base materials shall be Class A, Class B, or Class C as shown on

the plans.
When crushed aggregate base course is required to be placed on a sub-grade

consisting of an existing cement concrete pavement prepared in accordance with Item
106 “Sub-grade Preparation” and where the surface levels of the resulting sub-grade
level are outside the permitted tolerances in Table 106-A of Item 106 leveling course
of crushed aggregate base material shall be laid as shown on the plans.
Material for crushed aggregate base course shall consist of crushed or partly crushed
hard durable gravel stone or rock fragments. It shall be clean and free from organic
matters, lumps of clay and other deleterious substances. The material shall be of such
a nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm,
stable base.
The aggregates shall consist of both fine and coarse fragments of crushed stones,
crushed slab or crushed gravel mixed or blended with sand, screening, or other
materials conforming to the grading requirements of Table 201-A. The crushed stone
shall consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone and shall be free from
excess flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated pieces, dirt or other objectionable matter.
The material shall comply with the following grading and quality requirements;
a. The aggregate when graded shall produce a smooth, evenly distributed curve
within the limits for Class A, Class B, or Class C given in Table 201-A.
b.
TABLE 201-A – AGGREGATE BASE COURSE GRADING
US STANDARD SIEVE PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT

mm Alternate Class A Class B Class C
50.00 2” 100 100 -
37.50 1 ½” 80 – 100 80 – 100 -
54
25.00 1” 60 – 100 60 –100 100
19.00 ¾” 50 – 85 55 – 85 75 – 100
4.75 No. 04 25 - 45 35 – 60 40 – 60
2.00 No. 10 15 – 35 25 – 50 25 – 45
0.425 No. 40 8 – 22 15 – 30 12 – 25
0.075 No. 200 2–9 8 –15 5 – 12
c. The course aggregate material retained on a 4.75mm (No. 4) sieve shall consist of
material of which not less than 50% by weight shall be crushed particles, having a
minimum of one fractured face.
d. The course aggregate retained on a 4.75mm (No.4) sieve shall have a percentage
of wear by the Los Angeles Abrasion Test AASHTO T96 of not more than 40%
for crushed and 50% for uncrushed.
e. The material shall have a loss of less than 12% when subject to five cycles of
sodium sulfate soundness test according to AASHTO T104.
f. The sand equivalent determined according to AASHTO T176 should not be less
than 50.
g. The material passing the 19mm (3/4”) sieve shall have a minimum soak CBR
value of 80% tested according to AASHTO T 193. The CBR value shall be
obtained at the maximum dry density determined according to AASHTO T 180.
The portion of material passing the 0.425mm (No. 40) sieve shall have a liquid limit
of not more than 25 and a plasticity Index of not more than 6 as determined by
AASHTO T89 and 90 respectively.
The crushed slab shall be air-cooled, blast furnace slag and shall consist of angular
fragment reasonably clean and free of thin, elongated or soft pieces, dirt or other
objectionable matter. It shall weigh not less than 1120 kilogram per cubic meter as
determined by AASHTO T19.
The method used in the production of crushed gravel shall be such that the fractured
particles occurring in the finished product shall be as nearly constant and uniform as
practicable and shall result in at least the specified percentage of material retained on
a No. 4 mesh sieve having one or more fractured faces.
If necessary, to meet his requirements or to eliminate and excess of fine uncrushed

particles, the gravel shall be screened before crushing. All stone, rocks and boulders
of inferior quality in the pit shall be wasted.
All material passing the No. 4 mesh sieve produced in the crushing operation of either
stone, slag or gravel shall be incorporated in the base material to the extent permitted
by the gradation requirements.
55
The final gradation decided on within the limits designated in the table shall be well
graded from coarse to fine and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the
high on the adjacent sieves, or vice versa.
The amount of the fraction of material passing the No. 200 mesh sieve shall not
exceed one-half the fraction passing the No. 40 mesh sieve.
The selection of any gradation shown in Table 155-A shall be such that the maximum
size aggregate used in any course shall be not more than two-thirds the thickness of
the layer of the course being constructed.
201.2.1 FILLER FOR BLENDING

The filler in addition to the naturally present in the base course material, is
necessary for satisfactory bonding of the material, for changing the soil
constant of the material passing the No. 40 mesh sieve or for correcting the
gradation to the limitations of the specified gradation, it shall be uniformly
blended with the base course material at the crushing plant or at the mixing
plant. The material for such purpose shall be obtain from sources approved by
the Engineer and shall be of the specified gradation.
The additional filler may be composed of sand but the amount of sand shall
not exceed 20% by weight of the total combined base aggregate. All sand shall
pass a No. 4 mesh sieve and not more than 5% by weight shall pass a No. 200
mesh sieve.
201.3 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
201.3.1 OPERATION IN PITS AND QUARRIES

All works involved in cleaning and the Contractor shall perform stripping pits
and quarries, including handling of unsuitable materials. All material shall be
handled in a manner that shall secure a uniform and satisfactory base product.
The base course material shall be obtained from approved sources.
201.3.2 EQUIPMENT
All equipment necessary for the proper construction on this work shall be
available at the project site, in first class working condition, and approved by
the Engineer before construction is permitted to start.
201.3.3 PREPARING UNDERLYING COURSE

The underlying course shall be checked and accepted by the Engineer before
placing and spreading operations are started. Any ruts or soft, yielding places
due to improper drainage conditions, hauling or any other cause, shall be
corrected and rolled to the required density before the base course is placed
thereon.
Grade control between the edges of the pavement shall be accomplished by

graded stakes, steel pins, or forms placed in lanes parallel to the centerline of
the pavement at intervals sufficiently close at string line or check boards may
be placed between the stakes, pins or forms.
56
201.3.4 METHODS OF PRODUCTION
a. PLANT MIX. When provided in the proposal, or when selected by the contractor
and approved by the Engineer, the base material shall be uniformly blended or
mixed in an approved plant. The mixing plant shall include bins for storage and
batching of the aggregates, pumps and tanks for water, and batch mirror of either
pugmill or drum type. All mineral aggregates shall be batch into the mixer by
weight. The agitation shall be such that a thorough dispersion of moisture is
obtained. The Engineer shall fix the size of the batch at time of mixing. The base
course material produced by combining two or more materials from different
sources shall be mixed in a mixing plant described herein. The mixture material
shall be at satisfactory moisture content to obtain maximum density.
b. TRAVEL PLANT. When the use of travelling plant is allowed, the plant shall
blend and mix the materials to meet these specifications. It shall accomplish a
thorough mixing in one trip. The agitation shall be such that the dispersion of the
moisture is complete. The machine shall move at uniform rate of speed and this
speed shall be regulated to fix the mixing time. If a window-type travel plant is
employed for mixing, the aggregate shall be placed in windrows parallel to the
pavement centerline.
The windrow volume shall be sufficient to cover exact areas as planned. The
windrow contents shall produce a mixture of the required gradation and bonding
quantities. If a travel plant is used which the type that mixes previously spread
aggregates in-place, the material shall have been spread in such thickness and
proportions as may be handled by the machine to develop a base course of the
thickness of each layer and of the gradation required. With either type of
equipment, the mixed material shall be of a satisfactory moisture content to obtain
the maximum density.
c. PROPORTIONING OR BLENDING IN-PLACE. When the base materials are to

be proportioned and mixed or blended in place, the different layers shall be placed
and spread with the relative proportions of the components of the mixture being
designated by the Engineer. The base aggregate shall be deposited and spread
evenly over the first layer. They shall be thoroughly mixed and blended by means
of the approved graders, discs, harrows, rotary tiller, or a machine capable of
combining
these operations, supplemented by other suitable equipment if necessary. The
mixing shall continue until the mixture is uniform throughout and accepted by the
Engineer. Areas of segregated material shall be corrected by the addition of
needed material by re-mixing. Water shall be uniformly applied, prior and at the
proper moisture content. When the mixing and blending have been completed, the
material shall be bladed and dragged, if necessary, until smooth surface is
obtained, true to the line and grade.
d. MATERIALS OF PROPER GRADATION. When the entire base coarse materials

from coarse to fine be secured in a uniform well-graded condition and contains
approximately the proper moisture, such approved material may be handled
directly to the spreading equipment. The material may be obtained from gravel
pits, stockpiles or produced from a crushing and
57
screening plant with the proper blending. The material from these sources shall
meet the requirements for gradation, quality and consistency. The base material
shall be at satisfactory moisture content to obtain maximum density. Any minor
deficiency or excess of moisture content may be corrected by surface sprinkling or
by aeration. In such instances, some mixing or manipulation may be required
immediately proceeding the rolling to obtain the required moisture content. The
final operation shall be blading or gragging, if necessary, to obtain a smooth
uniform surface to line and grade.
201.3.4 METHODS OF SPREADING
a. The aggregate base material that is correctly proportioned, has been processed in a
plant, shall be placed on the prepared underlying course and compacted in layers
of the thickness shown in the plans. The depositing and spreading of the material
shall commence were designated and shall progress continuously without breaks.
The material shall be deposited and spread in lanes on a uniform layer without
segregation of size to such loose depth when compacted, the layer shall have the
required thickness. The base aggregate shall be spread by spreader boxes or other
approved devices having positive thickness controls that shall spread the
aggregate in the required amount to avoid or minimize the need for hand
manipulating. Dumping from vehicles in piles, which require re-handling shall not
be permitted. Hauling over the uncompacted base course shall not be permitted.
b. The aggregate base material that has been processed in a traveling plant, or mixed
and blended in-place, shall be spread in a uniform layer of required depth and
width and to the typical cross-section. The spreading shall be by self-powered
blade grader, mechanical spreader or other approved method. In spreading, care
shall be taken to prevent cutting into the underlying layer. The material shall be
bladed until a smooth uniform surface is obtained, true to line and grade.
c. The base course shall be constructed in neither a layer not less than 62mm nor
more than 112mm of compacted thickness. The aggregate as spread shall be on
uniform grading with no pockets of fine or coarse materials. The aggregate, unless
otherwise permitted by the Engineer, shall not be spread more than 1,670 square
meters in advance of the rolling. Any necessary sprinkling shall be kept within
these limits. No materials shall be placed in snow or on soft, muddy or frozen
coarse.
When more than one layer is required, the construction procedure described herein
shall apply similarly to each layer. The Engineer shall make tests to determine the
maximum density and the proper moisture content of the base material and this
information will be available to the Contractor. The base material shall be at a
satisfactory moisture content when rolling is started and by any minor variation
prior to or during rolling shall be corrected by sprinkling or by aeration if
necessary.
During the mixing and spreading process, sufficient caution shall be exercised to
prevent the incorporation of sub-grade, sub-base, or shoulder material in the base
course mixture.
58
201.3.5 FINISHING AND COMPACTING
After spreading, the aggregate shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling. The
rolling progress gradually from the side to the center of the lane under
construction or from one side toward previously placed material by lapping
uniformly each preceding rear wheel track by one half the width of such truck.
Rolling shall continue until the aggregate is thoroughly set, the interstices of
the material reduced to a minimum, and until creeping of the material ahead of
the roller is no longer visible. Rolling shall continue until the base material has
been compacted to not less than 100% density as determined by the
compaction control tests specified to AASHTO T 180 and AASHTO T 99.
Blading and rolling shall be shall be done alternately, as required or directed,
to obtain a smooth, even and uniformly compacted base.
The course shall not be rolled when the underlying course is soft or yielding or
when the rolling causes undulation in the base course. When the rolling
develops irregularities that exceed 9mm when tested with a 5m straightedge,
the irregular surface shall be loosened, refilled with the same kind of material
as that used in constructing the course, and rolled again as required. In area
inaccessible to rollers, the base course material shall be tampered thoroughly
with mechanical tampers.
201.3.6 Surface Test

After the course has been completely compacted, the surface shall be tested
for smoothness and accuracy of grade and crown. Any portion lacking the
required smoothness or failing in accuracy of grade or crown shall be
scarified, re-shaped, re-compacted and otherwise manipulated as the Engineer
may direct until the required smoothness and accuracy are obtained. The
finished surface shall not vary more than 9mm from a 5m straightedge when
applied to the surface parallel with, and a right angel to the centerline.
201.3.7 THICKNESS
The thickness of the base course shall be determined by depth tests or cores
taken at intervals in such manner that each test shall represent no more than
250 square meters. When the base deficiency is more than 12.5mm, the
Contractor shall correct such areas by scarifying, adding satisfactory base
mixture, rolling, sprinkling reshaping and finishing in accordance with these
specifications. The Contractor shall replace at his expense, the base material
where borings have been taken for test purpose.
201.3.8 TRIAL SECTION

Same as Item 200.3.10, Aggregate Sub-base Course.
201.3.9 PROTECTION
Work on the base course shall not be accomplished when the sub-grade is wet.
Hauling the equipment may be routed over completed portions of the base
course, provided no damage results and provided that such equipment is
routed over the full width of the base course to avoid rutting or uneven
compaction. However, the Engineer shall have full and specific authority to
stop all hauling over completed or partially completed base course when, in
59
his opinion, such hauling is causing damage. The Contractor at his own
expense shall repair any damage resulting to the base course from rutting
equipment over the base coarse.
201.3.10 MAINTENANCE
Following the completion of the base course, the Contractor shall perform all
the maintenance work necessary to keep the base course in condition
satisfactory for priming, the surface shall be kept clean, and free from foreign
material. The base course shall be properly drained at all times. If cleaning is
necessary, or if the prime coat becomes disturbed, any work or restitution
necessary shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor.
Before preparation begins for the application of the surface treatment for a
surface course, the base course shall be allowed too partially dry until the
average moisture content of the full depth base mixture. The drying shall not
continue to the extent that the surface of the base becomes dusty with
consequent loss of binder. If during the curing period the surface of the base
dries fast, it shall be kept moist by sprinkling until such time as the prime coat
is applied as directed.
The quantity of aggregate base course to paid for, either crushed or uncrushed as
required in the proposal, shall be the number of cubic meters of base course material
placed, bonded, and accepted in the completed base course. The quantity of base
course material shall be measured in final position base upon depth tests, or cores
taken as directed by the Engineer. Or at the rate of 1 depth test for each 250 square
meters of base course, or by means of average areas on the complete work computed
from elevations to the nearest 0.003 meter. On individual depth measurements,
thickness more than 0.0125 meter in excess of the shown on plans shall be considered
as specified thickness plus 0.0125 meter in computing the quantity for payment. Base
material shall not be included in any other excavation quantities.
Payment shall be made at the contract unit price per cubic meter for aggregate base
course. The price shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials and for all
operations, hauling and placing of these materials, and for all labor, equipment tools
and incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
PAY ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION UNIT OF

MEASUREMENT
201 (1) Uncrushed Aggregate Base cu.m.
Course
201 (2) Crushed Aggregate Base cu.m.
Course
60
ITEM 207 CEMENT TREATED BASE
207.1 Description
This Item shall consist of a foundation for surface course composed of aggregate,
Portland Cement and water in proper proportions, mixed by a travel plant or in a central
plant and spread and compacted on a prepared subgrade/subbase in one or more layers, in
accordance with this Specification and the lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-
sections shown on the Plans or as established by the Engineer.
207.2 Material Requirements

207.2.1 Soil Aggregate
It shall consist of any combination of gravel, sand, silt and clay or other approved
combination of materials free from vegetable or other objectionable matter. It may be
materials encountered in the construction site or materials obtained from approved
sources. The crushed or uncrushed granular material shall consist of hard, durable stones
and rocks, of accepted quality, free from an excess of flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated
pieces or other objectionable matter. It is the intent of this Specification to utilize soils
existing on the roadbed if the quality is satisfactory. If the quality and/or quantity is
deficient, the soil aggregate shall be obtained wholly or partly from approved outside
sources.
Table 203.1 – Grading Requirements
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing

Standard, Alternate US
Grading A Grading B
mm Standard
50 2” 100 100
4.75 No. 4 45 – 100 55 – 100
2.00 No. 10 37 – 80 45 – 100
0.425 No. 40 15 – 20 25 – 80
0.075 No. 200 0 – 25 11 – 35
The materials passing the 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve produced in the crushing operation of
either stone or gravel shall be incorporated in the base material to the extent permitted by
the gradation requirements. The plasticity index shall not be less than 4 nor more than
10.
The aggregate shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 50 as determined by
AASHTO Method T 96.
207.2.1.1 New Soil-Aggregate

It shall conform to the applicable requirements of Subsection 206.2.1, Soil Aggregate.
61
207.2.1.2 Salvaged Soil-Aggregate
Where soil-aggregate required is already in place, the Contractor shall not be responsible
for its grading or quality except for removal of oversized materials as directed by the
Engineer. In general, salvaged soil-aggregate to be used for lime stabilized road mix
base course will consist of material meeting the requirements given in Subsection
203.2.1, Soil Aggregate.
207.2.2 HYDRAULIC CEMENT
207.2.2.1 Portland Cement and Masonry Cement
Cement shall conform to the requirements of the following cited Specifications for the
type specified or permitted.
Type Specifications
Portland Cement AASHTO M 85 (ASTM C 150)
Blended Hydraulic Cements AASHTO M 240 (ASTM C 595)
Masonry Cement AASHTO M 150-74 (ASTM C 91)
When Types IV and V (AASHTO M 85), P and PA (AASHTO M 150) cements are used,
proper recognition shall be given to the effects of slower strength gain on concrete
proportioning and construction practices. Types S and SA cements will be permitted
only when blended with Portland Cement in proportions approved by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the product of only one mill of any one
brand and type of Portland Cement shall be used on the project.
The Contractor shall provide suitable means of storing and protecting the cement against
dampness. Cement which, for any reason, has become partially set or which contains
lumps of caked cement will be rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or used bags
shall not be used.
207.2.3 Water
207.2.3.1 Description
This Item covers criteria for acceptance of Questionable Water either natural or wash
water for use in concrete.
207.2.3.2 Requirements
The mixing water shall be clear and apparently clean. If it contains quantities or
substances that discolor it or make it smell or taste unusual or objectionable, or cause
suspicion, it shall not be used unless service records of concrete made with it (or other
information) indicated that it is not injurious to the quality, shall be subject to the
62
acceptance criteria as shown in Table 714.1 and Table 714.2 or as designated by the
purchaser.
When wash water is permitted, the producer will provide satisfactory proof or data of
non-detrimental effects if potentially reactive aggregates are to be used. Use of wash
water will be discontinued if undesirable reactions with admixtures or aggregates occur.
Table 714.1
Acceptance Criteria For Questionable Water Supplies
Limits
Compressive strength, min. %
Control at 7 days 90
Time of Setting deviation from control from 1:00 earlier to 1:30 later
Time of Setting (Gillmore Test)
Initial No marked change
Final Set No marked change
Appearance Clear
Color Colorless
Odor Odorless
Total Solids 500 parts/million max.
PH value 4.5 to 8.5
Table 714.2
Chemical Limitation for Wash Water
Limits
Chemical Requirements, Minimum
Concentration
Chloride as C1(-1) expressed as a mass
percent of cement when added to the C1(-1)
in the other components of the concrete
mixtures shall not exceed the following
levels:
207.2.4 Proportioning of Mixture

The amount of cement to be added to the soil-aggregate shall be from 6 to 10 mass
percent of the dry soil. The exact percentage to be added shall be fixed by the Engineer
on the basis of preliminary laboratory tests and trial mixes of the materials furnished by
the Contractor.
63
207.2.5 Strength Requirements
CBR Test for Gravelly Soils. The mixture passing the 19 mm sieve shall have a
minimum soaked CBR-value of 100% tested according to AASHTO T 193. The
CBR-value shall be obtained at the maximum dry density determined according to
AASHTO T 180, Method D. Unconfined Compression Test for Finer Textured Soils.
The 7-day compressive strength of laboratory specimen molded and compacted in
accordance with ASTM D 1632 to a density of 100% of maximum dry density
determined according to AASHTO T 134, Method B, shall not be less than 2.1 MPa
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1633.
207.3 Construction Requirements
207.3.1 Weather Limitations

Portland Cement shall not be applied during windy, rainy or impending bad
weather. In the event rain occurs, work shall be promptly stopped and the
entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this Specification.
207.3.2 Travel Plant Method

The salvaged or new soil-aggregate shall be pulverized until at least 80 mass percent
of all material other than stone or gravel will pass a 4.75 mm (No. 4) sieve.
Any material retained on a 50 mm (2 inches) sieve and other unsuitable material shall be
removed. If additional material is specified, it shall be blended with the existing
material. All butt joints at existing pavements or other structures shall be cleaned prior
to mixing.
The subgrade/subbase shall support all equipment required in the construction of the base
course. Soft or yielding areas shall be corrected prior to mixing.
The soil-aggregate to be treated shall be placed in a uniform windrow and spread to a

uniform thickness to the required width. The specified quantity of Portland Cement shall
be applied uniformly in a trench on top of the windrows or spread uniformly over the soil-
aggregate. Spread cement that has been lost shall be replaced, without additional
compensation, before mixing is started.
Mixing shall be accomplished by means of a mixer that will thoroughly blend the cement
with the soil-aggregate. The mixer shall be equipped with a water metering device that
will introduce the required quantity of water during the mixing cycle. The cement soil-
aggregate mixture shall be sufficiently blended to prevent the formation of cement balls
when water is applied.
A maximum time of 2 hours shall be permitted for wet mixing, laydown, and finishing
when this method is used.
64
207.3.3 Central Plant Method
The soil-aggregate shall be proportioned and mixed with cement and water in a central
mixing plant. The plant shall be equipped with feeding and metering devices which will
introduce the cement, soil-aggregate, and water into the mixer in the quantities specified.
Mixing shall continue until a uniform mixture has been obtained.
207.3.4 Spreading, Compacting and Finishing
The mixture shall be spread on a prepared and moistened subgrade/subbase in a uniform

layer by an approved equipment. Not more than 60 minutes shall elapse between the
start of mixing and the time of starting compaction of the spread mixture.
After spreading, the mixture shall be compacted and finished conforming to the
procedures/requirements specified under Subsection 203.3.6, Spreading, Compacting and
Finishing.
The compaction and finishing shall be completed within 2 hours of the time water is
added to the mixture.
207.3.5 Protection, Curing and Maintenance
The completed cement treated base shall be cured with a bituminous curing seal applied
as soon as possible after the completion of final rolling. The surface shall be kept moist
until the seal is applied.
The rate of application shall be between 0.5 L/m2 to 1.00 L/m2 of surface. The exact rate
will be determined by the Engineer. Curing seal will be applied in sufficient quantity to
provide a continuous film over the base. The film shall be maintained at least 5 days
unless the treated base is protected by a subsequent course.
The Contractor shall be responsible for adequate maintenance of the base at all times as
specified under Subsection 203.3.7, Protection, Curing and Maintenance.
207.3.6 Trial Sections

Trial sections of the stabilized base shall be constructed at least 2 weeks before actual
base construction.
Before subbase construction is started, the Contractor shall spread and compact trial
sections as directed by the Engineer. The purpose of the trial sections is to check the
suitability of the materials and the efficiency of the equipment and construction method
which is proposed to be used by the Contractor. Therefore, the Contractor must use the
65
same material, equipment and procedures that he proposes to use for the main work. One
trial section of about 500 m2 shall be made for every type of material and/or construction
equipment/procedure proposed for use.
After final compaction of each trial section, the Contractor shall carry out such field
density tests and other tests required as directed by the Engineer.
If a trial section shows that the proposed materials, equipment or procedures in the
Engineer’s opinion are not suitable for subbase, the material shall be removed at the
Contractor’s expense, and a new trial section shall be constructed.
If the basic conditions regarding the type of material or procedure change during the
execution of the work, new trial sections shall be constructed
207.3.7 Tolerances
The stabilized base course shall be laid to the designed level and transverse slopes shown
on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be in accordance with Subsection 201.3.5,
Tolerance.
The aggregate base course shall be laid to the designed level and transverse slopes shown
on the Plans. The allowable tolerances shall be in accordance with following:
Permitted variation from design ± 10 mm

THICKNESS OF LAYER
Permitted variation from design + 5 mm
LEVEL OF SURFACE -10 mm
Permitted SURFACE IRREGULARITY 5 mm

Measured by 3-m straight-edge
Permitted variation from design ± 0.2%
CROSSFALL OR CAMBER
Permitted variation from design ± 0.1%
LONGITUDINAL GRADE over 25 m in length
207.3.8 Traffic
The Contractor will not be permitted to drive heavy equipment over completed portions
prior to the end of five (5) days curing period except pneumatic-tired equipment required
for constructing adjoining sections. Turning areas on completed portions of the base
shall be protected by a layer of stable granular materials of not less than 50 mm of
compacted depth.
66
207.4 Method of Measurement
Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base Course will be measured by the cubic meter
(m3). The quantity to be paid for shall be the design volume compacted in-place as
shown on the Plans, accepted in the completed course. No allowance shall be given for
materials placed outside the design limits shown on the cross-sections. Trial sections
shall not be measured separately but shall be included in the quantity of Portland Cement
Treated Plant Mix Base Course.
207.5 Basis of Payment
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 206.4, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for Portland Cement Treated Plant Mix Base Course which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials, including all
labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work prescribed in this
Item.
Pay Item Number

Description Unit of Measurement
Portland Cement treated
207 Plant Mix Course, (New or Cubic Meter
Salvaged) Soil-Aggregate
67
ITEM 311 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE
PAVEMENT (Plain and Reinforced)
311.1 DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of pavement composed of Portland Cement Concrete, with or
without reinforcement as specified on a prepared sub-base or base course in
accordance with these specifications. And shall conform to the thickness and typical
cross-section as shown on the plans and with the lines and grades established by the
Engineer.
311.2 MATERIALS
Fine aggregate for concrete shall consist of natural sand, stone, screening or other
inert materials with similar characteristics or combination thereof, having hard, strong
and durable particles approved by the Engineer.
It shall not contain more than three (3) mass percent of materials passing the
0.075mm (No. 200 sieve) by washing nor more than one (1) percent each sieve of
clay lumps or shale. The use of beach sand will not be allowed without the approval
of the Engineer.
If fine aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate soundness test,
the weighted loss shall not exceed ten (10) mass percent.
The fine aggregate shall be free from injurious amounts of organic impurities. If
subjected to the colorimatic test for organic impurities and a color darker than the
standard is produced, it shall be rejected. However, when tested for the effect of
organic impurities of strength of mortar by AASHTO T71, the fine aggregate may be
used if the relative strength within 7 days and 28 days in not less than 95%.
The fine aggregate shall be well graded from coarse to fine and shall conform to
Table 311-1.
Table 311 – 1 GRADATION FOR FINE AGGREGATE
PERCENTAGE PASSING BY
SIEVE DESIGNATION
WEIGHT
mm inches
9.50 3/8 100
4.75 No. 04 95 – 100
1.18 No. 16 45 – 80
0.30 No. 50 5 – 30
0.50 No. 100 0 – 10
68
311.2.1 COARSE AGGREGATE
It shall consist of crushed stone, gravel, gravel, blast furnace slag, or other
approved inert materials of similar characteristics, or combination thereof,
having hard, strong, durable pieces and free from any adherent coatings.
It shall not contain more than one (1) percent of material passing the 0.075mm
(No. 200) sieve, not more than 0.25 mass percent of clay lumps, nor more than
3.50 percent of soft fragments.
If the coarse aggregate is subjected to five (5) cycles of the sodium sulfate
soundness test, the weight loss shall not exceed 12 mass percent.
It shall have a mass percent of wear not exceeding 40 when tested by

AASHTO T96.
If slag is used, its density shall not be less than 1120 kg./cu.m. (70lb./cu.ft.).
The gradation of the coarse aggregate shall conform to Table 311-2. Only
when one grading specific shall be used from any one coarse.
TABLE 311-2 GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR COARSE

AGGREGATE
SIEVE DESIGNATION MASS PERCENT PASSING
mm inches Grading A Grading B Grading C

75.00 3 100 - -
63.00 2½ 90 – 100 100 100
50.00 2 - 90 – 100 95 – 100
37.00 1½ 25 – 60 35 – 70 -
25.00 1 - 0 –15 35 – 70
19.00 ¾ 0 – 10 - -
12.50 ½ 0–5 0–5 10 – 30
4.75 No. 04 - - 0–5
311.2.2 CEMENT
Except when specifically approved by the “Engineer”, only one brand of

cement shall be used for any individual structure. In determining the approved
mix, only Portland Cement shall be used.
1. Portland Cement – ASTM C 150, Type I

2. High Early Strength Portland Cement Type III may be used for pre-cast
concrete with a tricalcium aluminate limited to 8%, conforming to ASTM
C150. If, for any reason, cement becomes partially set or contains lumps of
caked cement, it shall be rejected. Cement salvaged from discarded or used
bag shall not be used.
69
311.2.3 ADMIXTURES
The use of any material added to the concrete mix shall be approved by the
“Engineer”. The Contractor shall submit certificates indicating that the
material furnished shall meet all the requirements indicated below for the
admixtures for which approval are desired. In addition, the “Engineer” may
require the contractor to submit complete test data from an laboratory showing
that the material to be furnished meets all the requirements of the cited
specifications. Subsequent test will be made on samples taken by the Engineer
from the supply of the material being furnished or proposed for use on the
work to determine whether the admixture is uniform in quality with that
approved. Admixtures stored longer than 6 months shall not be used until
proven to be satisfactory.
1. Air-entraining admixtures shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M154

or ASTM C260. Air-entraining admixtures shall be added to the mixer in
the amount necessary to produce the specific air content. Testing shall be
conducted with cement and aggregate proposed for the project.
2. Water-reducing set controlling admixtures shall meet the requirements of

AASHTO M194
Type A – Water Reducing

Type D – Water Reducing and Retarding
Water reducing admixtures shall be added at the mixer separately from air
entraining admixtures in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed
instructions.
Other admixtures if approved shall be tested for conformance to the referred

specifications. Admixtures containing chloride ions or other ions producing
deleterious effects shall not be used.
311.2.4 WATER
The water used in concrete, mortar and grout shall be free from objectionable
quantities of silt, organic matter, alkali, salts and other impurities. Water will
be tested in accordance with and shall meet the suggested requirements of
AASHTO T26. Water known to be potable quality may be used without
testing. Where the source of water is relatively shallow, the intake shall be so
enclosed as to exclude silt, mud, grass or other foreign materials.
311.2.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
It shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M31 or M42, except that the
rails steel shall not be used for the bars that are to be bent and re-straightened
during construction. Tie bars shall be deformed bars. Dowels shall be plain
round bars of the size specified and shall be free from any deformation
restricting slippage in the concrete. Before delivery to the site, one-half of the
length of each dowel bar shall be painted with one coat of approved lead or tar
paint.
70
The sleeves of dowels shall be metal or an approved design to cover 50-75mm
(2-3 inches), plus or minus 5mm (1/4 inch) of the dowel, with a closed end,
and with a suitable stop to hold the end dowel. Sleeves shall be of such design
that they do not collapse during construction.
The nominal dimensions and unit weight of bar designation shall be in

accordance with the following table:
NOMINAL
NOMINAL NOMINAL UNIT
SECTIONAL
DIAMETER PERIMETER WEIGHT
AREA
mm mm sq.m. kg./m
6 18.80 28.27 0.222
10 31.40 78.54 0.616
12 37.70 113.10 0.888
16 50.30 201.10 1.579
20 62.80 314.20 2.466
25 78.50 490.90 3.854
28 88.00 615.70 4.833
32 100.50 804.20 6.313
36 113.10 1017.90 4.991
40 125.70 1256.60 9.864
50 157.10 1963.50 15.413
a. Welding of reinforcement bars shall only be permitted where shown; all

welding shown shall be performed in accordance with ASWD D 12.1.
b. Exposed reinforcement bars, dowels and plates intended for bonding with
future extensions shall be protected from corrosion.
c. Concrete Protection for Reinforcement
c.1. The minimum concrete cover of reinforcement shall be as indicated on

the Drawings and as shown in table.
c.2. The tolerance for Concrete Cover for Reinforcing Steel other Tendons.
Minimum Cover Maximum Variation

7.50 cm or more 9 mm
less than 7.50 cm 6 mm
311.2.6 JOINT FILLER
a. Poured Joint Fillers shall be mixed with asphalt and mineral or

rubber conforming to applicable requirements of AASHTO M173.
b. Preformed Joint Fillers shall conform to the requirements of

AASHTO M33 (ASTM D 994), AASHTO M153, AASHTO M213,
AASHTO M 220, as specified.
71
At expansion joints in concrete slabs to be exposed, and at the other
joints indicated to receive joint sealant, pre-molded expansion joint
filler strips shall be installed at the proper level below the elevation
with slightly tapered, dressed, and oiled wood strip temporarily
secured to the top thereof to form a groove, when surface dry, shall be
cleaned of foreign matter loose particles, and concrete protrusions,
then filled approximately flush with joint sealant so as to be slightly
concave after drying.
Finish of concrete joints: Edges of exposed concrete slabs along

expansion joints shall be nearly finished with a slightly rounded edging
tools.
311.2.7 JOINT SEALER
No reinforcement, corner protection angles or other fixed metal items

shall be run continuous through joints containing expansion joint filler,
through joints containing expansion joint filler, through crack-control
joints in slabs on grade and vertical surfaces.
311.2.8 CURING MATERIALS
Curing materials shall conform to one of the following specifications:
a. Cotton mats for curing concrete shall conform to AASHTO M73.

b. Waterproof paper for curing concrete shall conform to AASHTO
M139.
c. White polyethylene sheeting (film) for curing concrete shall
conform to AASHTO M171.
d. Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf shall conform to AASHTO
M182.
e. Liquid membrane forming compounds for curing concrete shall
conform to AASHTO M148, Type 2 (all resin base). Or Fed. Spec.
TT-C-800, Type 2.
311.2.9 STORAGE OF CEMENT AND AGGREGATE
1. Cement: Immediately upon receipt at the site, the cement shall be

stored separately in a dry weatherproof properly ventilated
structure, with adequate provisions for prevention or absorption of
moisture. The floor shall be raised from the ground. Provisions for
storage shall be ample, and the shipments of cement as received
shall be separately stored in such a manner as to allow the earliest
deliveries to be used first and to provide easy access for
identification and inspection of each shipment. Storage building
shall have a capacity for storage of a sufficient quantity of cement
to allow sampling at least twelve (12) days before the cement is to
be used. The cement most likely to have been exposed to moisture
or stored in bags for more than 3 months shall not be used unless
proven by test to be in good condition. Stored cement shall meet
72
the test requirements at any time after storage when the “Engineer”
orders retest. At the time of use, all cement shall be free flowing
and free of lumps.
2. Aggregates: Stored and handled to ensure good drainage to prevent

segregation and the inclusion of foreign materials. The “Engineer”
may require the coarse aggregate to be separated into two or more
sizes. Different sizes of aggregate shall be stored in separate bins or
in separate stockpiles sufficiently remote from each other to
prevent the materials at the edges of the stockpiles from becoming
intermixed.
311.3 PROPORTIONING, CONSISTENCY AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
311.3.1 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING
The Contractor shall prepare the design mix based on the absolute volume
method as outlined in the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standard 211.1,
“Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and
Heavyweight Concrete”. Prior to the start of paving operations and after
approval of all material to be used in the concrete, the Engineer shall
determine the proportions of materials to be used to produce the specified
strength.
Trial design batches and testing to meet requirements in the class of concrete
specified shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Test for slump, unit
weight and air content shall be performed in the field in the presence of the
PMO.
Trial mix shall be designed for maximum permitted slump and air content.
The temperature of concrete in each trial shall be reported. For each water
cement ratio at least three samples for each test age shall be made and cured in
accordance with AASHTO T22, AASHTO T97 and AASHTO T177.
a. Entrained-Air Content: Air-entrainment shall be produced by adding an air-

entraining agent at the mixer. Air content volume shall be maintained at 5 to 7
percentage as determined by AASHTO T152 or ASTM C231.
b. “Engineer” shall determine from laboratory test of the materials to be used,

tested by the Contractor, the cement content and proportions of aggregates and
water that will produce a workable concrete having a slump between 40 and
75mm if not vibrated or between 10 and 40mm if vibrated, and a flexural
strength of not less than 3.80 Mpa (550 psi) when tested by the third point
method or 4.50 Mpa (650 psi) when tested by the midpoint method; or a
compressive strength of 24.1 Mpa (3,500 psi) when tested at 28 days in
accordance with AASHTO T97, T177, or AASHTO T22 respectively.
73
311.3.2 SELECTION OF PROPORTIONS
For each portion of the structure, proportions shall be selected so that

maximum permitted water-cement ratio is not exceeded and so as to produce
an average strength (fc’) by the amount indicated below. When the production
facility has a standard deviation record determined in accordance with ACI
214, based on 30 consecutive strength tests of similar mixture strength. The
average strength used as a basis for selecting proportioning shall exceed the
specified strength, fc’, by at least:
1) 30 kg/sq.m. if standard deviation is less than 20 kg/sq.cm.

2) 40 kg/sq.m. if standard deviation is 20 to 30 kg/sq.cm.
5) if the standard deviation exceed 50 kg/sq.cm. or if a standard deviation
record is not available, proportions shall be selected to produce an average
strength of at least 70 kg/sq.cm. greater than the specified strength.
311.3.3 STRENGTH OF CONCRETE
Strength of concrete shall meet the following requirements:
1) The average of any 5 consecutive strength tests at the end of 28 days shall
have an average strength equal or greater than the specified strength.
2) Not more than 15% of the samples tested at the end of 28 days shall have
an average strength less than the specified strength specimens, which are
obviously defective shall not be considered in the determination of
strength.
3) When it appears that the test specimens will fail to conform to the
requirements for strength, “Engineer” shall have the right to order changes
in the concrete sufficient to increase the strength. When a satisfactory
relationship between 7-day and 28-day strength has been established and
approved, the 7-day test results may be used as an indication of the 28-day
strength.
Corrective measures to remedy deficiencies in aggregate gradation shall be
used only in written approval of the “Engineer”
311.3.4 CONSISTENCY (SLUMP)
Test shall be made in conformance with AASHTO T119, unless otherwise

specified by the “Engineer”, slump shall be within the following limits.
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT SLUMP FOR VIBRATED CONCRETE
Minimum, mm Maximum, mm
Pre-cast concrete 50 70
Wall column and grade beam,
50 70
25cm. max. thick
Lean concrete 70 100
Pavement 10 40
74
311.4 CONSTRUCTION METHOD
311.4.1 QUALITY CONTROL OF CONCRETE
The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control of all materials
during the handling, blending, mixing and placement operations.
The contractor shall furnish the “Engineer” a Quality Control Plan with the
detailed production control procedures and the type and frequency of sampling
and testing to ensure that the concrete produced complies with the
specification requirements. The “Engineer” shall be provided free access to
recent plan production records, information copies of mix design, materials
certification and sampling and testing reports.
Sampling and qualified personnel shall perform all batching and mixing
operations for the concrete mix and shall be present at the plant and job site to
control the concrete production whenever the plant is in operation.
The Contractor shall perform all sampling, testing and inspection necessary to
assure quality control of the component materials and the concrete. The
Contractor shall be responsible for determining the gradation of fine aggregate
and for testing the concrete mixture for slump, air content, water-cement
ration and temperature. He shall conduct his operations so as to produce a mix
conforming to the approved mix design. The Contractor shall maintain
adequate records of all inspection and test. The records shall indicate the
nature and number of observations made, the number and type of deficiencies
found, the quantities approved and rejected, and nature and any corrective
actions taken. The “Engineer” for acceptance purposes as he deems necessary.
311.4.2 EQUIPMENT
Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing all parts
of the work shall be approved by the “Engineer” as to design, capacity and
mechanical condition. The equipment shall be at the job site sufficiently
before the start of construction operations for examination and approval.
a. BATCHING PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
a.1 General
The batching plant shall include bins, weighing hoppers, and scales for
the fine aggregate and for each size of coarse aggregate. If bulk cement is
used, hopper and a separate scale for cement shall be included. The weighing
hoppers shall be properly scaled and vented to preclude ducting during
operation.
a.2 Bins and Hoppers

Bins with adequate separate compartments for fine aggregate and for
each required size of coarse aggregate shall be provided in the batching plant.
Each compartment shall discharge efficiently and freely in the weighing
hopper.
75
Means of control shall be provided so that as the quantity desired in the
weighing hopper is approached, the material may be added slowly and shut off
with precision. A port of other opening for removing an overload of any one
of the several materials from the hopper shall be provided. Weighing hoppers
shall be constructed to eliminate accumulations of tar materials and to
discharge fully.
a.3 Scales
The scales for weighing aggregates and cement shall be of either the
beam or the springless dial type. They shall be accurate within 0.50%
throughout their range of use. When beam-type scales are used, provisions,
such as “tell-tale” dial, shall be made for indicating to the operator that the
required load in the weighing hopper is being approached. A device on the
weighing beams shall clearly indicate critical position. Poises shall be
designed to be locked in any position and to prevent unauthorized change. The
weight beam and “tell-tale” device shall be in full view of the operator while
charging the hopper, and he shall have convenient access to all controls.
a.4 Recorders
An accurate recorder shall produce a graphical or digital record of the
scale reading after each of the aggregates and cementing materials have been
discharged (return to zero reference). The weights or volumes of water and
admixtures shall also be recorded if batched at a central batching plant.
Each recorder shall be housed in a cabinet, which shall be capable of

being locked. The charts or tapes shall clearly indicate the different types of
mixes used by stamped letters, numerals colored ink or other suitable means. It
shall be so marked that variations in batch weights of each type of mix can be
readily observed.
All weighing, indicating, recording and control equipment shall be

sufficiently protected against exposures to dust, moisture and vibration so that
there is no interference with proper operation of the equipment.
The recorder weights or volumes when compared to the weights or

volumes actually batched shall be within the following limits of accuracy.
Materials Percent
Cement 1
Water 1
Aggregate 2
Admixture 3
a.5 Water Batcher and Dispenser for Admixtures

Equipment for batching water and admixtures shall be provided at the
batching plant or included with the paving mixer or truck mixers as required
for the type of plant used.
76
1. Water Batchers: A suitable water measuring device shall be
provide which will be capable of measuring the mixing water within the
specified requirements for each batch. The mechanism for delivering water to
the mixers shall be such that leakage will not occur when the valves are
closed. The filling and discharge valves for the water bather shall be so
interlocked that the discharge valve is fully closed.
2. Dispensers: An accurate mechanical device for measuring and

dispensing each admixture shall be provided. Each device shall be capable of
ready adjustment to permit varying of the quality and admixture to be batched.
Each dispenser shall be interlocked with the batching and discharging
operations of latter so that each admixture is separately batched and
discharged automatically in a manner to obtain uniform distribution
throughout the batch in the specific period. When use of truck mixers makes
this requirement impracticable, the admixture dispenser shall be interlocked
with the sand batcher. Admixture will not be combined prior to introduction of
water and sand.
a.6 Moisture Control

The plant shall be capable of ready adjustment to compensate for the
varying moisture content of the aggregate, and to change the weights of the
materials being batched. An electric moisture content gadget shall be attached
in the fine aggregate bin to monitor the actual moisture content. The sensing
element shall be arranged so that the measurement is made near the batcher
charging the gate of the sand bin or in the sand batcher.
b. MIXERS
b.1 General
Concrete may be mixed at the construction site, at a central point, or wholly or
in part in truck mixers. Each mixer shall have attached in a prominent place a
manufacturer’s plate showing the capacity of the drum in terms of volume of
mixed concrete and the speed of rotation of the mixing drum blades.
Stationary mixers, truck mixers or paving mixers of approved design. The

mixers shall have a rated capacity of at least 0.76 cu.m. of mixed concrete and
shall not be charged in excess of the capacity recommended by the
manufacturer. Mixers shall be capable of combining the materials into a
uniform mixture and of discharging this mixture without segregation.
Stationary and paving mixers if used shall be provided with an acceptable
device to lock the discharge mechanism until the required mixing time has
elapsed. The mixing plant shall include a device for automatically counting the
total number batches of concrete mixed. The mixers shall be operated at the
drum of the mixing blade speed of rotation of the mixer drum or blades, and of
proper introduction of the materials into the mixer. The acceptability of truck
mixer will be determined by uniform test as required by ASTM C94.
When mixed at the site or in a central mixing plant, the mixing time shall not
be less than 50 seconds nor more than 90 seconds, unless mixer performance
test proved adequate mixing of the concrete is shorter time period. Four
77
seconds shall be added to the specific mixing time if timing starts the instant
that the skip reaches its maximum raised position. Mixing time ends when the
discharged chute opens. Transfer time in multiple drum mixers is included in
mixing time. Mixing time for stationary or paving mixers will be increased
when such increase is necessary to secure the required uniformity and
consistency of the concrete. Any concrete mixes less than the specified time
shall be discarded and be disposed off by the Contractor at his own expense.
Excessive over mixing requiring additions of water will not be satisfactory
operating condition and mixer shall be kept free of hardened concrete. Mixer
blades shall be replaced when worn down more than 10% of their depth.
Should any mixer at any time produce unsatisfactory results, its use shall be
promptly discontinued until it is repaired.
b.2 Mixers at Construction Sites

Mixing shall be in an approved mixer capable of combining the aggregates,
cement and water into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the
specified mixing period, and of discharging and distributing the mixture
without segregation on the prepared grade. The mixer shall be equipped with
an approved timing device, which will automatically lock discharge lever
when the drum has been charged and release it at the end of mixing. The
device shall be equipped with a bell or other suitable warning device adjusted
to give clearly audible signal each time the locked is release. In case of failure
of the timing device, the mixer may be used for the balance of the day while it
is being prepared, provided that each batch is mixed 90 seconds. The mixer
shall be equipped with a suitable non re-settable bath counter, which shall
correctly indicate the number of batches mixed.
b.3 Central Plant Mixers

Mixers for central plant mixing (plant mixer, revolving drum type mixers,
single opening revolving truncated drum mixer at one end and discharging at
the other end) shall have attached thereto into a prominent place by the
manufacturer, a metal plate(s) on which is plainly marked the various uses for
which the equipment is designed, the nominal capacity (cu.m.) of the drum or
container in terms of the volume of the mixing central plant mixers shall be
equipped with an acceptable timing device that will not permit the batch to be
discharge until the specified mixing time has elapsed. The water system for a
central mixer shall be either a calibrated measuring tank or meter and shall be
cleaned at suitable intervals. They shall be examined daily for changes in
condition due to accumulation of hard concrete or mortar or the wear blades.
The pick-up and throwover blade shall be replaced when they have worn down
19mm or more. The Contractor shall provide the “Engineers” with a copy of
the manufacturer’s design showing dimensions and arrangements of blades in
reference to original height and depth.
b.4 Truck Mixers and Truck Agitators

Truck mixers used for mixing and hauling concrete, truck and truck agitators
used for hauling central-mixed concrete, shall conform to the requirements of
AAHTO M157.
78
b.5 Non-Agitators Trucks
Non-agitating hauling equipment shall conform to the requirements of
AASHTO M157.
c. FINISHING EQUIPMENTS
c.1 Finishing Machine

The finishing machine shall be equipped with at least two oscillating type
transverse screeds.
c.2 Vibrators
Vibrator for full width vibration of concrete paving slabs, may be either the
surface pan type or internal type with either immersed tube or multiple spuds.
They may be mounted on a separate carriage. They shall not come in contract
with the joint, load transfer devices, sub-grade or side.
d. FORMS
Straight side forms shall be made of metal having thickness of not less than
5mm and shall be furnished in sections not less than 3mm length. Form shall
have a depth equal to the prescribed edge thickness of the concrete, without
horizontal joint, and a base with equal to the depth of the forms. Flexible or
curve forms of proper radius shall be used for curves of 30m radius less.
Flexible or curve form shall be of a design acceptable to the Project Engineer.
Forms shall be provided with adequate devices for secure setting so that when
in place they will withstand, without visible spring or settlement, the impact
and vibration of the consolidating and finishing equipment.
Flange braces shall extend outward on the base not less than two-thirds the
heights of the forms. Forms with battered top surfaces, and bent, twisted or
broken forms shall be removed from the work. Repaired forms shall not be
used until inspected and approved. Built up forms shall not be used except as
approved by the “Engineer”. The top face of the forms shall not vary from a
true plane more than 3mm in 3 meters and the upstanding leg shall vary more
than 19mm. The forms shall contain provisions for locking the ends of
abutting sections together tightly for secure setting.
311.4.3 Form Setting
Forms shall be set sufficiently in advance of the concrete placement. After the
forms have been set to correct grade, the grade shall be thoroughly tamped,
either mechanically or by hand, at both the inside and outside edges of the
base of the forms. Forms shall be staked into place with not less than 3 pins
for each 3-meter section. A pin shall be placed at each side of every point.
Form sections shall be tightly locked and shall not deviate from true line by
more than 6mm at finishing machine will not be tolerated. Forms shall be
cleaned and oiled prior to the placing of concrete. The alignment and grade
elevation of the forms shall be checked and corrections made by the
Contractor immediately before placing the concrete. When any form has been
79
disturbed or any other has become unstable, the form shall be reset and re-
checked.
311.4.4. Preparation of Base
After the sub-base or base has been placed and compacted to the required
density, the areas which will support the paving machine and the grade on
which the pavement is to be constructed shall be trimmed to the proper
elevation by means of a properly designed machine extending the work at least
60 cm beyond the edge of the proposed concrete pavement. If loss of density
results from the trimming operations, it shall be restored by additional
compaction before concrete is placed. If any traffic is allowed to use the
prepared sub-grade or base, the surface shall be checked and corrected
immediately before placing of concrete.
311.4.5 Handling, Measuring and Batching Materials
The batch plant site, layout equipment and provisions for transporting material
shall assure a continuous supply of materials to the work. Stockpile shall be
built up in layers of not more than one (1) meter in thickness. Each layer shall
be completely in place before beginning the next, which shall not be allowed
to “cone” down over the next lower layer. Aggregates from different grading
shall not be stockpiled together.
Aggregates shall be handled from stockpiles of other sources to the batching

plant in such a manner as to secure the specified grading material.
All aggregates produced and handled by hydraulic methods, and washed

aggregates, shall be stockpiled or binning for draining at least twelve (12)
hours before being batched.
When mixing is done at the job site, aggregates shall be transported from the
batching plant to the mixer in batch boxes, vehicle bodies, or other containers
of adequate capacity and construction to properly carry the volume required.
Partitions separating batches shall be adequate and effective to prevent spilling
from one compartment to another while in transit or while being dumped.
When bulk cement is used, the Contractor shall use a suitable method of
handling the cement from weighing hopper or transporting container or into
the batch itself for transportation to the mixer, such as chute, boot or other
approved device, to prevent loss of cement. The device shall be arranged to
provide positive assurance of the actual presence in each batch of the entire
cement content specified. Bulk cement shall be transported to the mixer in
light compartments capable of carrying the full amount of cement required for
each batch, of if permitted between the fine and coarse aggregate. When
cement is placed in contact with the aggregates, batches may be rejected
unless mixed with in one and one-half (1 ½) hours of such contract.
311.4.6 Mixing Concrete
Concrete may be mixed at the work site in a central mix plant or in truck
mixers. The mixers shall be on an approved type and capacity. Mixing time
80
shall be measured from the time all materials, except water, are emptied into
the drum. Ready-mixed concrete shall be mixed and delivered in accordance
with the requirements of AASHTO M 157, except that the minimum required
revolutions at the mixing speed for transit-mixed concrete may be reduced to
not less than the recommended by the mixer manufacturer shall be indicated in
the manufacturer’s serial plate attached to the mixer. Mixing time shall
conform to the requirements indicated under Item Mixer.
The volume of concrete mix per batch shall not exceed the mixer’s nominal
capacity in cubic meter, as shown on the manufacturer’s standard rating plate
on the mixer, except that an overload up to 10% above the mixers nominal
capacity may be permitted provided concrete test data for strength,
segregation, and uniform consistency are satisfactory and provided no slippage
of concrete takes place.
The batch shall be charged into the drum so that the portion of the mixing
water shall enter in advance of the cement and aggregates. The flow of water
shall be uniform and all water shall be in the drum by the end of the first 15
seconds of the mixing period. The throat of the drum shall be kept free of such
accumulations as may restricts the free flow of materials into the drum.
Mixed concrete from the central mixing plant shall be transported in truck
mixers, truck agitators or non-agitating trucks specified in sub-section
EQUIPMENT.
Mixing time as indicated in sub-section MIXER may be reduced during hot

weather or under other conditions contributing to quick hardening of the
concrete. Re-tempering concrete by adding water or by other means will not
be permitted, except that when concrete is delivered in truck mixers,
additional water may be added to the batch materials and additional mixing
performed to increase the slump to meet the specified requirement, if
permitted by the “Engineer”, provided all these operations are performed with
in the specified slump limits at time of placement shall not be used.
Admixtures for increasing the workability or for accelerating the setting of
concrete will be permitted only when specifically approved by the “Engineer”.
311.4.7 Limitation of Mixing
No concrete shall be mixed, placed, or finished with insufficient light, unless

adequate and approved artificial lighting system is operated. During not
weather, the “Engineer” may require steps to be taken to prevent temperature
of the mixed concrete from exceeding the specified maximum requirements.
Concrete not placed within 90 minutes from the time the ingredients were
charged to the mixing drum or that has developed initial set shall not be used.
Re-tampering of concrete, which has partially hardened, that is, re-mixing
with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water shall not be permitted.
81
311.4.8 Placing of Concrete
Concrete shall be deposited in such a manner to require minimal re-handling.

Unless truck mixers, truck agitators or non-agitating hauling equipment are
equipped with means to discharge concrete without segregation of the
materials. The concrete shall be unloaded into an approved spreading device
and mechanically spread on the grade in such a manner as to prevent
segregation of the materials. Placing shall be continuous between transverse
joints without the use of intermediate bulkheads. Necessary hand spreading
shall be done with shovels, not rakes. Workmen shall not be allowed to walk
in freshly mixed concrete with boots or shoe coated with earth on foreign
substances.
When concrete is to be deposited adjoining a previously constructed lane of

pavement and when mechanical equipment will be operated upon the existing
lane of pavement, the concrete shall be at least 10 days old and approval shall
be obtained from the Engineer. If only finishing equipment is carried on the
existing lane, paving in adjoining lanes may be permitted after 3 days, if
approved by the “Engineer”.
Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated against and along the faces of all
forms and along full length and both sides of all joint assemblies by means of
vibrators inserted in the concrete. Vibrators shall not be permitted to come in
contact with a join assembly, the grade, or a side form. In no case shall the
vibrator be operated longer than 15 seconds in any one location.
Concrete shall be deposited as near to expansion and contraction joints as

possible without disturbing them but shall not be dumped from the discharge
bucket or hopper unto a joint assemble.
Should any concrete materials fall on or be worked into the surface of a

complete slab they shall be removed immediately by approved methods.
311.4.9 Test Specimen
Following the placing of concrete, it shall be stuck-off to the cross section

shown on the plans and to an elevation such that when the concrete is properly
consolidated and finished, the surface of the pavement shall be at elevation
shown on the plans. When reinforced concrete pavement is placed in two
layers, the bottom layer shall be stuck-off to such length and depth that the
sheet of fabric or bar may be laid full-length on the concrete on its final
position without further manipulation. The reinforcement shall then be placed
directly upon the concrete, after which the top layer of the concrete shall be
placed, struck-off and screened.
Any portion of the bottom layer of the concrete which has been placed more
than 30 minutes without being covered with the top layer shall be removed
and replaced with freshly mixed concrete at the Contractor’s expense. When
reinforced concrete is placed in one layer, the reinforcement may be
positioned in advance of concrete placement or it may be placed at the depth
82
shown on the plans in plastic concrete by mechanical or vibratory means after
screeding.
Reinforcing steel, at the time concrete is placed, shall be free of mud oil, or
other organic matter that may be adversely affect or reduce bond.
Reinforcing steel with rust, mill scale or combination of both will be

considered satisfactory, provided the minimum dimensions, weight and tensile
properties of a hand wire-brushed test specimen are not less than the
applicable AASHTO Specification requirement.
311.4.10 Joints
General. Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be constructed as indicated

on the plans and in accordance with these requirements. All joints shall be
constructed true to line with their faces perpendicular to the surface of the
pavement. Joint shall not vary more than 6.0mm from a true to line or from
their designated position. The vertical surface of the pavement adjacent to all
expansion joints shall be finished to a true plane and edged to a radius of
6.0mm, or as shown on the plans.
The surface across the joints shall be tested with a 3.0-meter straightedge and
any irregularities in excess of 3.0mm shall be corrected before the concrete
has hardened. When required, keyways shall be accurately formed with
template of metal or wood. The gauge or thickness of the material in the
template shall be such that the keyway, as specified is formed and is in the
correct location. Transverse joints in succeeding lanes shall be placed in line
with similar joint in the first lane. In case of widening of existing pavements,
transverse joint shall be so prepared, finished or cut to provide a groove of
sufficient width and depth to receive and effectively retain joint-sealing
material.
Tie bars installed principally in longitudinal joints as shown on the plans shall
consist of deformed bars of 16mm diameter and 76cm long, or as designated
on the plans. Tie bars shall be placed at right angles to centerline of the
concrete slab and as spaced at intervals of 76cm, unless otherwise specified.
They shall be held in position parallel to the pavement surface midway
between the surfaces of the slab. When tie bars extend into an unpaved lane,
they may be bent at right angles for longitudinal construction joints, unless
threaded bolt or other assembled tie bars are specified. These bars shall not be
painted, greased or enclosed in sleeves.
Dowel bars or other load-transfer units of an approved type shall be placed

across transverse or other joints in the manner as specified on the plans. They
shall be of the dimensions and spacing as shown and held rigidly in the middle
of the slab depth in the proper horizontal and vertical alignment by an
approved assemble device to be left permanently in place. The dowel or load
transfer and joint devices shall be rigid and placed in position.
A metal, or other type, dowels expansion cap or sleeve shall be furnished for
each dowel bar used with expansion joints. These caps are substantial enough
83
to prevent collapse and shall be placed on the ends of the dowels as shown on
the plans. The portion of each dowel painted with most preventive paint, as
required under 311-2.5, shall be thoroughly coated with asphalt MC-70, or an
approved lubricant, to prevent the concrete from binding to that portion of the
dowel. An approved metal dowel cap or sleeve conforming to the
requirements of 311-2.5 shall be furnished for each dowel bar used in
expansion joints. The caps or sleeve shall fit the dowel assemblies at
contraction joints; dowel bar may be placed in full thickness of pavement by a
mechanical device approved by the “Engineer”.
Installation. If the paving system is operated from an adjacent lane, any joint
materials required shall be set by immediately after the final testing of the
grade. If the paving mixer is operated from the lane being poured, the
materials shall be set immediately after the mixer moves forward to permit
much time for proper installation. All joint materials required shall be put in
place on the completed and accepted grade. The materials and joint position
shall be either set at right angles or parallel to the centerline pavement except,
for fillets or irregular sections. The top of an assembled joint device shall be
set at the proper distance below the proper pavement surface and elevation
shall be checked.
Such devices shall be set to the required position and the line shall be securely
held in place by stakes or other means during the pouring and finishing of the
concrete. The pre-molded joint materials shall be placed and held in several
position, if adjacent units. Dowel bars shall be checked for exact position
supported. Any joint installation not firmly and securely supported shall be
reset.
When joint in concrete pavement are sewed, the joint shall be cut at the time
and in the manner approved by the “Engineer”. The equipment used shall be
as described in 311.4.2.
The circular cutter shall be capable of cutting a groove in a straight line; the
circular cutter shall produce a slot at least 3.00m wide. When shown on the
plans or required to be widened by means of a second shallower cut or by
suitable and approved beveling to provide adequate space for joint sealers.
Sawing of the joints shall commence as soon as the concrete has hardened
sufficiently to permit cutting without chipping, spalling or tearing. Concrete
shall be sawed at the required spacing consecutively in sequence of the
concrete placement, unless otherwise approved by the “Engineer”.
Longitudinal Joints. Longitudinal construction joints necessary for runway

construction shall be formed against suitable side forms (usually made of
steel) with keyways, unless otherwise indicated in the plans. Wooden forms
may be used under special conditions, when approved by the “Engineer”. In
these instances where the keyed construction joint is not designated, a butt
type joint shall paint and greased. The edges of the joints shall be finished
with a grooving tool or edging tools and space or slot shall be formed along
the joint of the dimensions, as indicated to receive the joint sealing material.
Provisions shall be made for the installation of the tie bars as noted on the
plans.
84
Contradiction or Weakened Plane Type. The longitudinal groove formed or
sawed in the top of the slab shall be installed where indicated on the drawings.
The groove shall be formed in the plastic concrete with suitable tools or
materials to obtain the width and depth specified, or it shall be sawed with
approved equipment in the hardened concrete to the dimensions required.
When the groove is formed in plastic concrete, it shall be true to line with not
more than 6.0mm variation in 3.0m; it shall be finished even and smooth with
an edging tool. If an insert material is used, the installation and edge finish
shall be according to the manufacturer’s instruction. The sawed shall be
straight and of uniform width and depth. In either case, the groove shall be
clean cut so that spalling will be avoided at intersection with transverse joints.
Tie bars shall be installed across these joints, unless otherwise shown on the
plans.
Expansion. Longitudinal expansion joints shall be installed where designated

on the plans. These shall be butt type without load transfer devices and shall
include pre-molded expansion material.
The thickness of the concrete at these joints shall be increased by at least 25%
of the normal pavement thickness to the nearest inch but not less than 50mm.
This increase shall be slope to normal thickness is not less than 3.0m from the
joint or to the nearest joint such as groove joint. The pre-molded filler of the
thickness shown on the plans shall extend for the full depth and width of the
slab at the joint, except for space for sealant at the top of the slab. The filler
shall be securely staked and fastened into position perpendicular to the
proposed finished surface. A metal or wooden cap shall be provided to protect
the edge of the filler and to permit the concrete to placed and finished. After
the concrete has been placed and the struck-off, the cap shall be carefully
withdrawn leaving the space over the pre-molded filler. The edges of the joint
shall be finished and tooled while the concrete is still plastic.
TRANSVERSE JOINT
Expansion. Transverse expansion joints shall be installed at the location and

spacing as shown on the plans. The joints shall be installed at right angles to
the centerline perpendicular to the surface of the pavement. The joint shall be
so installed and finished to ensure complete separation of the slabs.
Expansion joints shall be pre-molded type conforming to these specifications

and with the plans and shall be to the full width of the pavement strip.
All concrete shall be cleaned from the top of the joint material before
pavement is opened to traffic, this space shall be swept, clean and filled with
approved joint sealing material.
The filler shall be placed on the side of the installing plate nearest the mixer. A
metal channel cap of at least 10-gauge material shall protect the top edge of
the filler. The installing device may be designed with this cap self-contained.
All device used for the installation of expansion joints shall be approved by
the Engineer. They shall be easily removable without disturbing the concrete
85
and held in proper transverse and vertical alignment. Immediately after forms
are removed, any concrete bridging the joint space at the ends shall be
removed for the full width and depth of the joint.
When specified, expansion joints shall be equipped with dowels of dimensions

and at the spacing and location indicated on the plans. The dowels shall be
firmly supported in place and accurately aligned parallel to the sub-grade and
the centerline of the pavement and will ensure that the dowels are not
displaced during construction.
Other types of load transfer devices may be used, when approved by the
“Engineer”.
Contraction. Transverse contraction joints, weakened plane joints, or both,

shall be installed at the locations and spacing as shown on the plans. These
joints will be installed by forming a groove or cleft in the top of the slab while
the concrete is still plastic or by sawing a groove into the concrete surface
after the concrete has hardened in the same manner as specified in 311.4.1.
Dowel bar assembly shall be installed, when required, as shown on the plans.
Reinforcing steel mesh or bars shall be continued through weakened-plane
joints as shown for reinforced concrete pavement.
Construction. Transverse construction joints shall be installed in accordance

with the details on the plans and ordinarily are only needed when it is
necessary to suspend the work for more than 30 minutes. When the installation
of the joint can be planned in advance, it shall be located at a contraction or
expansion joint. The joint shall not be allowed within 2.40 meters of a regular
spaced transverse joint. If the pouring of the concrete has been stopped,
causing a joint to fall within this limit, it shall be removed back to the
previously spaced regular joint.
311.4.11 FINAL STRIKE-OFF, CONSOLIDATED AND FINISHING
Sequence. The sequence of operations shall be strike-off and consolidation,

floating and removal of laitance, straight edging, and final surface finish. The
addition of superficial water to the surface of the concrete to assist in finishing
operations generally will not be permitted. If the application of water to the
surface is permitted, it shall be applied as a fog spray by means of approved
spray equipment.
Finishing Joints. The concrete adjacent to joints shall be compacted or firmly

placed without voids or segregation against the joint material; it shall be firmly
placed without voids or segregation under and around all load transfer devices,
joint assembly units, and other features designed to extend into the pavement.
Concrete adjacent to joints shall be mechanically vibrated as required in
311.4.7.
After the concrete has been placed and vibrated adjacent to the joints as
required in 311.4.7, the finishing machine shall be operated in a manner to
avoid damage or misalignment of joints. If uninterrupted operations of the
finishing machine, to, over, and beyond the joints causes segregation of
86
concrete, damage to or misalignment of the joints, the finishing machine shall
be stopped when the front screed is approximately 20 cm from the joint.
Segregated concrete shall be removed from the front of and off the joint; the
front screed shall be lifted and set directly on top of the joint and the forward
motion of the finishing machine shall be resumed. When the second screed is
closed enough to permit the excess mortar in front of it to flow over the joint,
it shall be lifted and carried over the joint. Thereafter, the finishing machine
may be run over without lifting the screeds, provided there is no segregated
concrete immediately between the joint and the screed or on top of the joint.
MACHINE FINISHING
Non-Vibratory Method. The concrete shall be spread as soon as it is placed

and it shall be struck-off and screed by an approved finishing machine. The
machine shall go over each area as many times and at such intervals as
necessary to give the proper compaction and to leave a surface of uniform
texture. Excessive operation over a given area shall be avoided. The tops of
the forms shall be kept clean by an effective device attached to the machine
and the travel of the machine on the forms shall be maintained true without
lift, wobbling or other vibration tending to affect the precision finish.
During the first pass of the finishing machine, a uniform ridge of concrete
shall be maintained ahead of the front screed for its entire length.
Vibratory Method. When vibration is specified, the vibrators for full-width

vibration of concrete paving slabs shall meet the requirement specified in
311.4.2 (c)(2). If uniform and satisfactory density of the concrete is not
obtained by the vibratory method at joints, along forms, at structures, and
throughout the pavement, the contractor will be required to furnish equipment
and methods that will produce pavement conforming to the specifications. All
provisions in sub-paragraph (1) above not in conflict with the provisions for
the vibratory method shall govern.
Hand Finishing. Unless otherwise specified, hand finishing methods will not
be permitted, except under the following conditions;
Narrow widths or areas of irregular dimensions where operation of the

mechanical equipment is impractical may be finished by hand methods.
Concrete, as soon as placed, shall be struck-off and screed. An approved

portable screed shall be used. A second screed shall be provided for striking-
off the bottom layer of concrete when reinforcement is used.
The screed for the surface shall be at least 60cm longer than the maximum
width of the slab to be struck-off. It shall be of approved design, sufficiently
rigid to retain its shape, and shall be constructed either of metal or of suitable
material, shed with metal.
Consolidation shall be attained by the use of a suitable vibrator or other

approved equipment.
87
Floating. After the concrete has been struck-off and consolidated, it shall be
further smoothed, trued and consolidated by means of a longitudinal float,
using one of the following methods as specified or permitted:
1. Hand Method. The hand operated longitudinal float shall be not less than
350mm in length and 350mm in length and 150mm in width, properly and
warping. The longitudinal float, operated from foot bridges resting on the side
forms and spanning but not touching the concrete, shall be work with sawing
motion, while held in a floating position parallel to the runway centerline of
the pavement shall be in successive advances of not more than one half the
length of the float. Any excess water or soupy material shall be wasted over
the side forms on each pass.
2. Alternative Mechanical Method. As an alternative to 311.4.1. (e)(2) above,

the contractor may use any machine composed of a cutting and smoothing
float(s), suspended from the guided rigid frame. Four or more visible wheels
riffing on and constantly in contact with the side forms shall carry the frame.
If necessary, following one of the preceding methods of floating, long handed

floats having blades not less than 1.5mm in length and 0.150mm in width may
be used to smoothed and fill in open-textured area in pavement. Long handled
floats shall not be used to float the entire surface of the pavement in lieu of, or
supplementing, one of the preceding methods of floating. When strike-off and
consolidation are done by hand and the crown of the pavement will not permit
the use of the longitudinal float, the surface shall be floated transversely by
means of the long-handled float. Care shall be taken not to work the crown out
of the pavement by a straightedge 10 feet or more in length. Successive drags
shall be lapped one-half the length of the blade.
Straightedge Testing and Surface Correction. After the floating has been
completed and the excess water removed, but while the concrete is still plastic.
The surface of the concrete shall be tested for trueness with a 5-meter straight
edge. For this purpose, the contractor shall furnish and use an accurate 5-meter
straight edge swung from handles 900mm longer than one half the width of
the slab. The straight edge shall be held in contact with the surface in
successive positions parallel to the centerline and the whole area gone over
from one side of the slab to the other, as necessary. Advancing shall be in
successive stages of not one-half the length of the straight edge. Any
depressions shall be immediately filled with freshly mixed concrete, struck-
off, consolidated and refinished. Special attention shall be given to assure that
the surface across joints meets the requirements for the smoothness. Straight
edge testing and surface corrections shall continue until the slab conforms to
the required grade and cross-section.
Final Finish. The surface of a runway shall be finished with either a broom
finish or a belt finish. Taxiways, aprons, and other pavements may be finished
with wither a broom finish, a belt finish, or a drag finish.
Broom Finish. If the surface texture is to be broom finish, it shall be applied

when the water sheen has practically disappeared. The broom shall be drawn
from the center to the edge of the pavement with adjacent strokes slightly
88
overlapping. The brooming operation shall be uniform in appearance and not
more than 3.0mm in depth. Brooming shall be completed before the concrete
is in such operation. The surface thus finished shall be free from rough and
porous areas, irregularities, and depression resulting from improper handling
of the broom. Broom shall be of quality, in size, and construction and shall be
operated to produce a surface finish meeting the approval of the “Engineer”.
Subject to the approval of the “Engineer”, the Contractor may be permitted to
substitute mechanical brooming in lieu of the manual brooming as herein
described.
Belt Finish. If the surface texture is to be a belt finish, when straight edging is
completed and water sheen has practically disappeared and just before the
concrete becomes non-plastic, the surface shall be belted with 2-ply canvass
belt not less than 200mm wide at least 900mm longer than the pavement
width. Hand belts shall have suitable handles to permit controlled, uniform
manipulation. The belt shall be operated with short stroke transverse to the
centerline and a rapid advance parallel to the centerline.
Drag Finish. If the surface texture is to be a drag finish, a drag shall be used;
it shall consist of seamless strip of damp burlap or cotton fabric, and it shall
produce a uniform surface of gritty texture dragging it longitudinally along the
full width of pavement. For pavement 16 feet or more in width, the drag shall
be mounted on a bridge, which travel on the form. The dimensions of the drag
shall be such that a strip of burlap of fabric at least 900mm wide is not in
contact with the full width, of the pavement surface while the drag is used.
The drag shall be approximately 150mm wider than the upper layer. The drag
shall be maintained in such a condition that the resultant surface is of uniform
appearance and reasonably free from grooves over 1.50mm in depth. Drag that
cannot be cleaned shall be discarded and substituted.
Edging at Forms and Joints. After the final finish, but before the concrete
has taken its initial set, the edges of the pavement along each side of each slab,
on each side of transverse expansion joint, formed joints, transverse
construction joints, and emergency construction joints shall be worked with an
approved tool rounded to the radius required by the plans. A well-defined and
continuous radius shall be produced and a smooth dense, mortar finish
obtained. Tilting of the tool during use shall not unduly disturb the surface of
the slab.
At all joints any tool marks appearing on the adjacent to the joints shall be
eliminated by brooming the surface. In doing this rounding of the edge shall
not be disturbed. All concrete on top of the joint filler shall be completely
removed.
All joints shall be tested with straightedge before the concrete has set, and
correction shall be made if only one side of the joint is higher than the other or
if they are higher than the other or if they are higher or lower than the adjacent
slabs.
89
311.4.12 Surface Test.
As soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently, the pavement shall be tested
with 5-meter straight edge or other specified device. Areas showing high spots
of more than 6mm but not exceeding 12.5mm in 5-meter shall be when
marked immediately ground with approved grinding tool to an elevation where
the area or spot will not show surface deviations in excess of 6mm when tested
with 5-meter straight edge. Where the departure from correct cross section
exceeds 12.50mm, the pavement shall be removed and replaced by and at the
expense of the contractor.
All of whatever kind that may elect to use, lack of water to adequately take
care of both curing and other requirements, shall be cause for immediate
suspension of concreting operations. The concrete shall not be left exposed for
more than ½ hour between stages of curing or during the curing period.
Cotton or Burlaps Mats. The surface of the pavement shall be entirely

covered with mats. The mats shall be used of such length (or width) that, a
laid, they will extend at least twice the thickness of the pavement beyond the
edges of the slab. The mat shall be placed and weighed to remain in intimate
contact with the surface covered has been placed, unless otherwise specified,
the covering shall be maintained in placed for 72 hours after the concrete has
been placed.
Straw Curing. When this type of curing is used, the pavement shall be cured
initially with burlap or cotton mats, as specified in 311.4.13 (a) until after
placing the concrete. As soon as the mats are removed, the surface and the
sides of the pavement shall be thoroughly wetted and covered with at least 8
inches of straw or hay, the thickness of which is to be measured after the
wetting. For the straw or hay, the thickness of which is to be measured after
the after wetting. If the straw or hay covering becomes displaced during the
curing period, it shall be replaced to the original depth and saturated. It shall
be kept thoroughly saturated with water for 3 days and thoroughly wetted
down during the morning of the fourth day, and the cover shall remain in place
until the concrete has attained the required strength. When permission is given
to open the pavement swept clean. The covering shall be removed and
disposed of in such a manner as to leave the area in a neat and presentable
condition. The straw or hay shall not be disposed of by burning or adjacent to
the pavement.
Impervious Membrane Method. The entire surface of the pavement shall be

sprayed uniformly with white pigmented curing compound immediately after
the finishing of the surface and before the set of the concrete has taken place;
if pavement is cured initially with jute or cotton mats, it may apply upon
removal of the mats. The curing compound shall not be applied during rainfall.
Curing compound shall be applied mechanical sprayers under pressure at the

rate of 14 liters to not more than 14sq.m.. The spraying equipment shall be of
the fully atomizing type equipped with a tank agitator. At the time of use, the
compound shall be in a thoroughly mixed condition with the pigment
uniformly dispersed through the vehicle. During application, the compound
90
shall be stirred of off-widths or shapes and concrete surfaces exposed by the
removal of forms will be permitted. Curing compound shall not be applied to
the inside faces of joints to be sealed.
The curing compound shall be of such character that the film hardens within
30 minutes after application. Should the film become damaged from any cause
within the required curing period, the damaged portion shall be repaired
immediately with additional compound.
Upon removal of side forms, the sides of the exposed slab shall be protected
immediately to provide a curing treatment equal to that provided for the
surface.
White Polyethylene Sheeting. The top surface and sides of the pavement
shall be entirely covered with polyethylene sheeting. The units shall be lapped
at least 18 inches. The sheeting shall be placed and weighed to remain in
intimate contact with the surface covered. The sheeting as prepared for use
shall have such dimensions that each unit, as laid, will extend beyond the
edges of slabs at least twice the thickness of the pavement. Unless otherwise
specified, the covering shall be maintained in place for 72 hours after the
concrete has been placed.
Curing in Cold Weather. When the average daily temperature is below 0°

Fahrenheit, curing shall consist of covering the newly laid pavement with not
less than 30 cm of loose, dry hay or straw, or equivalent protective curing
authorized by the “Engineer”, which shall be retained in place for 10 days.
Admixture for curing temperature control may be used only when authorized
by the “Engineer”.
When concrete is being placed and the air temperature may be expected to
drop below 35° Fahrenheit, a sufficient supply of straw, hay, grass or other
suitable blanketing material shall be provided along the work. Any time the
temperature may be expected to reach the point during the day or night, the
material so provided shall be spread over the pavement to the sufficient depth
to prevent freezing of the concrete. The period of time such protection shall be
maintained must not be less than 10 days. The Contractor shall be responsible
for the quality and strength of the concrete placed during cold weather, and
any concrete injured by frost action shall be removed and replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
311.4.13 Removing Forms.
Unless otherwise specified, the forms shall not be removed from freshly
placed concrete until it has set for at least 12 hours, except where auxiliary
forms are used temporarily in widened areas. Forms shall be removed
carefully to avoid damage to the pavement. After the forms have been remove,
the sides of the slab shall be cured as outlined in one of the methods indicated
in 311.4.12. Major honeycomb areas shall be considered as defective work and
shall be removed and replaced. Any area or section so removed shall not be
less than 3.0 meters in length not less than the full width of the lane involved.
When it is necessary to remove and replace a section of pavement, any
91
remaining portion of the slab adjacent to the joints that is less than 3.0 meters
in length shall also be removed and replaced.
311.4.14 Sealing Joints.
The joints in the pavement shall be sealed in accordance with Item 907.
311.4.15 Protection of Pavement
The Contractor shall protect the pavement and its appurtenances against both
public traffic caused by his own employees and agents. This shall include
watchmen to direct traffic and the erection and maintenance of warning signs,
lights, pavement bridges, or crossovers, etc. The plans or special provisions
will indicate the location and type of device or facility required to protect the
work and provide adequately for traffic.
Any damage to the pavement occurring prior to the final acceptance and
within the guarantee period shall be replaced or the pavement replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
311.4.16 Opening to Traffic.

The “Engineer” shall decide when the pavement shall be opened to traffic. The
pavement shall not be opened to traffic for at least 14 days after the concrete
has been placed or until the strength has been attained for service use. Prior to
opening, the pavement shall be cleaned.
For the purpose of establishing an adjusted unit price for pavement, units to be
considered separately are defined as 300 lineal metes of pavement in each
paving lane starting from the end of the pavement bearing the smaller station
number. The last unit in each lane shall be 300 meters plus the fractional part
of the 300 meters remaining. When the measurement of the core from a unit is
not deficient more than 5mm from the plane thickness, full payment will be
made. When such measurement id deficient more than 5mm and not more than
25mm from the plan thickness, two additional cores at intervals not less than
90 meters shall be taken and used in the average thickness for that unit. An
adjusted unit price as provided in 311.5.1 (b) will be paid.
Other areas such as intersections, entrances, crossovers, ramps, etc., shall be

considered as one unit, and the thickness of each unit will be determined
separately. Small irregular unit areas may be included as part of another unit.
At such points as the “Engineer” may select in each unit, one core shall be
taken for each 83.5 square meters of pavement, or fraction thereof, in the unit.
If the core is deficient in thickness by more than 5mm but not more than
25mm from the plan thickness, two additional cores shall be taken from the
areas represented and the average of the three cores determined. If the average
measurement of these three cores is not deficient by more than 5mm from the
plan thickness, full payment will be made. If the thickness of the three cores is
deficient by more than 5mm but not more than 25mm from the plan thickness,
an adjusted unit price, as provided in 311.5.1 (b), will be paid for the area
represented by these cores.
92
In calculating the average thickness of the pavement, measurements which are
in excess of the specified thickness by more than 5mm shall be considered as
specified thickness plus 5mm, and measurements which are less than the
specified thickness by more than 25mm shall not be included in the average.
When the measurement of any core is less than the specified thickness by
more than 25-mm, the actual thickness of the pavement in this area shall be
determined by taking additional cores at not less than 3-meters intervals
parallel to the centerline in each direction from the affected location, until
each direction from the affected location, until in each direction a core has
found deficient by more than 25-mm. Areas found deficient in thickness by
more than 25-mm shall be evaluated by the “Engineer” and, if in his judgment
the deficient areas warrant removal, they shall be removed and replaced with
concrete of the thickness shown on the plans. Exploratory cores for deficient
thickness will not be used in average for adjusted unit price.
The quantity to be paid for shall be the number of square meters of either plain or
reinforced pavement as specified in place, completed and accepted, less deductions as
hereinafter required for deficient thickness.
311.6.1 General
The accepted quantities of concrete pavement will be paid for at the contract
unit price per square meter which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing of all materials, including any
dowels, steel reinforcement and joint material, provided however, that for any
pavement found deficient in the thickness by more that 5-mm, but not more
than 25-mm, only the reduced price stipulated below shall be paid.
No additional payment over the unit contract bid price shall be made for any
pavement which has an average thickness in excess of that shown on the plans.
PAYMENT UNIT OF
DESCRIPTION
NUMBER MEASUREMENT
Portland Cement
311 Square Meter
Concrete Pavement
Price adjustments, where the average thickness of pavement is deficient in

thickness by more than 5-mm but not more than 25-mm, payment will be
made at an adjusted price as specified in the following table:
93
CONCRETE PAVEMENT DEFICIENCY
DEFICIENCY INTHICKNESS PROPORTIONAL PART OF

DETERMINED BY CORES (mm) CONTRACT PRICE
ALLOWED (%)
0.00 to 5.00 100
5.01 to 7.62 80
7.63 to 10.16 72
10.16 to 12.50 68
12.51 to 19.00 57
19.01 to 25.00 50
When the thickness of pavement is deficient by more than 25-mm and in the
judgment of the “Engineer”, the area of such deficiency should not be
removed and replaced, there shall be no payment for the area retained.
311.6.2 ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE

The strength of concrete shall be deemed acceptable if the average of three
consecutive strength test results is equal to 650 psi for flexural strength or
exceeds the specified strength required.
Concrete deemed to be not acceptable using the above criteria may be rejected
unless the Contractor can provide evidence, by means of core tests, that the
quality of concrete represented by the failed test results is acceptable in place.
These cores shall be taken in accordance with AASHTO 124 and soaked for
24 hours prior to test. Concrete in the area represented by the cores will be
deemed acceptable for the average strength of the cores is equal to at least
85% and of no single core is less than 75% of the specified strength.
94
C. CONSTRUCTION OF BOX CULVERT WITH
WINGWALLS
ITEM 102 EXCAVATION

See Section A. Strip Grade Correction (STA 1+430 to STA 1+860) Item 102 Excavation.
ITEM 405 STRUCTURAL CONCRETE AND

REINFORCEMENT
405.1 SCOPE OF WORK
This Section includes all cast-in-place and pre-cast concrete and related works required under
these Specifications, except Portland Cement Concrete Pavement.
405.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS
Concrete shall consist of mixture of Portland Cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate,
admixtures when specified, and water mixed in the proportions specified or approved by the
Engineer.
The following publications of the issued, listed below, but referred to thereafter by basic
designation only, form a part of this Specification to the extent indicated by the reference
thereto:
1. American Concrete Institute ( ACI ), Standard:
ACI 211.1 Recommended Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural

Concrete.
ACI 214 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compressive Test Results of
Field Concrete.
ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Converting
ACI 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Concrete Structure
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, with
Commentary
2. American Society for Testing and Materials ( ASTM ) Publications:
A 82 Cold-Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement

A 185 Welded Steel Wire Fabric Concrete Reinforcement
A 615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
A 616 Rail-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
A 617 Axle-Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
95
C 31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the field
C 33 Concrete Aggregate
C 39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
C 42 Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete, obtaining and testing
C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
C 143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
C 150 Portland Cement
C 171 Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
C 172 Sampling Fresh Concrete in the ASTM Publication
C 173 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
C 192 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory
C 231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
C 260 Air-Entraining Admixture for Concrete
C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
C 494 Chemical Admixture for Concrete
C 1751 Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction. (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types )
3. American Welding Society ( AWS )
D.12.1 Welding Reinforcing Steel, Metal Inserts and Connections in Reinforced

Concrete Construction.
4. Philippine Standard (PS) 681 – 04 .02, 1975
DSB 275 Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
405.3 SUBMITTALS
Refer to General and Special Requirements of the Contract.
Test Reports and Certificates shall be furnished for approval before delivery of certified or
testes materials to the Project Site.
405.4 CLASSES OF CONCRETE AND USAGE
405.4.1STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS:
Concrete of the various classes indicated and as required under other sections, and unless
specified in the plan shall be proportioned and mixed for the following strength:
Class Size of Aggregate Specified Compressive

(mm) Strength
28 days f’c = kg/sq.cm.
A-A 25 420
A 40 240
B 40 210
C 50 175
Seal 25 240
96
In addition to the above, the maximum permissible water-cement ratio by weight shall not be
greater than 0.55 unless otherwise the Engineer.
405.4.2USAGE
Concrete of the various classes to be used shall be as follows:
1. Class A-A concrete: For pre-stressed concrete structures and members.

2. Class A concrete: For pre-cast structure, superstructures and heavily reinforced
substructures which include slabs beams, walls, girders, columns, arch ribs, box culverts,
reinforce abutments, retaining walls, reinforced footings and foundation of buildings.
3. Class B concrete: Footings, pedestals, foundation of equipment, retaining wall, curb, slab
on grade, pipe bedding gravity walls, unreinforced or with only a small amount of
reinforcement.
4. Class C concrete: Leveling concrete.
5. Class Seal: Concrete deposited in water
405.4.3 Additives acceptable to the Engineer shall be used for all reinforced concrete
structures exposed to salt water action.
405.5 MATERIALS
405.5.1CEMENT
Except when specifically approved by the Engineer only one brand of cement shall be used
for any individual structure. In determining the approved mix, only Portland Cement shall be
used.
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I

2. High-Early Strength Portland Cement Type III may be used for pre-cast concrete.
Cement Type III shall conform to ASTM C 150 with a tricalcium aluminate limited to 8
percent.
405.5.2ADMIXTURES
Shall conform to the following:
1. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260

2. Admixture other than air-entraining agent shall conform to ASTM C 494.
3. Admixture containing chloride ions, or other ions producing deleterious effects, shall not
be used.
405.5.3AGGREGATES:
1. Coarse Aggregates: Conforming to ASTM C 33 and having nominal sizes passing 38.0
mm to 19.00 mm, 19.0 mm to 9.5 mm to No. 4 sieve. The material shall be well graded
between the limits indicated and individually stocked piled. It shall be the Contractor’s
responsibility to blend the materials to meet the gradation requirements for various type
of concrete as specified herein.
97
a. Nominal sizes for combined gradation shall be as follows:
Table 405.1 - Grading Requirements for Coarse Aggregate
Sieve Designation Mass Percent Passing for

Standard Alternate Class Class Class Class Class
Mm US B C A A-A Seal
Standard
63 2½“ 100
50 2“ 95-100 100
37.50 1½“ 95-100 100
25 1“ 35-70 90-100 100
19.0 ¾” 35-70 90-100 100
12.5 ½“ 10-30 25-60 90-
100
9.5 3/8 “ 10-30 20-55 40-70
4.75 No. 4 0.5 0.5 0.10 0.10 0.15
The measured cement content shall be within plus ( + ) or minus ( - ) 2 mass percent of the
design cement content.
2. Fine aggregate: ASTM 33 except for gradation which has been revised to meet local
conditions. Unless otherwise required by the Engineer, grading of fine aggregate shall be
as follows:
ASTM Sieve By Weight Passing
9.5 mm ( 3/8”) 100
No. 4 90-100
No. 8 80-100
No. 16 50-90
No. 30 25-60
No. 50 10-30
No. 100 2-10
a. Grading of fine aggregate shall be reasonably uniform and fineness modulus

thereof shall not vary more than 0.2 from that of the representative sample on
which mix proportions of concrete are based.
b. Due care shall be taken to prevent segregation.
405.5.4WATER
The water used in concrete, mortar and grout shall be free from objectionable quantities of
silt, organic matter, alkali, salts and other impurities.
405.5.5ANCHORAGE ITEMS:
a. Dowels for anchoring mechanical items to concrete shall be of manufacturer’s standard

and of types required to engage with the anchors to be provided and installed therein
under other sections of these Specifications and shall be subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
98
b. Slots shall be dovetail-type, of not lighter than 24-gauge zinc-coated steel, with filler that
prevents concrete or water from entering and that can be easily removed or punctured for
installing anchors.
c. Inserts for suspended ceilings: Wire inserts for attachment of wire hangers for suspended
ceilings shall not be lighter than 7-gauge zinc-coated steel wire. When flat iron or steel
hangers are to be used zinc-coated inserts of the same section shall be set in the concrete.
d. Inserts for bolt hangers shall be of malleable iron or of cast of wrought steel. Inserts for
bolt hangers shall either be threaded or slotted as required by the types of hanger to be
used. Threaded inserts shall have integral lugs to prevent turning.
405.5.6CURING MATERIALS:
a. Impervious Sheet Materials: ASTM C 171, type optional except that polyethylene film,
of used, shall be white opaque.
b. Burlap of commercial quality, non-staining type, consisting of 2 layers opaque.
c. Inserts for suspended ceilings: Wire inserts for attachment of wire hangers for suspended
ceilings not be lighter than 7-gauge zinc-coated steel wire. When flat iron or steel
hangers are to be used zinc-coated inserts to the same section shall be set in the concrete.
d. Inserts for bolt hangers shall be of malleable iron or of cast of wrought steel. Inserts for
bolt hangers shall either be treated or slotted as required by the types of hanger to be used.
Threaded inserts shall have integral lugs to prevent turning.
405.5.7FORM MATERIALS:
Coatings and Ties are specified under 405.5.14, Form work of this Specification.
405.5.8REINFORCEMENT
a. Deformed Bars conforming to PS 681-04.02 ( DSB 275 ); 1975 First Revision, or

conforming to Bar Reinforcement of Item 401-Reinforcing Steel.
b. Mesh Reinforcement conforming to JIS G 3551 or equivalent.
405.5.9EXPANSION JOINT FILLER:
Preformed joint filler conforming to ASTM 17521, type and class suitable for the use
intended.
405.5.10 VAPOR BARRIER:
a. Asphalt-saturated waterproof reinforced draft paper.

b. Polyethylene sheeting shall not be less than 0.2 mm nominal thickness.
405.5.11 WATERSTOPS SHALL BE OF THE FOLLOWING:
Copper conforming to ASTM B 370, 567 gms weight: or stainless steel conforming to
ASTM A 167, type 304 L, finish 2D or equivalent, annealed 0.94 mm nominal thickness.
99
405.6 SAMPLES AND TESTING
Testing except as otherwise specified herein, shall be performed by an approved testing

agency as proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to
the Government.
Cement: Sampled either at the mill or at the site of the work and tested by an
approved independent commercial national testing laboratory at no
additional cost to the Government. Certified copies of laboratory test
reports shall be furnished for each lot of cement and shall include all test
data, results, and certificates that the sampling and testing procedures are
in conformance with the Specifications. No cement shall be used until
notice has been given by the Engineer that the test results are satisfactory.
Cement that has been stored, other than in bins at the mills, for more than
3 months after delivery to the Site shall be retreated before use. Cement
delivered at the Site and later fond under test to be unsuitable shall not be
incorporated into the permanent works.
Aggregate: Tested as prescribed in ASTM C33.
Reinforcement: Certified copies of mill certificate of tests shall accompany

deliveries of steel bar reinforcement. If requested by the Engineer
additional testing of the materials shall be made at the Contractor’s
expense.
Concrete Tests: Provide for test purposes, one set of the test specimens taken
under the instruction of the Engineer from each 75 cu. m. or fraction
thereof of each class of concrete placed or at least one set of test specimens
shall be provided for each class of concrete placed in each 8-hour shift.
Each shall consist of three test specimens, and shall be made from a
separate batch. Samples shall be secured in conformance with ASTM
C172. Test specimen shall be made, cured, and packed for shipment in
accordance with ASTM C31. Cylinders will be tested by and at the
expense of the Contractor in accordance with ASTM C39. Test specimens
will be evaluated separately, by the Engineer for meeting strength level
requirements for each with CONCRETE QUALITY of ACI 318 . The
standard age of test shall be 28 days, but 7 days tests may be used, with the
permission of the Engineer, provided that the relation between the 7-day
and 28-day strengths on the concrete is established by tests for the
materials and proportions used. When samples fail to conform to the
requirements for strength, the Engineer shall have the right to order a
change in the proportions of the concrete mix for the remaining portions of
the work at no additional cost to the Government.
Test of Hardened Concrete in or Removed from the Structure: When the result of the
strength tests of the control specimens indicates in the concrete as
placed does not meet the Specifications requirements or where there is
other evidence that the quality of the concrete is below the
specification requirements, test on core of in-place concrete shall be
made in conformance with ASTM C 42.
100
a. Core specimens shall be obtained by the Contractor and shall be tested.
Any deficiency shall be corrected; if the Contractor elects, he may
submit a proposal for approval that a load test is made. If the proposal
is approved, the Contractor and the test results evaluated by the
Engineer in conformance with 20 of ACI 318 shall make the load test.
The cost of the load tests shall be borne by the Contractor. If any
concrete shows evidence of failure during the load test or fails the load
test as evaluated the deficiency shall be corrected in a manner
approved by the Engineer at no additional cost to the Government.
Admixtures: All admixtures shall be tested and those that have been in storage at the
project Site for longer than 6 months shall not be used until proved by
retest to be satisfactory.
a. Air-Entraining Admixtures: Tested for conformance to the referenced

specification under which it is furnished. The testing shall be
conducted with cement and aggregate proposed for the project.
b. Other admixtures if approved, tested for conformance to the referenced

specifications under which it is furnished. The testing shall be
conducted with cement and aggregate proposed for the Project.
405.7 STORAGE
Storage accommodation for concrete materials shall be subject to approval and shall afford
easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment in accordance with test reports.
Cement: Immediate upon receipt at the Site, the Cement shall be stored separately
in a dry weather tight, properly ventilated structure, with of adequate
provisions for prevention or absorption of moisture. Cement bags should
not be stacked more than 13 bags high. The cement most likely to have
been exposed to moisture or stored in bags for more than 3 months shall
not be used unless proven by test to be in good condition.
Aggregate: Stored to assure good drainage, to preclude inclusion of foreign matter,

and to preserve the gradation.
405.8 FORMWORK
Forms: Designed, constructed, and maintained so as to insure that, after removal,

the finished concrete members will have true surfaces, free of offset,
waving or bulges, and will conform accurately to the indicated shapes,
dimensions, .lines, elevation, and positions in the plan. Form surfaces
that will be contact with concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned before each
use.
405.8.1DESIGN
101
Studs and wale shall be spaced to prevent deflection of form materials. Forms and joints
shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of grout and cement paste during placing of
concrete. Juncture of formwork panels shall occur at vertical control joints, and construction
joints. Forms placed on successive units for continuous surfaces shall be fitted in accurate
alignment to assure smooth completed surface free from irregularities and signs of
discontinuity. Temporary opening shall be arranged to wall and where otherwise required to
facilitate cleaning and inspection. Forms shall be readily removable without impact, shock,
or damage to the concrete.
405.8.2CONCRETE SURFACES TO BE EXPOSED

Form surfaces that will be in contact with concrete shall be of materials that is non reactive
with concrete and that will produce concrete surfaces equivalent in smoothness and
appearance to that produced by new 1.2 x 2.4 meters plywood panels approved by the
Engineer. Smaller size panels shall be used only where required by opening on the above
architectural lines or joints, with each area less than 1.2 meters wide formed with single panel
accurately cut to the required dimensions. Cut surfaces shall be smooth and treated with form
coating. Panel joints that will being contact with concrete shall be smooth and free of offset.
Form materials with defects that will impair the texture and appearance of finish surfaces
shall not be used. Form lining, if used, shall be installed over solid backing. Column forms
shall be made with a minimum number of joints.
405.8.3CONCRETE SURFACES TO BE UNEXPOSED
Form surfaces that will be in contact with concrete shall be sound, tight lumber or other
material producing equivalent finish.
405.8.4SAMPLE CONCRETE PANELS
Before constructing structural formwork, sample concrete panel for exposed or painted
concrete shall be constructed and approved for smooth finish specified in paragraph
FINISHES OF CONCRETE OTHER THAN FLOOR SLABS. The panel shall not be less
than 1.8 meter long by 1.2 meter high. Concrete shall be of the approved design mix. Forms
shall include a typical joint between form panels. Sample panels shall show tie-hole patching
and smooth finish. Sample panels shall be constructed at approved locations, not as part of
the structure, and shall be protected from construction operations, weather, and other damage
until acceptance of the completed concrete work. The approved sample panel shall be
representative of the smooth concrete finish required in the work.
405.8.5 Form Ties shall be factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal ties of

design that it will not allow form deflection and will not spall concrete upon removal. Solid
backing shall be provided for each tie. Ties shall be fitted with devices that will leave holes
in the concrete surface no less than 9 mm nor more than 2.5 mm in diameter and of depth not
less than 25 mm.
The portions of the tie remaining in the concrete after removal of the exterior parts shall not
project beyond the surface of the concrete and shall be at least 38 mm back from any surface
of the concrete that will be exposed, painted, damp-proofed, water-proofed, or receive direct
applications of plaster. Bolts and rods that are to be completely withdrawn shall be coated
with a non-staining bond breaker.
102
405.8.6CHAMFERING
External corners of columns, girders, beams, foundation wall projecting beyond overlaying
masonry, and other external corners that will be exposed shall be chamfered, beveled or
rounded, not less than 19 mm, by molding in the forms unless the drawings specifically state
that chamfering is to be omitted.
405.8.7COATINGS
Forms for exposed surfaces shall be coated with form oil or form-release agent before
reinforcement is placed. The coating shall be a commercial formulation of satisfactory and
proven performance that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces, and
will not impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces depending upon or adhesion nor
impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. The coating
shall be used as recommended in the manufacturer’s printed or written instructions. Forms
for unexposed surfaces may be wet with water in lieu of coating immediately before placing
of concrete. Surplus coating on form surfaces and coating on reinforcement steel and
construction joints shall be removed before placing concrete.
405.8.8 Removal of forms shall be in a manner to insure complete safety of the

structure after the following conditions have been met. Where structural as a whole is
supported on shores, forms for beam and girder sides, columns, and similar vertical structural
members may be removed after 24 hours, provided concrete is sufficiently hard not to be
injured thereby.
Supporting forms of shoring shall not be removed until structural members have acquired
sufficient strength to support safely their own weight and any construction and/or storage
load to which they may be subjected, but in no case shall they be removed in less than 7 days,
nor shall forms used for curing be removed before expiration of curing period except as
specified in paragraph CURING. Care shall be taken to avoid spalling the concrete surface or
damaging concrete edges. Wood forms shall be completely removed.
a. Control Tests: Results of suitable control tests will be used as evidence that
concrete has attained sufficient strength to permit removal of supporting forms.
Cylinders required for control tests shall be provided in addition to those
otherwise required by the specifications. Test specimens shall be removed from
molds at end of 24 hours and stored near to the structure as possible at points of
sampling, shall receive insofar as practicable the same protection from the
elements during curing as given in those portions of the structure which they
represent, and shall not be removed form the structure for transmittal to the
laboratory prior to expiration of three-fourths of the proposed period before
removal of forms. Supporting forms or shoring shall not be removed until
control-test specimens have attained strength of at least 15.68 Mpa. The newly
unsupported portions of the structure shall not be subject to heavy construction or
material loading.
b. Tie-Rods to be entirely remove from the wall shall be loosened 24 hours after
concrete is placed, and form ties, except for a sufficient number to hold forms in
place, may be removed at that time. Ties wholly withdrawn from wall shall be
pulled toward the face that will be concealed from view in the permanent work.
103
405.9REINFORCEMENT
405.9.1REINFORCEMENT
Fabricated to shapes and dimensions shown and shall be placed where indicated.
Reinforcement shall be of loose or flaky rust and mill scale, or coating, and any other
substance that would reduce or destroy the bond. Reinforcing steel reduce in section shall not
be used. After any substantial delay in the work, previously placed reinforcing steel for
future binding shall be inspected and cleaned. Reinforcing steel shall not be bent or
straightened in a manner injurious to the steel or concrete. Bars with kinks or bends not
shown on the Drawing shall not be placed. The use of heat to bend or straighten reinforcing
steel shall not be permitted. Bars shall removed as necessary to avoid interference with other
reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items.
If bars are move more than one bar diameter, the resulting arrangement of bars including
additional bars necessary to meet structural requirement shall be approved before concrete is
places. In slabs, beams, and girders, reinforcing steel shall not be spliced at points of
maximum stress unless otherwise indicated. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawing, laps or
splices shall be 40 times the reinforcing bar diameter.
405.9.2The nominal dimensions and unit weights of bar designation shall be in accordance
with the following table:
Nominal Nominal Nominal Sectional Unit Weight

Diameter Perimeter (mm) Area (sq.mm) (Kg/m)
6 mm 18.8 28.27 0.222
10 mm 31.4 78.54 0.616
12 mm 37.7 113.10 0.888
16 mm 50.3 201.10 1.579
20 mm 62.8 314.2 2.466
25 mm 78.5 490.9 3.854
28 mm 88.0 615.7 4.833
32 mm 100.5 804.2 6.313
36 mm 113.1 1017.9 7.991
40 mm 125.7 1256.6 9.864
50 mm 157.1 1963.5 15.413
405.9.3 Wire-mesh reinforcement shall be continuous between crack control joints in

slabs on grade and shall be continuous between expansion joints in other slabs. Laps shall be
at least one full mesh plus 50 mm staggered to avoid continuous lap in either direction, and
securely wired or clipped with standard clips.
405.9.4 Dowels in slabs on grade shall be installed at right angles to construction

joints and expansion joints. Dowels shall be accurately aligned parallel to the finished
surface, and shall be rigidly held in place and supported during placing of the concrete. One
end of dowels shall be oiled or greased.
104
405.9.5 Tie bard on grade shall be placed at right angles to construction joints. Tie
bars shall be accurately aligned parallel to the finished surface, and shall be rigidly held in
place and supported during placing of the concrete.
405.9.6 Supports shall be provided in conformance with ACI 315 and ACI 318 unless
otherwise indicated or specified. Wire ties, when used, shall be a 16-gauge black annealed
wire and shall have end pointing away from the form.
a. For slabs on grade: Reinforcement shall be supported on pre-cast structure units

spaced at intervals required by size of reinforcement used, to keep reinforcement
the minimum height specified or indicated above the underside of slab or footing.
b. For slabs other than on grade: Supports for which any portion will be less than 25
mm concrete surface that will be exposed to view or painted shall be plastic-
coated steel conforming to ACI 315, stainless steel, pre-cast concrete units, or
plastic. Pre-cast concrete units shall be wedge-shaped, not larger than 9 cm, and
of thickness equal to that indicated for concrete protection of reinforcement. The
pre-cast units shall have cast-in galvanized tie wire booked at top for anchorage
and shall blend with concrete surfaces after finishing is completed.
c. Concrete shall be of the same quality as for slabs, but with coarse aggregate
reduced. Plastic supports shall be of strength and spaced so as not to be deformed
weight to which it is subjected.
405.9.7 Welding of reinforcing bars shall only be permitted where shown; all welding
shown shall be performed in accordance with AWS D 12.1
405.9.8 Exposed reinforcement bars, dowels and plates lm13 intended for bonding
with future extensions shall be protected from corrosion.
405.9.9Concrete Protection for Reinforcement
a. The minimum concrete cover of reinforcement shall be as indicated on the

Drawings and as shown in the table below.
b. Tolerance for Concrete Cover of Reinforcing Steel other than Tendons.
Minimum Cover Maximum Variation

7.5 cm. Or more 9 mm
less than 7.5 cm. 6 mm
405.10 PROPORTIONS OF CONCRETE MIXES
405.10.1 Trial design batches and testing to meet requirements of the classes of
concrete specified shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The design mix shall be of
consistencies specified hereafter in Test for Slump, unit weight, and air content shall be
performed in the field under the presence of the Engineer.
105
405.10.2 Entrained-Air Content: Air-entrainment shall be produced by adding an air-
entraining agent at the mixer. Air Content in concrete by volume shall be maintained at 5 to
7 percent, as determined by ASTM C 231.
405.10.3 Concrete Proportioning: Samples of approved aggregate shall be obtained in

accordance with the requirements of ASTM D 75. Samples of materials other than aggregate
shall be representative of those proposed for the project and shall be accompanied by the
manufacturer’s test reports indicating compliance with applicable specified requirements.
Trial mixes having proportions, consistencies and air content suitable for the work shall be
made based on ACI Standard 211.1 using at least three different water-cement ratios which
will produce a range of strength encompassing those required for the work. Trial mix shall
be designed for maximum permitted slump and air content. The temperature of concrete in
each trial batch shall be reported. For each water-cement ratio at least three test cylinders for
each test age shall be made and cured in accordance with ASTM C 39. From these test
results, a curve shall be plotted showing the relationship water-cement ratio and strength.
405.10.4 Average Strength: For each portion of the structure, proportions shall be
selected so that the maximum permitted water-cement ration is no exceeded and so as to
produce an average strength to exceed the specified strength fc’ by the amount indicated
below. Where production facility has a standard deviation record determined in accordance
with ACI 214, based on 30 consecutive strength tests of similar mixture proportions as
proposed it shall be used in selecting average strength.
The average strength used as the basis for selecting proportions shall exceed the specified
strength fc’ by at least:
1. 30 kg/sq. cm. If standard deviation is less than 20 kg/sq. cm.
2. 40 kg/sq. cm. If standard deviation is 20 to 30 kg/sq. cm.
5. If the standard deviation exceed 50 kg. Sq. cm. Or if a standard deviation record is
not available, proportions shall be selected to produce an average strength of at
least 70 kg/sq. cm. Greater than the specified strength.
405.10.5 Corrective additions to remedy deficiencies in aggregate gradation shall be

used only on written approval of the Engineer.
405.4.17,6 Slump: Tests shall be made in conformance with ASTM C 143, and unless
otherwise specified by the Engineer slump shall be within the following limits:
Structural Element Slump for Vibrated

Concrete
Minimum Maximum
Pre-cast Concrete 5 cm 7 cm
Wall, column and grade 5 cm 7 cm
beam, 25cm maximum
thickness
106
All other concrete 5 cm 10 cm
Lean Concrete 10 cm 20 cm
405.11 BATCHING AND MIXING
405.11.1 The Contractor shall provide a semi-automatic or better batching plant and concrete
mixing equipment having a sufficient capacity to satisfy concrete placement
requirements.
405.11.2 B ATCHING PLANT
1. Arrangement: Separate bins or compartment shall provided for each size or classification
of aggregate and for bulk Portland cement. The compartments shall be of ample size and
so constructed that the materials will be maintained separately so that the flow of each
material into its batcher is stopped automatically when the designated weight has been
reached.
2. Aggregates may be weighed in separate weigh batches with individual scales, or

cumulatively on one weigh batcher with one scale. Bulk cement shall be weighed on a
separate scale in a separate weigh batcher. Water may be measured by weight or by
volume. If measured by weight, it shall not be weighed cumulatively with another
ingredient. Batching controls shall be so interlocked that the charging mechanism cannot
be opened until the scales have returned to zero. These requirements can be satisfied
when actuated by one or more starting mechanism.
A semi-automatic batcher control shall start the weighing operation of each material and stop
automatically when the designated weight of each material has been reached and interlocked
in such a manner that the discharge device cannot be actuated until the indicated material is
within the applicable to tolerance. The plant shall be arranged so as to facilitate the
inspection of all operations at all times. Suitable facilities shall be provided for obtaining
representative samples of aggregate from each of the bin of compartments for test purposes.
Delivery of materials from the batching equipment shall be within the following limits of
accuracy.
Materials Percent
Cement 1
Water 1
Aggregate 2
Admixtures 3
3. Water Bather and dispenser for Admixtures: Equipment for batching water and
admixtures shall be provided at the batching plant or included with the paving mixer or
truck mixers as required for the type of plant used.
a. Water Batchers: A suitable water measuring device shall be provided which will be
capable of measuring the mixing water within the specified requirements for each
batch. The mechanism for delivering water to the mixers shall be such that leakage
will not occur when the values are closed.
The filling and discharge valves for the water batcher shall be so interlocked that the
discharge valve cannot be opened before the filling valve is fully closed.
107
b. Dispensers: An accurate mechanical device for measuring and dispensing each
admixture shall be provided. Each device shall be capable of ready adjustment to
permit varying of the quantity of admixture to be batched. Each dispenser shall be
interlocked with the batching and discharging operations of the water so that each
admixture is separately batched and discharge automatically in a manner to obtain
uniform distribution throughout the batch in the specified mixing period. When use
of truck mixers makes this requirement impracticable, the admixture dispenser shall
be interlocked with the sand batcher. Admixtures will not be combined prior to
introduction into water or sand.
3. Moisture Control: The plant shall be capable ready adjustment to compensate for the
varying moisture contents of the aggregate, and to change the weights of the materials
being batched. An electric moisture meter shall be provided for measurement of moisture
content in the fine aggregate. The sensing element shall be arranged so that the
measurement is made near the batcher charging gate of the sand bin or in the sand
batcher.
4. Scales: Adequate facilities shall be provided for the accurate measurement and
control of each of the material entering each batch of concrete. The weighing equipment
shall conform to the applicable requirements of National Bureau of Standard Handbook
44 or other international standard for scale except that the accuracy shall be within 0.2
percent of scale capacity. The Contractor shall provide standard test weights and any
other auxiliary equipment required for checking the operating performance of each scale
or other measuring device. Each weighing unit shall include visible springless dial which
shall indicate the scale load at all stages of the weighing operation, or shall include a
beam scale with a beam balance indicator which will show the scale in balance at zero
load and at any beam setting. The indicator shall have an over and under travel equal to
at least 5 percent of the capacity of the beam. The weighing equipment shall be arranged
so that the plant operator can conveniently observed all dials or indicators.
6. Recorders:
a. An accurate recorder or recorders shall produce a graphical or digital record of the scale
reading after each of the aggregates and cementing materials have been batched prior to
delivery to the mixer and after the batchers have been discharged ( return to zero
reference ). The weights or volume of water and admixtures shall also be recorded if
batched at a central batching plant.
b. The recorder shall be housed in a cabinet which shall be capable of being locked.
c. The charts or tapes shall clearly indicate the different types of mixes used by stamped
letters, numerals, colored ink or by other suitable means.
d. The charts or tapes shall be so marked that variations in batch weights of each type of mix
can be readily observed.
e. The charts of tapes shall show time of day ( stamped or pre-printed ) at intervals of not
more than 15 minutes
f. The recorded charts or tapes shall become the property of the PMO.
g. The recorders shall be placed in a position. Convenient for observation by the plant
operator and the PMO.
108
h. All weighing, indicating, recording and control equipment shall be sufficiently protected
against exposures to dust, moisture and vibration so that there is no interference with
proper operation of the equipment.
i. The recorded weights or volumes when compared to the weights or volumes actually
batched shall be within the following limits of accuracy.
Materials Percent
Cement 2
Water 2
Aggregate 4
Admixtures 6
405.11.3 CONCRETE MIXERS
Stationary mixers, truck mixers, or paving mixers of approved design. The mixers shall have
a rated capacity of at least 0.76 cu. m. of mixed concrete, and shall not be charged in excess
of the capacity recommended by the manufacturer. Mixers shall be capable of combining the
material into a uniform mixture and of discharging this mixture without segregation.
Stationary and paving mixers if used shall be provided with an acceptable device to lock the
discharge mechanism until the required mixing time has elapsed. The mixing plant shall
include device for automatically counting the total number of batches of concrete mixed. The
mixers shall be operated at the drum or mixing blade speed designated by the manufacturer
on the name plate. The mixing period specified herein are predicated on proper control of the
speed of rotation of the mixer drum or blades, and on proper introduction of the materials into
the mixer. The acceptability of truck mixers will be determined by uniformity tests as
required by ASTM C 94, the mixing time for stationary or paving mixers will be increased
when such increase is necessary to secure the required uniformity and consistency of the
concrete. Excessive over-mixing requiring additions of water will not be permitted. The
mixers and mixer drums shall be maintained unsatisfactory operating condition and mixer
shall be kept free of hardened concrete. Mixer blades shall be replaced when worn more than
10 percent of their dept. Should any mixer at any time produce unsatisfactory results, its use
shall be promptly discontinued until it is repaired.
1. Stationary Mixers: The mixing time for each batch after all solid materials are in the
mixer, provided that all of the mixing water is introduced before one-fourth of the mixing
time has elapsed, shall be one minute for mixers having a capacity of 0.76 cu. m. and for
mixers of larger capacities the mixing time shall be increased by 15 second for each
additional 0.76 cu. m. or fraction thereof concrete mixed. When stationary mixer is used
for partial mixing of the concrete (shrink mixed) the mixing time in the stationary mixer
may be reduced to the minimum necessary to item the ingredients (about 30 seconds).
2. Truck Mixers: Conform to the requirements of ASTM C94 including requirements or

uniformity of concrete. When a truck mixer is used either for complete mixing (transit
mixed) or to finish the partial mixing done in a stationary mixer, in absence of uniformity
test data, each batch of concrete shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100
revolutions of the drum at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of the
equipment as mixing speed and at the capacity designated in ASTM C94. If the batch is
at least 0.38 cu. m. less than the rated capacity, in the absence of uniformity test data, the
number of revolutions at mixing speed may be reduced to not less than 50. Any
additional mixing shall be done at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the
109
equipment at agitating speed. Each truck shall be equipped with two counters from which
it shall be possible to determine the number of revolutions at mixing speed and the
number of revolutions at agitating speed.
3. Vehicles used in transporting materials from the batching plant to the mixers shall have
bodies or compartments of adequate capacity to carry the materials and to deliver each
batch, separate and intact to the mixer. Bulk cement shall be transported from the
batching plant to the mixers in separate closed boxes or compartments, or shall be
transported, mixed with the aggregates or placed between layers of aggregates in batch
trucks having windproof and rain-proof covers as weather conditions require. Concrete
containing batched cement and aggregates shall be placed within the time specified in
paragraph: Time interval between mixing and placing under paragraph PLACING
CONCRETE. Serially numbered tickets shall be provided for each delivery of batched
cement and aggregates and before discharging any batch in mixer. Tickets shall be
stamped by time clock to show date and time the loading of each truck was completed.
One ticket shall be given to the Engineer before discharging any batch into the mixer.
3. Paving Mixers used at the site of the work: For paving use, paving mixers shall be
equipped with boom and bottom-drum bucket to handle the concrete from the mixer to
the form. The bucket shall be of adequate size to handle the complete batch of concrete
mixed, and the boom shall be of sufficient length to permit discharge of the concrete into
its final position in the form. Paving mixers may be either single compartment drum or
multiple compartment drum type.
A sled or box of suitable size shall be attached to the mixer under the bucket so as to
catch any spillage of concrete that may occur when the mixer if discharging into the
bucket. For use other than paving, the boom is not required; the mixer may discharge
directly into the bucket to be used for final placement. Multiple compartment drum
paving mixers shall be properly synchronized, and the mixing time shall be determined by
including the time required to transfer the concrete between compartment of the drum.
If no uniformity test data are available, the mixing time for each; batch, after all solid
materials are in the mixer drum, provided that all the mixing water is introduced before
one-fourth of the mixing time has elapsed, shall be 1 minute for mixers having a capacity
of 0.76 cu. m. and for mixers of larger capacities, the minimum mixing times shall be
increased 15 seconds for each additional 0.76 cu. m. or fraction thereof of concrete
mixed.
5. Sampling: Provide suitable facilities and labor for obtaining representative samples
of concrete for the Contractor’s quality control and the Employer’s quality assurance
testing. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary platform, tools, and equipment for
obtaining samples.
405.12 JOINTS
405.12.1 No reinforcement, corner protection angles or other fixed metal items shall be
run continuous through joints containing expansion-joint filler, through crack-control
joints in slabs on grade and vertical surfaces.
405.12.2 Pre-molded Expansion Joint Filler
110
1. Joints with Joint Sealant: At expansion joints in concrete slabs to be exposed, and at the
other joints indicated to receive joint sealant, pre-molded expansion-joint filler strips shall
be installed at the proper level below the elevation with a slightly tapered, dressed-and-
oiled wood strip temporarily secured to the top thereof to form a groove, when surface
dry, shall be cleaned of foreign matter, loose particles, and concrete protrusions, then
filled approximately flush with joint sealant so as to be slightly concave after dying.
2. Finish of concrete at joints: Edges of exposed concrete slabs along expansion joints shall
be nearly finished with a slightly rounded edging tool.
405.12.3 Construction Joints: Unless otherwise specified herein, all construction joints
shall be subjected to approval of the Engineer. Concrete shall be placed continuously so that
the unit will be monolithic in construction. Fresh concrete may be placed against adjoining
units, provided the set concrete is sufficiently hard not to be injured thereby. Joints not
indicated shall be made and located in a manner not to impair strength and appearance of the
structure. Placement of concrete shall be at such rate that surfaces of concrete no carried to
joint levels will not have attained initial set before additional concrete is placed thereon. Lifts
shall terminate at such levels as are indicated or as to conform structural requirements as
directed. If horizontal construction joints are required, a strip of 25 mm square-edge lumber,
beveled to facilitate removal shall be tacked to the inside of the forms at the construction
joint. Concrete shall be placed to a point 25 mm above the underside of the strip. The strip
shall be removed 1 hour after the concrete has been placed, any irregularities in the joint line
shall be leveled off with a wood float, and all laitance removed. Prior to placing and
additional concrete, horizontal construction joints shall be prepared as specified in
“BONDING”.
405.12.4 Crack-control joints in slabs on grade are specified in paragraph. SLAB ON

GRADE.
405.12.5 Water stops shall be installed so as to form a continuous water-tight

diaphragm. Adequate provision shall be made to support and completely protect the water
stops during the progress of the work. Joints and splices shall made as follows:
Copper shall be soldered or blazed. When stainless steel is used, splicers, shall be lapped and
welded, and brazing shall be in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
405.13 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORAGE ITEMS
405.13.1 Slots: Adequate inserts shall be provided for anchoring members at openings.
Slotsand dowels shall be provided for anchoring ends and tops of masonry partitions abutting
concrete.
405.13.2 Inserts for hangers for piping and mechanical fixtures and their installation shall be
as specified under “PLUMBING”.
405.14 PREPARATION FOR PLACING
Hardened concrete, debris and foreign materials shall removed from interior of forms and
from inner surface of mixing and conveying equipment. Reinforcement shall be secured in
111
position, and shall be inspected, and approved before placing concrete. Runways shall be
provided for wheeled concrete-handling equipment; such equipment shall not be supported
on reinforcement.
405.15 PLACING CONCRETE
405.15.1 Concrete shall be handled from mixer to transport to place of final deposit in a
continuous manner, as rapidly as practicable and without segregation of loss of ingredient
until the approved unit of work is completed. Placing will not be permitted when the sun,
heat wind or limitations of facilities furnished by the Contractor prevent proper finishing and
curing of the concrete. Concrete shall be placed in the forms, as close as possible in final
position, in uniform approximately horizontal layers not over 400 mm deep. Forms splashed
with concrete and reinforcement splashed with concrete of form coating shall be cleaned in
advance of placing of subsequent lifts. Concrete shall not be allowed to drop freely more
than 1.5 m. in unexposed work nor more than 1.0 m in exposed work; where greater drops are
required, tremie or other approved means shall be employed. The discharge of the tremies
shall be controlled so that the concrete may be effectively compacted into horizontal layers
no more than 400 mm thick, and the spacing of the tremies shall be such that segregation
does not occur. Concrete to receive other construction shall be screeded to the proper level to
avoid excessive shimming or grouting. Conduits and pipes shall not be embedded in concrete
unless specifically indicated.
405.15.2 Time Interval between Mixing and Placing: Concrete mix in stationary mixers and
transported by non-agitating equipment shall be placed in the forms within 45 minutes from
the tie ingredients are charged into the mixing drum. Concrete transported in truck mixers or
truck agitators shall be delivered to the site of work discharge in the forms within 45 minutes
from the time that ingredients are discharge into the mixing drum. Concrete shall be placed
in the forms within 15 minutes after discharge from the mixer at the job site.
405.15.3 Hot Weather Requirements: Temperature of concrete during the period of mixing
transport and or placing shall not be permitted to rise above 16 degree celsius. Any batch of
concrete which had reached a temperature greater that 35 degree celcius any time in the
aforesaid period shall not be placed but shall be rejected, and shall not thereafter be used in
any part of the permanent works.
1. Control Procedures: Provide water cooler facilities and procedures to control or reduce
the temperature of cement, aggregates and mixing handling equipment to such temperature
that, at all times during mixing, transporting, handling and placing, the temperature of the
concrete shall not be greater than 36 degree celsius.
2. Cold Joints and Shrinkage: Where cold joints tend to form or where surfaces
and dry too rapidly or plastic shrinkage cracks ten to appear, concrete shall be kept moist by
fog sprays and other approved means, applied shortly after placement, and before finishing.
3. Supplementary Precautions: When the aforementioned precautions are not sufficient to

satisfy the requirements herein above, they shall be supplemented by restricting work to
evening or night. Procedure shall conform to American Concrete Institute Standard ACI 305.
405.15.4 Earth-foundation placement: Concrete footings, exterior slabs and exterior

foundations receiving equipment to machinery shall be placed upon undisturbed surfaces
112
conforming to Section EXCAVATION FILLING, AND BACKFILLING. The surfaces shall
be clean free from mud and water. Waterproof paper, polythylene sheeting of nominal
0.4mm minimum thickness shall be laid over dry or impervious surfaces receiving concrete.
Such material is of a type specified for curing concrete except that the polythylene sheet may
be other than white. The concrete footings and exterior slabs and foundation may be placed
directly over impervious surfaces that are thoroughly moistened by not muddy at the time
concrete is placed.
405.15.5 Conveying Concrete by Chute, Conveyor or Pump: chute, conveyor, or pump may
convey Concrete if approved in writing. In requesting approval, the Conctractor shall submit
his entire plan of operation from time of discharge of concrete from the mixer to final
placement in the forms, and the steps to be taken to prevent the formation of cold joints, in
case the transporting of concrete by chute, conveyors and pump shall be capable of
expeditiously placing concrete at the rate most advantageous to good workmanship.
Approval will not be given for chutes of conveyors requiring changes in the concrete
materials or design mix for efficient operation.
1. Chutes and Conveyors: Chutes shall be of steel or steel lined wood, round in cross
section rigid in construction, and protected from overflow. Conveyors shall be designed
and operated and chute sections shall be set to assure a uniform flow of concrete from
mixer to final place of deposit without segregation or ingredients, loss of mortar, or
change of slump. The discharge portions of each chute or convey shall be provide with a
device to prevent segregation. The chute and conveyor shall be thoroughly cleaned
before and after each run. Waste material and flushing water shall be discharged outside
the forms.
2. When using tilted chutes, the inclination should not be flatter than (1) vertical and two (2)
horizontal. From the outlet/mouth of the chute to the concrete surface the maximum
allowable height shall be 1.50m.
3. Pumps shall be operated and maintained so that a continuous stream of concrete is

delivered into the forms without air pocket. segregation or change in slump. When
pumping is completed concrete remaining in the pipeline shall be ejected, and wasted
without contamination of concrete already placed. After each operation, equipment shall
be thoroughly cleaned and the flushing water shall be splashed outside the forms.
405.5.16 Placing concrete through reinforcement: Where congestion of the steel or

other conditions will make placing or compactions of concrete difficult, a layer of mortar
shall be first deposited in forms to a depth of approximately 25 cm.
Mortar proportions shall be the same as the concrete minus the coarse aggregate.
405.16 COMPACTION
405.16.1 Immediately after placing, each layer of concrete vibrator supplemented by hand
spading, rodding, and tamping. Tappings or other external vibration of forms will not be
permitted unless specifically approved by the Engineer. Vibrators shall not be used to
transport concrete inside forms. Internal vibrators submerged in concrete shall maintain
113
speed of not less than 7,000 impulses per minute. The vibrating equipment shall be at all
times being adequate in number of units and power to properly consolidate all concrete.
405.16.2 Spare units shall be on hand as necessary to ensure such adequacy. Duration of
vibrating equipment shall be limited to time necessary to produce satisfactory consolidation
without causing objectionable segregation. The vibrator shall not be inserted into lower
coursed that have begun to set.
Vibrators shall be applied at uniformly spaced points not further apart than the visible
effectiveness of the machine.
405.17 BONDING
Before depositing new concrete on or against concrete that has set, the surfaces of the set
concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned so as to expose the coarse aggregate and be free of
laitance, coatings, foreign matter and loose particles. Forms shall be re-tightened. The
cleaned surfaces shall be moistened, but shall be without free water when concrete is placed.
405.18 SLABS ON GRADE
405. Capillary water barrier or sub-grade shall conform. Section EXCAVATION AND
BACKFILLING FOR BUILDINGS.
405.18.2 Vapor Barrier: Immediately prior to placing concrete, the capillary water
barrier or sub-grade under slabs within the building shall be covered with a vapor barrier.
Punctures and tears shall be patched. Edges shall be lapped not less than 100 mm and end
joints shall be lapped not less than 150 mm. Edges and lapped joints shall be sealed with a
pressure sensitive tape, not less than 50 mm wide, compatible with the membrane.
405.18.3 Concrete shall be compacted, screeded to grade, and prepared for the specified
finish. Concrete shall be placed continuously so that each unit of operation will be
monolithic in construction. Concrete shall be placed in alternate check-board pattern
termination at crack-control joints and with construction joints or may be placed in
alternative paving lanes as limited by expansion and contraction joints and with construction
joints or provide panels of size specified. Crack-control joints shall be expansion,
contraction, or construction joints. Joints not shown shall be located at column centerlines
and at intermediate intervals so that such panel shall not be more than 55 square meter in
area. Panels shall be approximately square with dimension of one side not more than 7.5
meter. Forms shall remain in place for at least 12 hours after concrete placement.
405.18.4 Construction joints may be formed by the insertion of hard-pressed fiberboard

strips inserted in the plastic concrete or may be cut with an approved concrete-sawing
matching after the concrete has set. Unless otherwise indicated or directed, the joints shall be
3 mm wide and depth equal to approximately `1/4 of the slab thickness or of the maximum
size of the coarse aggregated whichever is greater.
a. Fiberboard joints: Fiberboard strips shall be of the required dimensions and as long as
practicable. After the first floating, the concrete shall be grooved with a total at the
desired joint locations to a depth approximately equal to the width of the strip. The strip
114
shall be inserted in the groove, using a U-shape device of sheet metal fitted over the top
of the strip to maintain true alignment until the top edge of the strip is flush with the
surface of the slab.
b. When the concrete has set sufficiently to retain the strip, the sheet metal device shall be
withdrawn. The slab shall be floated and finished as specified, using an edging tool on
each side of the inserted joint strip where slabs will be left exposed to view.
405.18.5 Sealing: Concrete joints, where sawed or formed, 13 m. shall be filled with
joint sealant except where floor covering is required.
405.19 SETTING OF BASE PLATES
405.19.1 Preparation: After being plumbed and properly positioned, base plates shall
be provided with full bearing with damp-pack bedding mortar, except where expansive grout
is indicated. The space between the top of concrete or masonry bearing surfaces and the
bottom of the plate shall be approximately 1/24 of the width of the plate, but not less than 13
mm for plates less than 30 cm wide. Concrete surfaces shall be rough clean free of oil,
grease, and laitance, and shall be damp. Metal surfaces shall be clean and free of oil, grease
and rust.
405.19.2 Mortar: Damp-pack bedding mortar shall consist of one part Portland cement
and 2.5 parts of fine aggregates, suitable to the work required, proportioned by weight and
not more than 17 liters of water per bag of cement. The space between the top of the plate
shall be packed with the bedding mortar by tamping or ramming with a bar or rod until the
voids are completely filled.
405.19.3 Expansive Grout: Grout shall derive its expansive proper ties from the
liberation of gas into the mixture during and after mixing. Thi9s includes typically, and
chemical reaction of metallic aluminum with alkali hydroxides in solution which causes the
evolution of hydrogen gas. Expansion of such materials may be expected to continue after
the gas liberating mechanism has been exhausted or until the mixture ahs solidified to such an
extent that the tendency for the evolving gas to expand is effectively registered by the
stiffness of the grout.
a. When tested as provided for herein, and expansive grout shall meet the following
performance requirements:
Expansion, 28 days, % max…………..0.40
min…………. 0.03
b. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to supply the necessary manufacturer’s

certificates.
405.20 FINISHES OF CONCRETE
405.20.1 Within 12 hours after forms are removed, surface defects shall be remedied as
specified herein. Temperature of the concrete, ambient air and mortar during remedial work
including curing shall be above 10 deg, celsius. Fine and loose material shall be removed.
Honeycomb, aggregate pockets, voids over 13 mm in diameter, and holes left by the rods or
115
bolts shall be cut out to solid concrete, reamed, thoroughly wetted brush-coated with neat
cement grout, and filled with mortar. Mortar shall be a stiff mix of 1 part portland cement to
not more than 2 parts fine aggregate passing the No. 16 mesh sieve, and minimum amount of
water. The color of the mortar shall be match the adjoining concrete color. Mortar shall be
thoroughly compacted in place. Holes passing entirely through walls shall be completely
filled from the inside face by forcing mortar through to the outside face. Holes which do not
pass entirely through wall shall be packed full. Patchwork shall be finished flush and in the
same plane adjacent surfaces. Exposed patchwork shall be finish to match adjoining surfaces
in texture and color. Patchwork shall be damp cured for 72 hours. Ambient temperature
shall be not less than 10 deg. Celsius. Dusting of finish surfaces with dry material or adding
water to concrete surfaces will not be permitted.
405.21 CONCRETE FINISHES FOR SLABS
405.21.1 Slabs Receiving Concrete Paving: After concrete is placed and consolidated
slab shall be screeded or struck off. No further finish is required.
405.21.2 Smooth Finish: Required only where specified; screed concrete and float to
required level with no coarse aggregate visible. After surface moisture has disappeared and
laitance has been remove, the surface shall be finished by float and steel trowel.
405.21.3 Broom Finish: Required for paving, stairs and landing; the concrete shall be
screeded and floated to required finish level with no coarse aggregate visible. After the
surface shall be float finished to an even, smooth finish. The floated surfaces shall be
broomed with a fiber bristle brush in a direction transverse to the direction of the main traffic.
405.21.4 Tolerance: Smooth and broom finished surfaces shall be true to plane with no
deviation in excess of 3 mm in any direction when tested with a 3 m straight edge.
405.22 FINISHES OF CONCRETE OTHER THAN FLOOR SLABS
405.22.1 Within 12 hours after forms are removed, surface defects shall be remedied as
specified herein. Honeycomb, aggregate, pockets, voids over 12 mm in diameter, and holes
left by the rods or bolts shall be cut out to solid concrete, reamed, thoroughly wetted, brush-
coated with neat cement grout, and filled with mortar. Mortar shall be a stiff mix of 1 part
Portland cement to not more than 2 parts fine aggregate passing the No. 16 mesh sieve, and
minimum amount of water using white Portland cement for all or part of the cement so that
when dry, the color of the mortar shall match the adjoining concrete color. Mortar shall be
thoroughly compacted in place. Holes passing entirely through walls shall be completely
filled from the inside face by forcing mortar through to the outside face. Holes that do not
pass entirely through the wall shall be packed full. Patch-work shall be damp-cured for 72
hours. Protruding portions of bar supports shall be ground flush with concrete surfaces that
will be exposed, painted, or plastered directly.
405.22.2 Smooth Finish: After the above operations have been completed, smooth
finish shall be given to interior and exterior concrete surfaces that are to be painted or
exposed to view. Smooth finish shall consist of thoroughly wetting and then brush-coating
the surfaces with cement grout composed by volume of 1 part Portland cement to not more
than 2 parts fine aggregate passing the No. 30 mesh sieve and mixed with water to the
consistency of thick paint. White Portland cement shall be used for all or part of the cement,
116
proportioned by the trial mixes, so that the final color of grout when dry, will be
approximately the same as the color of the surrounding concrete. Grout shall be cork or
wood-floated to fill all pits and air bubbles; and surfaces rubbed with burlap to remove any
visible grout film. The grout shall be kept damp by means of fog spray during the setting
period. The finish of any area shall be completed in the same day and the limits of a finished
area shall be made at natural breaks in the finished surfaces.
405.22.3 Rough Slab Finish: Slab to receive fill and setting beds shall be screeded
with straight-edges to bring the surface to the required finish plane with no aggregates
visible.
405.22.4 Broom finish shall be given to a exterior surfaces except concrete stair treads,
entrances, and landings for buildings. The concrete shall be screeded and floated to the
required finish level with no coarse aggregate visible. After the surface moisture has
disappeared and laitance has been remove, surfaces shall be steel-troweled to an even,
smooth finish. The troweled surfaces shall be broomed with a fiber-bristle brush in a
direction transverse to that of the main traffic.
405.23 CURING
405.23.1 Concrete shall be protected against moisture rapid temperature change,

mechanical injury from rain of flowing water, for a minimum period of time given below:
Type I Cement 7 days
405.22.2 Concrete shall be maintained in a moist condition at temperature above 10

degree Celsius throughout the specified curing period and until remedial work is started
under paragraph FINISHES OF CONCRETE. Curing activities shall be started as soon as
free water has disappeared from the surface of the concrete after placing and finishing.
Formed under surface shall moist cure with forms in place for the full curing period, by other
approve means. Curing shall be accomplished by any of the following methods or
combination thereof, as approved.
405.23.3 Moist Curing: Unformed surfaces shall be covered with burlap or mats,
wetted before placing and overlapped at least 150 mm. Burlap or mats shall be kept
continually wet and in intimate contact with the surface. Where formed shall be kept
continually wet. If the forms are removed before the end of the curing period, curing shall be
continued on unformed surfaces, using suitable materials.
405.23.4 Impervious sheet Curing: All surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted with a fine
spray of water and be completely covered with waterproof paper, polythylene sheeting or
with polythylene coated burlap having the burlap thoroughly water saturated before placing.
Covering shall be laid with light-colored side up. Covering shall be lapped not less than 300
mm and securely weighted down or shall be lapped not less than 100 mm and taped to form a
continuous cover with completely closed joints. Sheets shall be weighted to prevent
displacement or billowing from winds. Covering shall be folded down over exposed edges of
slabs and secured by approved means. Sheets shall be immediately repaired or replaced if
tears or holes appear during the curing period.
117
405.23.5 Membrane-forming Curing Compound: Before applying curing compound,
tops of joints that are to receive sealant shall be tightly closed with temporary material to
prevent entry of the compound and to prevent moisture loss during the curing period. The
compound shall be applied on damp surfaces as soon as the moisture film has disappeared.
The curing compound shall be applied by power spraying using a spray nozzle equipped with
a wind guard. The compound shall be applied in a two-coat, continuous operation at a
coverage of not more than 10 sq. m. per liter for each coat. When application is made by
hand sprayers the second coat shall be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to
the direction of the first coat, the compound shall form a uniform, continuous, adherent film
that shall not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections.
Surfaces subjected to rain fall within 3 hours after compound has been applied, or surface
damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period, shall be
immediately re-sprayed at the rate specified above. Membrane forming curing compound
shall not be used on surface that depends on adhesion of bonding to the concrete. Membrane
forming curing compound shall not used on surfaces that are maintained at curing
temperature with free steam. Where membrane-forming curing compounds are permitted,
permanently exposed surfaces shall be cured by use of a non-pigmented membrane-forming
curing compound containing a fugitive dye. Where non-pigmented type curing compounds
are used, the concrete surface shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun for the curing
period. Surfaces coated with curing compound shall be kept free of foot and vehicular traffic,
and from other courses of abrasion and contamination during the curing period.
405.24 SETTING BEDS
Required over slabs for floor finished other than concrete are covered under other sections of
these specifications in which the floor finish is specified.
The quality of structural concrete to be paid for will be the final quantity placed and accepted
in the completed structure. No deduction will be made for the volume occupied by pipe less
than 100 mm (4 inches) in diameter or by reinforcing steel, anchors, conduits, weep holes, or
expansion joint materials.
The accepted quantities, measured as prescribed in Section 405.25, shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for each of the pay items listed below, that is included in the Bill of
Quantities. Payment shall constitute full compensation for furnishing, placing and finishing
concrete including all labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work
prescribed in this item.
Payment will be under:

Item No. Description Unit of
Measurement
405 (1) Concrete Class A-A Cu. m.
405 (2) Concrete Class A Cu. m.
405 (3) Concrete Class B Cu. m.
405 (4) Concrete Class C Cu. m.
405 (5) Seal Concrete Cu. m.
118
D. ASPHALT OVERLAY OF RUNWAY (4” THICK)
AND RUNWAY SHOULDER GRADE CORRECTION
ITEM 302 BITUMINOUS TACK COAT
302.1 DESCRIPTION
This item shall consist of preparing an existing bituminous or cement concrete surface
with bituminous material in accordance with the Plans and specifications, preparatory
to the construction of a bituminous surface course.
Bituminous Material shall be either Rapid Curing (RC) Cutback Emulsified Asphalt;
whichever is called foe in the Bill of Quantities. It shall conform to the requirements
of Item 702, Bituminous Materials.
302.3 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
302.3.1 Surface Condition

Tack coat shall be applied only to surfaces, which are dry or slightly moist. No
tack coat shall be applied when the weather is foggy or rainy.
302.3.2 Equipment
Equipment shall conform in all respects to Sub-section 301.3.2.
302.3.3 Application of Bituminous Material

Immediately before applying tack coat, the full width of the surface to be
treated shall be cleaned of loose and foreign materials by means of power
broom or power blower, supplemented as necessary by hand sweeping.
Where required by the Engineer, immediately prior to the application of the
tack coat, the surface shall be lightly sprayed with water but not saturated.
Bituminous Materials shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor at the
temperature given in Item 702, Bituminous Materials, of the particular
material being used. The rate of application of either the rapid curing or Cut-
back or the Emulsified Asphalt shall be within the range of 0.2 to 0.7
liters/square meter, the exact rate as determined by the Engineer.
Care shall be taken that the application of bituminous material is not in excess
of the specified amount; any excess shall be blotted by sand or removed as
directed by the Engineer. All areas inaccessible to the distributor shall be
treated manually using the device for hand spraying. The surfaces of
structures and trees adjacent to the areas being treated shall be protected in
such a manner as to prevent their being spattered or marred.
119
Traffic shall be kept off the tack coat at all times. The tack coat shall be
sprayed only so far in advance on the surface course as will permit it to dry to
a “tacky” condition. The Contractor shall maintain the tack coat until the next
course has been applied. Any area that has become fouled by traffic or
otherwise, shall be cleaned and re-sprayed at the Contractor’s expense before
the next course is applied.
The quantity of bituminous tack coat shall be measured by ton (t), calculated from the
actual rate of application approved by the Engineer.
The quantity of bituminous tack coat shall be the weight of the asphaltic material
applied, calculated from the rate of application specified and they are required to be
covered.
The quantity of bituminous tack coat measured as stated above, shall be paid for at the
unit contract price for the item shown in the Bill of Quantities which price shall be
full compensation for furnishing and placing all materials and for all labor,
equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 302.4 shall be paid for at the
contract unit price for Bituminous Tack Coat, which price and payment shall be full
compensation for furnishing and placing all materials including all labor, equipment, tools
and incidentals necessary to complete this Item.
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
302 Bituminous Tack Coat ton

302(1) RC-Cut-back Asphalt ton
302(2) Emulsified Asphalt ton
120
ITEM 310 BITUMINOUS CONCRETE SURFACE
COURSE, HOT-LAID
310.1 DESCRIPTION
This Item shall consist of constructing a bituminous concrete surface course

composed of aggregates, mineral filler, and bituminous material mixed in a central
plant, constructed and laid hot on the prepared base in accordance with this
Specification and in conformity with lines, grades, thickness and typical cross-section
shown on the Plans.

310.2.1 Composition of Mix
The several mineral aggregate for the bituminous concrete shall be so sized
and graded and shall be combined in such proportions that the resulting blend
will meet the composite grading requirement of Table 310-I or Item 703,
Aggregate and Table 310-A.
Table 310-I Grading Requirements of Aggregate and Composition of Mixture for

Bituminous Concrete
MIX CLASS CLASS A CLASS B CLASS C

WEARING, WEARING,
MIX USE WEARING
BINDER BINDER
MINIMUM COMPACTED
50 MM 35 MM 25 MM
THICKNESS
US STANDARD SIEVE PERCENTAGE PASSING BY WEIGHT

mm inches A B C
25.00 1 100
19.00 ¾ 80-100 100
12.50 ½ - 80-100 100
9.50 3/8 60-80 70-90 80-100
4.75 No.04 48-65 50-70 55-75
2.36 No.08 35-50 35-50 35-50
0.60 N0.30 19-30 18-29 18-29
0.30 N0.50 13-23 13-23 13-23
0.15 N0.100 7-15 8-16 8-16
0.075 N0.200 1-8 4-10 4-10
121
Bituminous Material: Use either (a) or (b)
a. Asphalt Cement (60-70) or (85-100) Penetration Grade = 5-8% by weight

b. Emulsified Asphalt = 6-10% by weight of mix
PERCENT OF ASPHALT CEMENT OF TOTAL MIX BY WEIGHT
BINDER COURSE WEARING COURSE
MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM
4.0 5.5 5.0 7.0
310.2.2 Coarse Aggregate
The coarse aggregate shall be mechanically crushed stone, crushed gravel or

crushed boulders. Only one kind and type of material shall be used in any one
contact expect by written permission from the Engineer. Coarse aggregate
shall consist of clean, tough, durable angular fragments, free from an excess of
flat, elongated, soft or disintegrated particles, dirt, clay or soft coating or other
objectionable matter, and shall have a percentage of abrasion loss of not more
than 40 at 500 revolutions as determined by AASHTO Method T-96 (Los
Angeles Ratter Test) if produced from crushed gravel or crushed boulders, not
less than 60% by weight of the coarse aggregate particles, shall have at least
one fractured face.
Aggregate shall be of such nature that a thorough coating of the bituminous

material to be used in work, when applied to the aggregate shall not slough off
upon contact with water. Water preferential aggregate shall not be used unless
it can be shown by actual test or demonstration that the bituminous materials
the Contractor intends to use will satisfactorily coat the aggregate and will not
stripped under all moisture conditions. Anti-stripping material may be used
when authorized writing by the Engineer provided it can be shown that such
additives do not adversely affect the bituminous material and are successful in
overcoming the water-preferential characteristics of the aggregates. No extra
payment shall be made to the Contractor for the use of any such anti-stripping
additive.
310.2.3 Fine Material Aggregate
The fine aggregate shall consist of sandstone screening or a blend of sand and
stone screening composed of clean, tough, rough-surfaced, and angular grains.
The materials after drying shall be free from lumps or balls of clay or of clay
and sand of coating of clay or silt. The portion of the mixed aggregates used in
the bituminous mixture, which passes the No. 40 sieve, shall have a plasticity
index of not more than 6 as determined by AASHTO Method T-91. The
bituminous mixture shall have a swell of not more than 1.50% as determined
by method of AASHTO T-101.
122
310.2.4 Mineral Filler
The mineral filler shall consist of limestone dust, dolomite dust or other
equally suitable rock dust, Portland cement, or hydrated lime and shall be free
from foreign or other objectionable materials, conforming to the mixture
during the mixing operation in the amount of one-half to one (0.5 to 1.0 ) mass
percent, dry aggregate basis. The lower percentage limit applies to
predominantly calcareous aggregates.
Table 310-II Grading of Filler Material for Bituminous Concrete Surface Course, Plant
Mix
U.S. STANDARD STANDARD SIEVE % PASSING BY WEIGHT
mm Alternate, inches
0.60 No.30 100
0.30 No.50 95-100
0.075 No.200 70-100
310.2.5 Bituminous Material
The material shall be asphalt cement (60-70 or 85-100 penetration), or an

asphalt emulsion, conforming to the requirement for “Bituminous Material “,
Item 702.
Unless otherwise required by the special provisions, the contractor may elect
to furnish either of the above types of bituminous material except that only
one type shall be used on any project.
310.3 SOURCE OF SUPPLY
Approval of sources of supply of aggregates and mineral filler be obtained from the
Engineer prior to delivery of the materials. Samples of each material shall be
submitted as directed. The sample of the asphalt cement or emulsified asphalt that the
Contractor proposes to use in his work, together with statement as to its sources and
character, must be submitted and approved before construction begins. No asphalt
cement or emulsified asphalt other than the represented by the sample submitted shall
be used by the Contractor except with the written consent of the Engineer, and
provided that the asphalt cement or emulsified asphalt used shall comply in all respect
with requirement of these Specifications.
310.4 BITUMINOUS MIXTURE
The composite and bitumen prescribed in Table 310-I is extreme ranges of tolerance
that must not be exceeded regardless of any formula that may be submitted or set-up.
Before starting the work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval, a
proposal formula, in writing, for the mixture to be supplied for the project. The
formula so determined in accordance with the procedures set out in the Marshall
Method of Mix Design in the Asphalt Institute Manual, Mix Design Methods for
123
Asphalt Concrete and other Hot Mix Types, and submitted shall stipulate a single
definite percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve size, a single definite
percentage of bituminous material to be added to the aggregate, type of bituminous
material to be added, (all of which shall fall within the ranges of Table 310-I), and a
single definite temperature at which the material is to be delivered on the runway.
The Engineer shall then set the job mix. In setting the job mix, the Engineer may, at
his direction, use the submitted in whole or in part. Requirements for Marshall Test of
mixture are given in Table 310-III. No mass production of asphalt mixture shall be
allowed unless the Engineer approves job-mix formula and mix trials are acceptable.
In addition, or in lieu of the requirements in Table 310-II, the mixture shall have a
minimum dry compressive strength of 1.40 Mpa (200psi). The mixture shall also have
an index of retained strength of not less than 70 when tested by AASHTO T 165. For
aggregates having maximum sizes over 25 mm, T 165 specimens will be modified to
use 150mm x 150mm (6 x 6 inches) cylinder specimens. The 150mm cylinders shall
be compacted in accordance to AASHTO T167.
PROPERTY BINDER COURSE WEARING COURSE
Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum

Stability, lbf 1800 - 1800 -
Flow, 0.01 in. 8 16 8 16
Air Voids, % 3 8 3 6
Agg. Voids Filled w/
60 75 70 80
Asphalt Cement, %
Field Compacted Density 97 - 97 -
Marshall Specimen
Density
310.5 APPLICATION OF JOB-MIX FORMULA AND ALLOWABLE

TOLERANCES
After the job-mix formula is established above, all mixture furnished for the project
shall conform thereto within the following ranges of tolerances:
Passing No. 4 and larger sizes………………………..7 per cent +/-

Passing No. 8 to No. 100 sieve (incl.)..……………… 4 per cent +/-
Passing No. 200 sieve……………………………….. 2 per cent +/-
Bituminous Material…………………………………0.40 per cent +/-
Temperature of mixture on delivery…………………10 Centigrade +/-
Each day the Engineer shall take as many samples as he considers necessary for
checking the uniformity of the mixture. When unsatisfactory results or changed
conditions make it necessary, the Engineer may establish a new job-mix.
Should a change in sources of materials be made, a new job-mix formula shall be

submitted and approved before the mixture containing the new materials is delivered.
124
If emulsified asphalt is used, it shall be diluted with pure water when so directed by
the Engineer. No extra payment shall be made to the contract for such dilution and
quantity of bituminous materials to be paid for shall be undiluted emulsified asphalt
measured as provided for hereinafter.
Job materials found to have void or other characteristics requiring for a balanced mix,
or a bituminous material content greater or less than the bituminous material content
range tabulated above will be rejected. Marshall Specimens are to be obtained from
each of the binder and wearing courses materials supplied for trial laying purposes.
Specimen shall be formed and compacted in proper molds in accordance with the
procedure described in ASTM D1559.
The loss in Marshall Stability by submerging specimens in water at 60 degrees celsius

for 24 hours shall be not more than 25 % of the stability of the job-mix. The
Contractor shall demonstrate by approved tests to the satisfaction of the engineer that
the proposed mix is not subject to stripping of the asphalt cement from the aggregates.
To determine the Marshall Specimen Density from each set of mix Marshal
specimens, the highest and lowest densities shall be ignored and the Marshall
Specimen Density shall then be the mean of the densities of the remaining four
specimens.
Compacted densities shall be determined from samples taken at the laid and
compacted mix trials. At least four (4) samples shall be taken for each of the binder
and wearing course materials, under the direction of the Engineer and the required
percentage of Marshall Specimen Density shall be achieved. Testing shall be in
accordance with ASTM D1188 or ASTM D2726.
When the Engineer is satisfied that the materials and methods demonstrated by the
Contractor during trial laying comply with the requirements of the Contractor, the
Engineer shall determine the job-mix and shall inform the contractor in writing of its
composition. On receipt of such information, the Contractor may proceed with the
work.
310.6 MIX TRIALS
Prior to supply of bituminous concrete, The Contractor shall submit full details of his
proposed grading and mixes to the Engineer. After approval, Contractor shall lay and
properly compact trial areas of binder and wearing course materials. The Contractor
shall place approximately 80 tons of bituminous concrete in each trial area, which will
demonstrate the laying and compaction equipment complies with the requirements of
the Specifications and that the mixes as laid are acceptable.
310.7 PAVEMENT SAMPLES
The Contractor shall furnish for test, when required by the Engineer, samples cut from
the completed work or taken from the mixed material at the plant. Any areas of
pavement removed shall be placed with new material and refinished. No additional
compensation shall be allowed for furnishing test samples or replacing the areas with
new pavement.
125
310.8 INSPECTION OF PAVING PLANT OPERATION
For checking the adequacy of the equipment used, inspecting the conditions and
operation of the plant, for the verification ok weights or proportions and character of
material, and for the determination and checking of temperatures being maintained, the
Engineer or his authorized representative shall have access at all times to any part of
the paving plant.
310.9 WEATHER LIMITATION
Bituminous concrete mixtures shall be placed only when weather is not foggy or rainy
and when the surface on which the mixture is to be placed is dry.
310.10 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
All plants used by the Contractor for the preparation of bituminous concrete mixtures
shall be conform to all the requirements under Article 310-II below, expect that scale
requirements shall apply only where weight proportioning is used. Any batch mixing
plants shall conform to the special requirements under Article 310.12 (6 and 7) and
continuous mixing plants shall conform to the requirements under Article 310.11-(10)
to (12).
310.11 REQUIREMENT FOR ALL PLANT UNIFORMITY
The plant shall be so designed, coordinated, and operated as to produce a mixture

within the job-mix tolerances fixed by the contract.
1) Scale. Scale for any weigh box or hooper may be either of the beam or springless
dial type and shall be of standard make and designs sensitive to ½ or 1 per cent of the
maximum load that may be required.
When scales are of the beam type, there shall be separated beam for each size of
aggregate, there shall be provided “telltale dial” that will start the function when the
load being applied is within 45 kilograms of that desired. Sufficient vertical
movement shall be provided for the beams to permit that “telltale” dial to function
properly. Each beam shall have a locking device designated and so located that the
beam can easily be suspended or thrown into action. The weighing mechanism shall
be balanced on knife edges and fulcrums and shall be so constructed that it cannot be
easily thrown out of alignment and adjustment.
Dial scale shall be springless of a standard make, and a such size that the numerals on
the dial can be read at a distance of at least 25 ft. The dial shall be compounding tight
having full compliments of index pointers. Pointers so placed as to given excessive
parallax errors shall not be used. The scale shall be substantially constructed, and
those that easily get out of adjustment shall be replaced with other makes when so
ordered. All dial shall be so located as to be plainly visible to the operator at all times.
Scale for the weighing of bituminous material shall conform to the Specifications for
the scales for aggregate expect that each beam scale shall be equipped with a tare
beam and full capacity beam. The value of the minimum gradation shall not be greater
than 1 kilogram, dial scale for weighing the bituminous material shall not have a
capacity of more than twice the weight of the material to be weighed and shall read to
126
the nearest half kilogram. Beam scale shall be equipped with a “telltale” device which
will start to the function when the load being applied is within 5 kilograms of that
desired.
Scale shall be satisfactory to the Engineer and shall be checked and sealed as often as
the Engineer may deem it necessary number of standard test weights and frequent
testing all scales.
310.12 EQUIPMENT FOR PREPARATION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
Tanks for storage of bituminous material shall be equipped for heating material, under
effective and positive control at all times, to temperature requirements set forth
Specifications. The heating system shall provide uniform heating of the entire
contents of tanks. Heating shall be accomplished by steam coils, electricity or other
means so that no flames shall be of adequate size to insure proper and continuous
circulation during the entire operating period.
All pipe lines and fittings shall be steam jacketed or otherwise properly insulated to
prevent heat loss storage tank capacity shall be sufficient or at least one day’s run.
1. Feeder for Drier. The paint shall be provided with an accurate mechanical means
for uniformity feeding the mineral aggregate into the drier so that uniform production
and uniform temperature will be obtained.
2. Drier. A rotary drier of any satisfactory design drying and heating the mineral
aggregate shall be provided. The drier shall be capable of drying and heating the
mineral aggregates to specification requirements.
3. Bins. The plant shall include storage bins of sufficient capacity to supply the mixer
when operating at full capacity. Bins shall be divided into at least two compartments
arranged to insure separated inadequate storage of appropriate fraction of aggregate.
Each compartment shall be provided with an overflow pipe that shall be of such size
and at such location as to prevent any backing up of material into other bins.
4. Bituminous Control Unit. Satisfactory means, either by weighing or metering or

the taking off volumetric measurements, shall be provided to obtain the proper
amount of bituminous materials in the mix within the tolerance specified for the job-
mix. Suitable means shall be provided either by steam jacketing or other insulation.
For maintaining the specified, temperature of bituminous material in the pipe lines,
motors, weigh buckets, spray bars and other containers of flow lines.
The plant shall be further equipped with an approved dial scale mercury thermometer,
an electric pyrometer or other approved thermometric instrument so placed at the
discharge chute of the drier as to register or indicate automatically the temperature of
the heated aggregate.
The Engineer reserves the right to pass upon the efficiency of thermometric
instruments and, for better regulation of aggregates, may direct replacement of any
instrument by some approved temperature recording apparatus and may further
require that daily temperature charge be submitted with him.
127
1. Control of Mixing Time. The plant shall be equipped with positive means to
control the time and to maintain mixing time unless changed by order of the Engineer.
The time of mixing shall be considered as the interval between the time of bituminous
material is spread on the aggregate and the time the same aggregate leaves the mixing
unit.
2. Special Equipment for Batching Plant, Weigh Box or Hopper. The equipment
shall include a means accurately weighing each bin size of aggregate in a weigh box
or hopper suspended on scales and of sample size to hold s full batch without hand
raking or running over the aggregate. The weigh box or hopper shall be supported on
fulcrums and knife-edges so constructed that they will not be easily thrown out of
alignment or adjustment. All edges and sizes of weighing hoppers must be free from
contact with any supporting rods or columns or other equipment that will in any way
affect proper functioning of the hopper. Also, there must be sufficient clearance
between the hopper and supporting devices to prevent accumulation of foreign
materials. The gate of the weigh box shall be closed tightly when the hopper is empty
so that no materials will be allowed to leak into a batch in the mixer during the
process of weighing the next batch.
3. Mixer Unit for batch Method. The plant shall include a batch mixer of an
approved twin pumill type or a rotary drum type, steam jacketed, and capable of
reducing a uniform within a job-mix tolerance fixed by the contract.
4. Special Requirement for Continuous Mixing Plants Gradation Control Unit.

The plant shall include means of accurately controlled individual gate to form an
orifice for volumetrically measuring the material drawn from each bin compartment.
The orifice shall be rectangular, with one dimension adjustable by positive
mechanical means provided with a lock. Indicators shall be provided on each gate to
show the size of gate opening.
5. Synchronization of Aggregate Feed and Bitumen Feed. Satisfactory means shall

be provided to afford positive interlocking control between the flow of aggregate from
the bins and the flow of bituminous material from the meter or other proportioning
source. This control shall be accomplished by interlocking mechanical means or by
any positive method under the Engineer control.
6. Mixer Unit for Bituminous Method. The plant shall include a continuous mixer
of an approved twin pugmill type, steam jacketed, and capable of producing a uniform
mixture within the job-mix tolerance fixed by the contract. The paddles shall be
adjustable for angular position on the shafts and reversible to retard the flow of the
mix. The mixer shall carry the several heights inscribed on a permanent gauge and
also the rate of feed of aggregate per minute, at plant operating speed. Unless
otherwise required, determination of mixing time shall be weight method under the
following formula:
Pugmill dead capacity in pounds

Mixing time in seconds = ----------------------------------------------------
Pugmill output in pounds/seconds
128
The weight shall be determined for the job tests made by the Engineer.
310.12 PLACING EQUIPMENT, SPREADING EQUIPMENT
The equipment shall consist of an approved, self-contained power machine operated

in such a manner that no supplemental spreading, shaping or finishing thickness,
alignment, grade, cross-section and smoothness. The finishing machines shall have a
longitudinal wheel base of approximately 3 meters or more or the screed or strike-off
action shall be controlled by an independent support of approximately 3 meters length
parallel to the direction of advanced and which will provide continuous positive
mechanical control of the screed or strike-off assembly so as to strike-off the mixture
to the exact profile and grade intended without the aid of the manual adjustment
during operation.
Rollers. Rollers for compacting the surface shall be of the self-powered tandem
weighing not less than 3 tons each.
310.13 PREPATION OF BITUMINOUS MATERIAL
When the bituminous material being used is asphalt cement, 60-70 or 85-100
penetration grade, it shall be melted in kettles or tanks designed to heat the entire
contents uniformly to a temperature of between 225 degrees and 300 degrees
Fahrenheit (120 degrees and 150 degrees Centigrade).
When the bituminous material is emulsified asphalt, it shall not be heated.
310.14 PREPARATION OF AGGREGATE

The aggregate of the mixture shall be dried and heated at the paving plant before being
placed in the mixer. It shall be heated and placed to the mixing unit at temperature
within the range of +/-17°C of the bitumen. Moisture content of the aggregate shall not
exceed one (1) mass percent as introduced into the mixing unit. Flames for drying and
heating shall be adjusted as to avoid injury to the aggregate and so as to heat the
aggregate to the required temperature. If asphalt cement, 60-70 or 85-100 penetration
is used as the bituminous material, the aggregate shall be heated that it will be
introduced into the mixer at a temperature between 250° to 325°F (120° to 160°C). In
no case shall the aggregate be introduced into the mixer at a temperature of more than
25°F (10°C) above the temperature of the bituminous material. If the bituminous
material is emulsified asphalt, the aggregate shall be introduced into the mixer at a
temperature not exceeding 300°F (150°C), nor less than 200°F (100°C).
310.15 PREPARATION OF BITUMINOUS MIXTURE
The dried mineral aggregate, prepared as prescribed above shall be combined in the
plant in the proportionate amounts of each fraction of aggregate required to meet the
job-mix formula. Where a batching plant is used, the Engineer shall determine the
quantity of bituminous material for each batch. In any case, the bituminous material
shall be measured and gauged and introduced into the mixer in the proportionate
amount determined by the Engineer for the particular material being used.
129
Prior to adding bituminous material, the combined mineral aggregate shall be
thoroughly mixed dry. After which the proper amount of bituminous material shall be
distributed over the mineral aggregate are coated uniformly. In any event, the mixing
time may be regulated by fixing a minimum depth in the mixer unit and/or by other
adjustment.
The aggregate and the bituminous material shall be introduced into 20°F (10°C).
The ingredients shall be heated as previously described and combined so as to
produce a mixture which, when discharged shall be at a temperature of not less than
250°F (120°C), when 60-70 or 85-100 penetration grade asphalt is used, nor less than
180°F (85°) when emulsified asphalt is used.
310.16 TRANPORTATION AND DELIVERY OF MIXTURES
The mixture shall be transported from the mixing plant to the point of use in vehicles
having tight bodies previously cleaned of all foreign materials. When directed by the
Engineer, each load shall be covered with canvass or other suitable material of
sufficient size and thickness to protect it from the weather. No loads shall be sent out
so late in the day as to prevent completion of the spreading and compaction of the
mixture during daylight, unless artificial light satisfactory to the Engineer is provided.
When the bituminous material is 60-70 or 85-100 penetration asphalt cement, the
mixture shall be delivered at a temperature between 200° and 320°F (110° and 165°C)
and within 20°F (10°C) of the temperature set in the job-mix formula.
310.17 CONDITIONING OF EXISTING BASE
Where no tack coat is to be applied prior to placing the bituminous concrete mixture,
the existing base which the pavement is to be constructed shall be swept thoroughly
and cleaned of all loose dirt and other objectionable materials immediately before
spreading the mixture. If a tack coat is required, it shall be placed, measured and paid
for as provided for under “Bituminous Tack Coat, Item 302.
Contact surfaces of curb and gutter, manholes, and other structure manufactures shall
be painted with a thin uniform coating of hot asphalt cement or asphalt cement
thinned with maptha or emulsified asphalt just before the bituminous cement mixture
is placed against them.
310.18 APREADING AND FINISHING
Upon arrival at the point of use, the mixture shall be spread and struck off so as to
give the profile grade, elevation and cross-section shape required after compaction.
For this purpose, self-powered spreading and finishing equipment with an activated
screeds or strike-off assembly heated if required, shall be used, distributing the
mixture either over the entire width or over such partial width lanes as may be
practicable.
Sledge graders or dress shall not be used. The assembly shall be adjustable to give the
cross-section shape required and shall be so designed and operated to place the weight
per square meter of surface course material required.
130
If, during construction, it is found that the spreading and finishing equipment in
operation leaves in the new surface course tracks or intended areas that are not
satisfactorily corrected by the scheduled operations, or if it produces other permanent
blemishes, the use of such equipment shall be discontinued and other applicable
equipment be provided by the Contractor.
The term “screed” includes any cutting, crowding or other practicable action that is
effective in producing a finished surface of the evenness and texture specified without
tearing, shoving and gauging when placing the mixture specified.
Unless the spreader is integral with the screening machine, a mechanical rake or its
equivalent must be used in front of the finishing machine to thoroughly loosen the
material and make possible uniform distribution.
On areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of the self-
powered spreading and finishing equipment impracticable, in the judgment of the
Engineer, the mixture shall be spread and screed by hand. On such areas the mixture
shall be dump board shoveled into place and spread and screed to leave the weight of
material required.
The Contractor shall provide suitable means for keeping all small tools clean and free
from accumulation of bituminous material. He shall provide and have ready for use at
all times enough tarpaulins or covers, as may be directed by the Engineer, for use in
any emergency such as rain, or unavoidable delay, for the purpose of covering or
protecting any material that may be jumped and not spread.
310.19 COMPACTION
After spreading and strike-off, and while still workable, the course shall be compacted
thoroughly and uniformly by rolling. The types of rollers shall be used for obtaining
compaction. One shall be a 5 – 8 ton tandem roller and the other shall be a 10-12 ton
3-whelled power.
The bituminous mixture will be measured by the ton (t). The quantity to be paid for
shall be the number of tons of mixture placed and compacted in the accepted
pavement will be made for the weight of bituminous material in the mixture.
Batch weight will not be permitted as a method of measurement.
The accepted quantity, measured as prescribed in Section 310.21, shall be paid for at
the Contract until price for Bituminous Concrete Surface, Plant Mix, which price and
payment shall be full compensation for furnishing all materials, handling, mixing,
hauling, placing, rolling, compacting, labor equipment, tools, and incidentals
necessary to complete this Item.
131
Pay Item Number Description Unit of Measurement
310 Bituminous Concrete Surface square meter

Course, Plant Mix
SPL-1 CUTTING & REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY

TRANSITION
1.1 DESCRIPTION
This Item shall consist of removal, wholly or in part, and satisfactory disposal of all
buildings, fences, structured, old pavements, abandoned pipe lines, and any other
obstructions which are not designated or permitted to remain, except for the
obstruction to be removed and disposed of under other items in the Contract. It shall
also include the salvaging of designated materials and back-filling the resulting
trenches, holes, and pits.

1.1.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall perform the work described above, within and adjacent to
the roadway, runway on Government land or easement, as shown on the Plans
or as directed by the Engineer. All designated salvable material shall be
removed, without unnecessary damage, in sections or pieces which may
readily transported, and shall be stored by the Contractor at specified places on
the project or as otherwise shown in the Special Provisions. Perishable
material shall be handled as designated in Sub-section 100.2.2. Nonperishable
material may be disposed of outside the limits of view from the project with
written permission of property the material is placed. Copies of all
agreements with property owners are to be furnished to the Engineer.
Basements or cavities left by structure removal shall be filled with acceptable
material to the level of the surrounding ground and, if within the prism of
construction, shall be compacted to the required density.
1.1.2 REMOVAL OF BRIDGES, CULVERTS AND OTHER DRAINAGE STUCTURES.

Bridges, culverts and other drainage structures in use by traffic shall not be
removed until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate
traffic. The removal of existing culverts within embankment areas will be
required only as necessary for the installation of new structures. Abandoned
culverts shall be broken down, crushed and sealed or plugged. All culverts
sections removed, which are not designated for stockpiling or relaying, shall
become the property of the contractor and be removed from the project or
disposed of in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Blasting and other operations necessary for the removal of an existing

structure or obstruction, which may damage new construction, shall be
132
completed prior to placing the new work, unless otherwise provided in the
Special Provisions.
1.1.3 REMOVAL OF PIPES OTHER THAN PIPE CULVERTS.

Unless otherwise provide, all pipes shall be carefully removed and every
precaution taken to avoid breakage or damage. Pipe to be re-laid shall be
removed and stored when necessary so that there will no loss or damage
before relaying. The Contractor shall replace sections lost from storage or
damage by negligence, at his own expense.
1.1.4 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, ETC.
All concrete pavement, base course, sidewalks, curbs, gutter, etc., designated
for removal, shall be:
1. Broken into pieces and used for rip-rap on the project, or

2. Broken into pieces, the size of which shall not exceed 300 mm (12
inches) in any dimension and stockpiled at designated locations on the
project for use by the Government, or
3. Otherwise disposed of as directed, when specified, ballast, gravel,
bituminous material or other surfacing or pavement materials shall be
removed and stockpiled as required in Subsection 103.2.1, otherwise such
materials shall be disposed of as directed
There will be no separate payment for excavation and removal of structures
and obstructions or for back-filling and compacting the remaining cavity.
When the Contract stipulates that payment will be made for removal of obstructions
on a lump-sum basis, the Pay Item will include all structures and obstructions
encountered within the project site. Where the Contract stipulates that payment will
be made for the removal of specific Items on a unit basis, measurement will be made
by the unit stipulated in the Contract.
Wherever the Bill of Quantities does not contain an item for any aforementioned
removals, the work will not be paid for directly, but will be considered as a subsidiary
obligation of the Contractor under other contract items.
the Contract unit or lump sum bid for each of the pay items listed below that is
included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation
for removing and disposing of constructions, including all materials, labor,
item. The price shall also include backfilling, salvage of materials removed, their
custody, preservation, storage on the right-of –way and disposal as provided herein.
133
PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER:
PAY ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT OF

NUMBER MEASUREMENT
I Removal of Structures Obstructions sq. m
SPL-2 RUNWAY MARKINGS
2.0 SCOPE OF WORK
This item includes all runway and pavement marking installations of all traffic signs
and signboards and related work as shown on the Drawings or as may be directed by
the “Engineer”.
2.0 RUNWAY MARKINGS
Paint shall be an Epoxy Resin Adhesive for bonding traffic markers to

pavement surfaces and a reflective media shall be applied to provide
reflection. This shall conform to AASHTO M237-73.
Colors of paint shall be as shown on the Plans or as may be directed by the

“Engineer”.
Painting work shall not be performed until;
a. Receiving surfaces shall be cured and dried not less than 30-days, free
from dirt and dust, free from water of moisture condensation and have
been approved by the “Engineer”.
b. Weather is not excessively hot, windy, dusty or foggy, nor rain may occur
within 12 hours following end of day’s painting work, as can be
reasonably predicted.
c. Nor, until conditions under which paint work will be performed are
approved by the “Engineer”.
2.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
Equipment for painting work shall be approved by the “Engineer”, and shall
include apparatus necessary to properly clean the existing surface, and
mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand painting equipment as
may be necessary to satisfactorily complete painting required.
134
Markings shall be applied at locations and to dimensions and spacing
indicated; and layouts, indicated alignment, and the condition of pavement
surface have been approved by the “Engineer”.
Paint shall be mixed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions before

applications; and shall be thoroughly mixed and applied at its original
consistency without addition of thinner.
When paint is applied by brush, surface shall receive two coats; with first coat
thoroughly dry before second coat is applied.
When reflectorized markings are applied, relative media shall be distributed to

the surface of pigmented binder immediately and embedded at rate and depth
as required to provide adhesion and reflection.
A period of several weeks shall elapse between application of a bituminous

surface course and commencement of painting work; and when applied paint
shall not bleed excessively, curl, or discolor.
In application of straight stripes, any deviation within a tolerance of 5 percent.
Painting shall be performed to the satisfaction of “Engineer” by competent and

experienced equipment operators, laborers, and artisans in a neat and
worthwhile manner.
Paint shall be applied uniformly at rate of not less than 2.50 nor more than
2.80 square meter per liter.
Reflective media shall be applied at rate of 1.2 kilograms per liter of paint.
High intensity granules shall be applied at rate of 0.20 kilograms per liter of
paint.
Contractor shall furnish a certified report on quality of materials ordered for

the Work. This report shall not be interpreted as a basis for acceptance.
The “Engineer” shall be notified upon arrival of shipment for inspecting and
sampling of materials.
When required, all emptied containers shall be returned to paint material

storage or made available for tallying by the “Engineer”.
Mechanical marker shall be an approved atomizing spray type marking

machine suitable for application of traffic paint; shall produce even and
uniform film thickness at the required coverage and shall be designed so as to
apply markings of uniform cross section and clear-cut edges without running
or spattering and within the limits for straightness set forth.
When needed, a dispenser shall be furnished which is properly designed for

attachment to mechanical marker and suitable for dispensing the required
quantity of reflective media.
135
Suitable adjustment shall be provided on sprayers of a single machine or by
furnishing additional equipment for painting the width required.
2.4 PREPARATION OF EXISTING SURFACE
Immediately before application of paint, runway and pavement surfaces shall

be dry and entirely free from dirt, grease, oil, acids, laitance, or other foreign
matter inhibiting or reducing paint bond. Surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned
by sweeping and blowing as required to remove all dirt, laitance, and loose
materials.
Areas which cannot be satisfactorily cleaned by brooming and blowing shall

be scrubbed as directed with a water solution of trisoduim phosphate (10%
Na3PO4, by weight) or an approved equal solution. After scrubbing, solution
shall be rinsed off and surface dried prior to painting.
2.5 LAYOUT AND ALIGNMENT
Suitable layouts and lines of proposed stripes shall be spotted in advance of

paint application and control points shall be provided and spaced at such
intervals as will insure accurate location of all lines and markings.
The Contractor shall provide an experienced technician to supervise the

location, alignment, layout, dimensioning and application of paint.
Single stripes shall be applied wholly on one side of longitudinal pavement

joints and double or multiple stripes shall be centered over similar joints.
2.6 APPLICATION
Container shall not be removed from the site or destroyed without permission.
The Contractor shall make an accurate accounting of paint materials used in
accepted Work.
2.7 PROTECTION
After application of paint, all markings shall be protected from injury or

damage of any kind. The Contractor shall be directly responsible and shall
erect or place suitable warning signs, flags, or barricades, protective screens,
or covering as required.
Adjacent surfaces shall be protected from disfiguration by spatter, splashes,

spillage, drippings of paint or other materials.
2.8 DEFECTIVE WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIAL
When any material not conforming to requirements of the specifications has

been delivered to the Project or incorporated in the Work of any work
performed is of inferior quality, such material of Work shall be considered
defective and shall be corrected as directed by the “Engineer” at Contractor’s
expense.
136
The quantity of runway and pavement markings to be paid shall either be the
length as shown on the plans of painted traffic line of the stated width or the
area as shown on the plans of symbols, lettering, chartings and the like,
completed and accepted.
Payment for runway and pavement markings shall constitute full

compensation for furnishing and placing all materials sampling and packing
for the preparation of the surface, and for all labor, equipment, tools and
incidentals necessary to complete the Item.
UNIT OF
ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION
MEASUREMENT
Runway Markings sq.m.
ITEM 201 AGGREGATE BASE COURSE

See Section B. Concreting of Runway (STA 1+430 to STA 1+710) – 280m x 30m width Item
201 Aggregate Base Course.
137
E. CONSTRUCTION OF BARBED WIRE FENCE
ITEM 101 REMOVAL OF STRUCTURES AND
OBSTRUCTIONS
101.1 DESCRIPTION
This Item shall consist of removal, wholly or in part, and satisfactory disposal of all
buildings, fences, structured, old pavements, abandoned pipe lines, and any other
obstructions which are not designated or permitted to remain, except for the
obstruction to be removed and disposed of under other items in the Contract. It shall
also include the salvaging of designated materials and back-filling the resulting
trenches, holes, and pits.
101.1.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall perform the work described above, within and adjacent to
the roadway, runway on Government land or easement, as shown on the Plans
or as directed by the Engineer. All designated salvable material shall be
removed, without unnecessary damage, in sections or pieces which may
readily transported, and shall be stored by the Contractor at specified places on
the project or as otherwise shown in the Special Provisions. Perishable
material shall be handled as designated in Sub-section 100.2.2. Nonperishable
material may be disposed of outside the limits of view from the project with
written permission of property the material is placed. Copies of all
agreements with property owners are to be furnished to the Engineer.
Basements or cavities left by structure removal shall be filled with acceptable
material to the level of the surrounding ground and, if within the prism of
construction, shall be compacted to the required density.
101.1.2 REMOVAL OF BRIDGES, CULVERTS AND OTHER DRAINAGE

STUCTURES.
Bridges, culverts and other drainage structures in use by traffic shall not be
removed until satisfactory arrangements have been made to accommodate
traffic. The removal of existing culverts within embankment areas will be
required only as necessary for the installation of new structures. Abandoned
culverts shall be broken down, crushed and sealed or plugged. All culverts
sections removed, which are not designated for stockpiling or relaying, shall
become the property of the contractor and be removed from the project or
disposed of in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Blasting and other operations necessary for the removal of an existing

structure or obstruction, which may damage new construction, shall be
completed prior to placing the new work, unless otherwise provided in the
Special Provisions.
138
101.1.3 REMOVAL OF PIPES OTHER THAN PIPE CULVERTS.
Unless otherwise provide, all pipes shall be carefully removed and every
precaution taken to avoid breakage or damage. Pipe to be re-laid shall be
removed and stored when necessary so that there will no loss or damage
before relaying. The Contractor shall replace sections lost from storage or
damage by negligence, at his own expense.
101.1.4 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, ETC.
All concrete pavement, base course, sidewalks, curbs, gutter, etc., designated
for removal, shall be:
4. Broken into pieces and used for rip-rap on the project, or

5. Broken into pieces, the size of which shall not exceed 300 mm (12
inches) in any dimension and stockpiled at designated locations on the
project for use by the Government, or
6. Otherwise disposed of as directed, when specified, ballast, gravel,
bituminous material or other surfacing or pavement materials shall be
removed and stockpiled as required in Subsection 103.2.1, otherwise such
materials shall be disposed of as directed
There will be no separate payment for excavation and removal of structures
and obstructions or for back-filling and compacting the remaining cavity.
When the Contract stipulates that payment will be made for removal of obstructions
on a lump-sum basis, the Pay Item will include all structures and obstructions
encountered within the project site. Where the Contract stipulates that payment will
be made for the removal of specific Items on a unit basis, measurement will be made
by the unit stipulated in the Contract.
Wherever the Bill of Quantities does not contain an item for any aforementioned
removals, the work will not be paid for directly, but will be considered as a subsidiary
obligation of the Contractor under other contract items.
the Contract unit or lump sum bid for each of the pay items listed below that is
included in the Bill of Quantities, which price and payment shall be full compensation
for removing and disposing of constructions, including all materials, labor,
item. The price shall also include backfilling, salvage of materials removed, their
custody, preservation, storage on the right-of –way and disposal as provided herein.
139
PAYMENT WILL BE MADE UNDER:
PAY ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT OF

NUMBER MEASUREMENT
101 (1) Removal of Structures Obstructions Lump Sum

101 (2) Removal of Each
101 (3) Removal of Square Meter
101 (4) Removal of Linear Meter
140
ITEM I. SITEWORKS
1.1 SITE PREPARATION
1.1.1 GENERAL
The Work under this Section shall include complete demolition work
timbering, clearing, grubbing, scalping, obliteration of roadways, clean up and
disposal of all debris and other objectionable matter and grading work as
directed by the Construction Officer.
1.1.2 REQUIREMENTS
Demolition in work shall consist of complete removal/demolition of the

existing office and other obstruction.
Timbering shall consist of felling and disposal of all trees specifically

indicated to be removed. No timbering shall be done until each tree to be
removed has been physically marked for removal by the Construction Officer.
Trees marked for removal shall be felled in such a manner as not to injure
other trees, fences, wires, buildings and facilities which are to remain. All
damage to remaining trees, plants or facilities resulting from such timbering
shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Government.
All resulting stumps shall be left clean and free from sharp protuberances and
shall not extend more than 30 cm above ground surface.
Cleaning shall consist of the removal and disposal of all stumps, vines, bush,
grass, roots, vegetation, fences, rocks, masonry and debris within the limits
and rights-of-way of the project.
Disposal of non-combustible waste shall be accomplished by removal from

job-site by the Construction Officer. In no case shall the Construction Officer,
prior to commencement of operation, or permission from the property owner,
such permission to include the site location, method of disposal and any
restrictions or conditions that may form part of the agreement between the
Contractor and the Owner. The Contractor shall save the Government from
any claim arising or resulting from such disposal operations.
Burning shall be accomplished at site without damage to nearby trees,

buildings or other facilities by flames, smoke or ash. All applicable
regulations shall be complied with such burning. Permission by the
Construction Officer to accomplish burning shall not be construed as to relieve
the Contractor of determining and complying with such regulations. All fires
shall be kept under constant and adequate attendance and fire control measures
and devices shall be sufficient in quantity to control all blazes. In the event
that conditions are unsuitable for burning waste, at the option of the
Contractor, combustible material may be disposed by other means, provided
that prior approval of the Construction Officer is obtained.
141
The grading work shall be done after clearing the site of stumps, roots, grass,
etc. Grading work shall be general smoothening the ground surface of the site
such as covering holes left by stumps, etc. and leveling sharp and steep grades.
1.2 EXCAVATING AND GRADING
1.2.1 GENERAL
Work under this section shall be subject to the requirements of applicable

paragraphs of the General Conditions of Contract.
1.2.2 WORK INCLUDED
This work includes labor, materials, and equipment necessary for excavating
and grading as required in the Drawings and as specified herein. This, in
general, includes cleaning and removal of grass, trees, and loose stones, and
excavation for foundations, footings, septic vault, and rough and finish
grading.
1.2.3 MATERIALS
Backfill material shall be of the materials approved by the Construction

Officer, and Embankments shall be constructed of suitable materials, in
consonance with the following definitions:
a. Suitable Material – Material which is acceptable in accordance with the

Contract and which can be compacted in the manner specified in this Item.
It can be common material or rock. Selected Borrow, for topping – soil of
such gradation that all particles will pass a sieve with 75 mm (3 inches)
square openings and not more than 15 mass percent will pass the 0.075
mm (No. 200) sieve, as determined by ASTM C136. The material shall
have a plasticity index of not more than 6 and a liquid limit of not more
than 30 as determined by ASTM D 4318.
b. Unsuitable Material – Material other than suitable materials such as:
b.1 Materials containing detrimental quantities of organic materials, such
as grass, roots and sewerage.
b.2 Organic soils such as peat and muck.
b.3 Soils with liquid limit exceeding 80 and/or plasticity index exceeding
55.
b.4 Soils with a natural water content exceeding 100%.
b.5 Soils with very low natural density, 800 kg/m3 or lower.
b.6 Soils that cannot be properly compacted as determined by the
Construction Officer/Engineer.
1.2.4 WORKMANSHIP
a. STAKING OUT
142
The Contractor shall stake cut lines and corners. He shall build batter
boards and shall locate first and second floor lines in relation to existing
grades. Lines and levels shall be approved by the Construction Officer or
his representative before excavation is started.
The Contractor shall construct two permanent benchmarks of previously
known elevations near the site of construction for purpose of determining
any settlement that may occur during the construction.
b. EXCAVATION
Excavation shall be executed in a careful manner to proper depths. No
excavation shall be carried below elevations indicated on Drawings unless
made necessary by existing conditions. Claims for extras will not be
allowed for excavations not authorized by the Construction Officer.
Excavated materials shall be transported to and placed in fill areas within
work limits. Unsatisfactory materials encountered within established
subgrades as shown or 0.30m below grade shall be replaced with
satisfactory materials as specified.
Surplus excavated materials not required for fill or embankment shall be
disposed of in designated waste or spoil areas. Unsatisfactory excavated
materials shall be disposed in designated waste or spoil areas. Excavated
materials shall be performed to provide proper drainage at all times.
Materials required for fill, in excess of that produced by excavation within
the grading limits, shall be excavated from approved borrow areas.
Excavation shall be left clean and clear of loose material.
c. WATER AND DRAINAGE

Contractor shall do everything necessary for keeping water out of
excavations and away from building during construction.
d. BACKFILL
Backfill shall be installed against foundation walls in not more than 2” or
50mm. Backfill shall be carefully tamped. Debris shall not be used for
backfilling.
e. GRADING
Finish grading shall include areas with limits shown on plot plan. Grades
shall be reformed to easy contours in accordance with Drawings.
1.3 SOIL POISONING
1.3.1 GENERAL
Whenever the Scope of Work includes soil poisoning, the work shall include
furnishing of labor, materials, and equipment to complete all poisoning works.
1.3.2 MATERIALS
Soil Poisons, Soil poisons shall be water-based emulsions.
Any of the following may be used:

1. Chlordane - 1% Concentration
2. Benzene Hexachloride - 0.8% Gamma Isomer Concentration
143
3. Dieldrin - 0.5% Concentration
4. Aldrin - 0.5% Concentration
5. Heptachlor - 0.5% Concentration
a. SAMPLE AND TEST

A sample of the concentrated toxicant shall be tested.
At least two samples of working solution shall be tested for every 10,000
square feet or 1,000 square meters of treated area.
Samples shall be submitted, analyzed and tested by an approved testing

laboratory. Tests shall be paid for by the Contractor. The results shall be
submitted to the Construction Officer.
b. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

Chemicals shall be delivered to the job site in factory sealed containers
with the manufacturer’s brand and name clearly marked.
Chemicals shall be stored, handled, and applied in accordance with the

directions in the manufacturer’s label.
1.3.3 WORKMANSHIP
a. SITE INSPECTION
A general survey and through examination of the entire premises shall be
undertaken in order to fully understand all existing conditions and to
determine the location and existence of subterranean termite colonies.
b. APPLICATION
Soil poison working solution shall be applied by means of pressure spray,
soil injector, or when specified by direct pouring.
Live termite mounds found within the premises shall be exterminated by

destroying the mounds and/or introducing soil poison working solution
into mounds.
Soil poisoning work shall not begin until all preparations for slab
placement have been completed.
Soil poisons shall not be applied when soil of fill is excessively wet or
immediately after heavy rains to avoid surface flow of soil poison solution
from the application site.
After grading and leveling the soil in the ground, gravel bed shall be set
preparatory to the pouring of concrete at every 10.76 sq.ft. (Square Meter)
floor footing area shall be flooded or soaked with soil poison working
solution.
Every 3.28 linear feet (linear meter) of excavation for footing retaining
wall and other foundation work shall be thoroughly drenched and saturated
with soil poison working solution before pouring of concrete.
144
The solution shall be applied to all areas immediately below expansion
joints, control joints and all areas where slab will be penetrated by pipe
and other construction features.
Masonry wall resting on grades shall have their voids treated with 1 gallon
of soil poison working solution per 5 linear feet (1.52 linear meter) of wall.
Poison shall be poured directly into below spaces.
Prior to landscaping of lawn, every linear meter of building perimeter and
of three-meter width shall be saturated with soil poison working solution.
Earth fill shall be treated thoroughly. As soon as fill is compacted and
leveled, every one square meter area shall be drenched with soil poison
working solution.
c. GUARANTEE
Upon completion and acceptance of the work, the Owner shall be
furnished with a written guarantee stating that termite control is guaranteed
for a period of 10 years and that regular inspections are to be done by the
guarantor to ensure the quality of their work.
1.4 TOPSOILING AND SODDING
1.4.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
necessary for the supply, delivery and placement of topsoil and sodding, and
shall maintain all planted areas up to the termination of Contract.
All exposed areas and unpaved within the limits of the perimeter fence shall
be final graded with topsoil and sodded as specified herein except where noted
otherwise on the Drawings.
1.4.2 SUBMITTALS
The contractor shall submit to the Construction Officer for approval

representative samples of topsoil to be used prior to any topsoil haulage.
Topsoil delivered to the site that is in the opinion of the Construction Officer
as inferior to the approved submitted samples shall be removed and disposed
of offsite at no cost to the Owner.
The Construction Officer may request submittal of sod samples for approval
or may elect to inspect the place of sod procurement.
1.4.3 MATERIALS
a. TOP SOIL
Topsoil shall be natural fertile soil containing a large amount of humus or
organic matter, add shall be representative of soils in the locally capable of
supporting a luxuriant plant growth.
145
The topsoil shall be reasonably free from clay, brush, weeds, roots, general
debris, stones and any objects larger than 25mm in diameter.
b. WEED ERADICATOR AND SOIL FUMIGANT

Weed eradicator and soil fumigant shall be sodium methyl ditch carbonate
for eradication of weeds, geminating weed seeds, fungi, insects and soil
pests. Strength or dosage application shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer. Soluble fertilizer shall be standard.
c. SOLUBLE FERTILIZER
Soluble fertilizer shall be standard commercial complete fertilizer
containing nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash in 10-10-10 to 10-12-10
percent by weight minimum ratio, respectively, and shall be readily
soluble in water.
d. UREA FERTILIZER
Urea fertilizer shall be standard Fertilizer commercial type, and shall
conform to the following specification:
Total nitrogen ------------- 38 percent minimum

A.I. value ------------------- 47-55 percent
Urea nitrogen ------------- 5 percent maximum
Particle size ---------------- All material shall pass 10-mesh sieve
Less than 1 percent may be retained.
e. GRASS SOD
Sod shall consist of a heavy thickly matted growth of living grass that is
relatively dormant during the dry season, but capable of renewed growth
thereafter. Sod shall be free of weeds or undesirable plants, large stones,
or other objects larger than 25mm in diameter. When the sod is procured
grass height shall not exceed 120mm. And there shall be sufficient soil
adhering to the roots to support grass growth.
1.4.4 EXECUTION
a. SURFACE
After areas to be topsoil have been Preparation cleared, grubbed and/or
brought to grades shown on the Drawings, but prior to dumping and
spreading of the topsoil, the entire area shall be inspected and approved by
the Construction Officer. All areas found excessively compacted.
Irrespective of the cause shall be loosened to a depth of at least 150mm to
permit bonding with the topsoil.
b. TOPSOIL SPREADING
b.1 Placing
Topsoil shall not be placed when the surged is excessively wet,
extremely dry, or where the areas have not been finally graded. The
topsoil shall be dumped in piles uniformly spaced and shall be spread
evenly over the entire area to provide a minimum depth of 150mm.
146
Low spots, pockets or ridges in the surface that will cause the
accumulation or pounding of water shall be filled and regraded to a
uniform slope as indicated on the Drawings.
b.2 Cleanup
After the topsoil has been spread and graded as required the surface
shall be raked clear of all large stones, roots and other loose material
which shall be gathered and disposed of offsite. Topsoil and other
extraneous material spilled on paved areas shall be promptly swept up
and removed.
b.3 Compaction
Topsoil shall be compacted with alight roller to a depth of about
100mm. Any erosion, irregularity of grade, or damage to the surface of
the topsoil shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Construction
Officer prior to any sodding work.
b.4 Weed Eradication and Soil Fumigation

Topsoil shall be maintained in a moistened condition by fine spraying
without pudding or erosion to the desired depth for a period of five (5)
to seven (7) days. This is to stimulate the germination of weed seeds.
Weed eradicator and soil fumigant shall then be applied at the rate of
one (1) liter to 55-110 liters of water for every 10 square meters.
b.5 Pre-Fertilization
Not less than 15 days after the applicant of the weed eradicator and soil
fumigant, soluble fertilizer shall be uniformly spread at a rate of 2
kilograms of 10-10-10 fertilizer per 100 square meters of topsoil.
After spreading, the pre-fertilizer shall be kept well moistened without
puddles or erosion until the fertilizer has been dissolved. Pre-
fertilization shall be applied to all areas prepared for sodding.
c. SODDING
Sod shall be cut into squares or into rectangular sections. Rectangular
sections may vary in length but shall be of equal width and of a size that
will permit lifting and rolling without breaking. Care shall be exercised to
retain native soil on the roots during the process of stripping, transporting
and planting. Dumping from vehicles will not be permitted. During
delivery and while in stacks, sod shall be kept moist. Sod damaged by
handling or by other causes will be rejected.
The surface of the area to be sodded shall be loosened and brought to a

reasonably fine texture to a depth of approximately 20mm. The bed upon
which the sod is to be placed shall be moistened to the loosened depth, if
not naturally, sufficiently moist, and the sod shall be placed thereon within
24 hours after having been out.
Sod shall be laid smoothly, edge to edge with staggered joints. Sod shall
be pressed firmly into contact with the bed so as to eliminate all air
147
pockets, provide a true and even surface and ensure knitting without
displacement of the sod or determination of the surfaces of sodded areas.
Unless otherwise required the sod on slopes shall be laid horizontally

beginning at the bottom of the slopes and working upwards when placing
sod occur checks or similar constructions, the length of the strips shall be
laid at right angles to the direction of flow of the water. On all slopes
steeper than one vertical to three horizontal the sod shall be pegged with
stakes, 200-300mm in length, spaced as required by the nature of the soil
and the steepness of slope. Stakes shall be driven flush with the bottom of
grass blades.
After the sodding operation has been completed, the areas shall be rolled
lightly to obtain an even surface free from depressions and high points.
Edges shall be trimmed and true to line and grade indicated on the
Drawings.
After placing and rolling, the sodded areas shall be soaked with water to a
depth at about 50mm and thereafter shall be watered as required to
establish and maintain plant growth.
Any area that becomes guilded or otherwise damaged shall be repaired to
the satisfaction of the Construction Officer.
Thirty days after sodding, urea fertilizer shall be applied uniformly at a

rate of 5 kilograms of fertilizer per 100 square meters of area. After
application, the area shall be kept well moistened.
d. MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall maintain the sodded area as required and as directed
by the Construction Officer up to the date of completion of the Contract.
Maintenance shall include watering, fertilizing, weeding, cutting, repairing
and replacement.
The Contractor is expected to turn over the site with a heavy, uniform,
grass cover free of weeds of any other objectionable plant growth.
Any area that becomes guilded or otherwise damaged shall be repaired to

the satisfaction of the Construction Officer. Areas where sodding does not
provide a satisfactory growth shall be replaced with new topsoil and
sodding as required.
The sodded areas shall be routinely watered as required.
Sodded areas shall be protected against vehicular/pedestrian traffic or

other construction activity by means of barricades shall remain in place
until final acceptance.
148
1.5 CONCRETE CULVERT PIPE
1.5.1 GENERAL
Whenever Concrete Culvert Pipes are indicated in the Plans, this work shall
consist of furnishing reinforced and non-reinforced concrete culvert pipes of
the sizes and dimensions indicated on the drawings, conforming to the
specifications and the directions of the Construction Officer.
1.5.2 MATERIALS
The fabrication of the pipes shall conform to the specification of ASHO

Designation M 170. The Construction Officer reserves the right to inspect and
test the pipes delivered for use in the work. Defects that are discovered after
acceptance of delivery of the pipes but before installation of the pipe shall be
cause for rejection without additional cost to the Government. Mortar for pipe
joints shall be composed of one (1) part Portland cement and two (2) parts
sand, and shall conform to the requirements of item RC 100: Plain and
Reinforced Concrete.
1.5.3 WORKMANSHIP
Trenching for concrete culvert pipes shall conform to, and shall be payable
under, item EX 100: Excavation. The pipe trench shall be excavated to the
depth, grade and width established by the Construction Officer. In material
considered satisfactory by the Construction Officer, the pipes may be laid
directly on the trench bed shaped to the form of the pipes for at least 10 per
centum of their outside diameters. In rock or hardpan and other material
considered unsatisfactory by the Construction Officer, the trench bed shall be
excavated 30 centimeters deeper and the required selected or granular material
shall be laid to bed the pipes. In preparing the pipe bed, recesses for pipe bells
shall be provided. Pockets of unsuitable material shall be removed and
replaced with approved selected or granular material.
Pipes shall be carefully laid, with hubs up-graded, ends fully and closely joint,
true to the lines and grades required. After one length of pipe is laid, the lower
portion of the hub shall be primed with mortar on the inside sufficient enough
to bring the inner surfaces of the next pipe flushed and even those of the
previous one. The remainder of the joint on the inside shall then be filled with
mortar and then struck off to a smooth finish. The outside of the joint shall
also be filled with mortar, and excess mortar shall be used to form a bead all
around the outside of the joint. After the initial set of the outside mortar, it
shall be protected from air and sun by thoroughly wetted burlap or earth.
The pipes shall be tested for undue settlement and for water tightness of joints,
before backfilling the trench. Unsatisfactorily work shall be corrected without
additional cost to the Government. Backfilling shall conform to, and shall be
payable under, item BF 100: Filling and Backfilling. The mortar joints shall
have set sufficiently prior to backfilling. Backfilling shall be brought up, in
uniform 15-centimeter layer on both side and over the line of pipes, to the
149
finished grade. Compaction shall be accompanied by sprinkling with water to
obtain at least 95% relative compaction.
1.5.4 METHODS OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT
For purposes of progress payments, concrete pipes installed complete in place

in accordance with drawings, these specifications, or as directed by the
Construction Officer shall be paid for the total length in linear meters
according to size and kind, measured along the axis of the pipes.
The quantities measured as provided above and accepted for payment shall be
paid for the purposes of progress payments only at the unit price per linear
meter of the kind and size of concrete pipes, in which price and payments shall
constitute full compensation for furnishing or manufacturing of the pipes, for
hauling and installing, for bedding and jointing, and for all other headwalls
and other structures are excluded from the payment prescribed herein. Final
payment shall not exceed the total amount for this work item shown in the
Proposal Schedule.
When the Proposal Schedule does not provide separate payment for work
herein specified, full compensation therefore shall be considered as included
in the lump sum contract price for Exterior Drainage System within the
purview of items PS 100.
1.6 ROADWAYS AND PAVING
1.6.1 GENERAL
Whenever Roadways and Paving are called for in the Plans, the Contractor
shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals for the
construction of new pavement, sidewalks, gutters and curbs, and for the
restoration of existing pavement, sidewalks, gutters and curbs, as shown on the
Drawings and as specified herein. The Construction Officer may direct the
Contractor to excavate and repave additional areas to those indicated.
1.6.2 STANDARD SPECIFICATION REFERENCE
Except as otherwise specified herein, materials and construction shall be in

accordance with the “Republic of the Philippines, Department of Public
Highways, General Specifications for Roads and Bridges, 1976.”
ASTM D1559 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixture Using

Marshall Apparatus.
1.6.3 MATERIALS
Granular subbase and base course materials shall be as specified under Items
300, 301, and 302 of the General Specifications. Grading requirements shall
be as follows:
150
Sub-base Standard Sieve Size Percent Passing
75.00 mm 100
37.50 mm 80 - 100
9.50 mm 45 - 100
4.75 mm 30 - 85
2.00 mm 15 - 65
0.425 mm 5 - 35
0.075 mm 0 - 15
Base Standard Sieve Size Percent Passing

25.00 mm 100
19.00 mm 75 - 100
7.75 mm 40 - 60
2.00 mm 25 - 45
0.425 mm 2 - 25
0.075 mm 5 - 12
Concrete shall meet the requirements for structural concrete.
For asphalt concrete, under Item 401 of General Specifications, aggregate

grading shall be Class B. Test specimens of the job-mix formula shall be
prepared and tested in accordance with the design procedures given for the
Marshall Method of Mix design, and shall meet the requirements given below
when tested in accordance with ASTM D1559.
Marshall Stability N 3300 min

Flow, 0.25 mm 8 - 46
Percent voids in total mix 3-5
Use 75-blows/end compaction
The job-mix formula shall be submitted for the Construction Officer’s

approval that may change the aggregate grading and bitumen content to
improve the quality of the mix.
For Gravel surfacing material, under Item0 407 of General Specifications 1

grading requirements shall be as follows:
Standard Sieve Size Percent Passing

25.00 mm 100
19.00 mm 85 - 100
9.50 mm 60 - 100
4.75 mm 50 - 85
2.00 mm 40 - 70
0.425 mm 25 - 45
0.075 mm 10 - 25
151
1.6.4 WORKMANSHIP
a. SUBGRADE
Following clearing, grubbing and preparation stripping of topsoil the
subgrade shall be prepared by sprinkling and rolling with a steel roller
until the subgrade is completed to 90 percent of optimum. Subgrade in cut
areas shall be scarified to a depth of 0.15 m and recompacted at a moisture
content slightly above the optimum.
Areas that require common fill to raise to sub-grade elevations shown on

the Drawings shall be filled except that no lift shall be thicker than 150
mm.
Where existing sub-grade materials have been disturbed, or are in the

opinion of the Construction Officer unsuitable for subgrade, the materials
shall be removed as directed and shall be replaced with common fill and
shall be compacted.
No subbase material for new restored pavement shall be placed until the
Construction Officer has inspected and approved the subgrade.
b. SUBBASE AND BASE COURSE MATERIALS

Aggregate Base Course shall be placed and compacted as shown on the
Drawings, and as required in - Aggregate Base Course.
The finish base course shall not vary more than 1.5 centimeters above or
below the set grade at any point. Any area that does not conform to the
grading requirements shall be reworked and recompacted.
c. PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

See - Portland Cement Concrete Pavement.
d. SIDEWALKS
All sidewalks disturbed during the course of the work shall be restored to
their original condition. New sidewalks shall be 21 Map concrete.
New concrete pavement shall be in accordance with - Concrete of the
General Specifications.
Concrete pavement to be removed shall be up to vent lines cut by an

abrasion saw. Where existing reinforcing steel is removed it shall be
replaced with equivalent steel bars.
Concrete curbs and gutters shall be constructed as indicated on plans. All
exposed concrete edges shall be finished with an edging tool having a 1-
cm radius.
152
1.7 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER
1.7.1 GENERAL
Whenever indicated in the plans, this work shall consist of concrete curb or
combined curb and gutter, constructed at the locations and to the dimensions,
shape shown on the drawings and specified herein or as directed by the
Construction Officer.
1.7.2 MATERIAL
Concrete shall be of the class of strength shown on the drawings and shall
conform to the requirements of Plain and Reinforced Concrete. Pre-molded
filler for expansion joints shall conform to the specifications of AASHO M-33
and poured filler for intermediate construction joints shall be of mixed asphalt
and mineral filler or mixed asphalt and rubber filler conforming to the
specifications of AASHO M-89, with asphalt having a penetration (77oF,
100gr., 5 specs.) within the range of 30 to 50 and a softening point of not less
than the range of 30 to 50 and a softening point of not less than 90 oC (200oF).
Steel reinforcement, if any, shall conform to the specifications of ASTM
Designation: A615, Grade 40.
1.7.3 WORKMANSHIP
Formwork for concrete placing shall be constructed upon the prepared base
previously completed in accordance with the requirements of Aggregate Base
Course. Forms shall be smooth on the side placed next to the concrete and
shall have a true smooth upper edge. The depth of forms for back of curbs
shall be equal to the full depth of the curb, and the depths of the face of the
forms for curbs shall be equal to the full-face height of the curb. Forms shall
be rigid enough to withstand the pressure of fresh concrete without distortion,
and shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with form oil to prevent adherence
of concrete. Setting of forms shall conform to the required dimensions and to
the alignment and grade shown on the drawings. Stakes shall be positioned to
hold the form rigidly in place and clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be
additionally placed where necessary to enhance rigidly in the forms. Benders
or thin plank forms cleaned together may be used on curves, grade changes, or
for curb returns. In constructing curbs, entrances shall be provided for
driveways, with dimensions shown on the drawings or designated by the
Construction Officer. Dowels and reinforcements shall be of the size, shape
and spacing shown on the drawings.
The curb and gutter shall be constructed in uniform segments not more than 5
meters in length, except where shorter segments are required to coincide with
the location of weakened plane or contraction joints in the adjacent concrete
pavement, or for closure, but no segment shall be less than 2 meters long. The
poured joint shall be formed by sheet templates that will give the required
joint thickness and that are cut to the cross-section of the curb or the combined
curb or gutter. The templates are set carefully normal to the line of curb and
to plane of gutter and held firmly in place until the concrete has set sufficiently
153
to hold its shape. They are removed shortly after the curb face form is
removed, but before all the other forms are removed. Expansion joints shall
be formed with pre-molded joint maternal, likewise placed normal to line or
curb and to plane of gutter, cut and shaped to the cross-section of the curb and
gutter, and positioned at locations shown on the drawings.
Concrete shall be placed and consolidated in the forms without segregation.

Prior to the removal of the forms, the surface of concrete shall be shaped true
to grace by means of a straight edge float preferably 3 meters long, operated
longitudinally over the surface of the concrete. For clamps and braces shall
have been so positioned as not to interfere with the operation of this float.
Immediately after the removal of the front curb forms, the face of the curb
shall be floated and trowelled smooth. No plastering will be permitted and the
finishing shall be accomplished by simply floating the green concrete,
accompanied by careful wetting. Minor defects shall be repaired with mortar
containing one part Portland cement and two parts of fine aggregate. Corners
and edges shall be rounded to the radii shown on the drawings. Surface
irregularities in excess of 6 millimeters in 3 meters shall be considered as
cause for rejection of segment, which shall be removed and replaced without
additional cost to the government.
Removal of the rest of the forms may be done after 24 hours that the concrete
is placed, but proper protection shall be made by the Contractor to prevent
injury or damage to the finished concrete. After finishing and sufficient
hardening to the concrete curb or the combined concrete curb and gutter,
curing shall be immediately done by any method specified under Plain and
Reinforced Concrete. Backfilling next to the curb shall be performed and paid
for under the provisions of Filling and Backfilling.
1.7.4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT
For purposes of progress payments, the quantity to be paid for shall be the
total length in linear meters of concrete curb and gutter, completed and
measured in place. Measurement shall be made along the face of the curb,
whether the portion being measured is straight or curved. No deductions shall
be made for flattening of curbs at entrances.
The quantity of curb or combined curb and gutter as measured above shall be
paid for purposes of progress payments only at the unit price bid per linear
meter, in which price and payment shall constitute full compensation for all
materials, labor, plant, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete
the work. Inclusive of form work, concrete placing, finishing, shaping, curing,
joining, etc. Final payment shall not exceed the total amount for this work
item as shown in the Proposal Schedule.
154
ITEM II. CONCRETE WORKS
2.1 CONCRETE
2.1.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
necessary for the construction of all concrete work including reinforcing steel,
forms, water stops and miscellaneous related items such as wall sleeves,
anchor bolts and embedded items specified under other sections.
2.1.2 STANDARD SPECIFICATION REFERENCE
The following Standards are referred to:
ASTM C31 Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C33 Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C39 Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
ASTM C42 Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete
ASTM C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C143 Slump of Portland Cement Concrete
ASTM C150 Portland Cement
ASTM C231 Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
ASTM C260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Form Work
2.1.3 GENERAL PROVISION
Concrete shall be site mixed or transit-mixed as produced by a plant

acceptable to the Construction Officer.
When a small mixer is used, concrete placed under such conditions shall be
mixed for not less than 1½ minutes after all the materials are in the mixer
drum.
All testing shall comply with the latest applicable ASTM test Methods (ASTM
C31 and ASTM C39). Samples of aggregate and concrete as placed will be
subjected to laboratory tests and all materials incorporated in the Work shall
conform to the approved samples.
155
2.1.4 PRODUCTS
a. MATERIALS
a.1 Cement
Cement shall be Portland cement of a brand approved by the
Construction Officer and conforming to ASTM C150. Type I
or Type II.
a.2 Aggregates
Fine Aggregate shall be washed inert natural sand conforming
to ASTM C33, and shall range in size within the following
limits of US Standard Sieve sizes.
Sieve Designation Percent (%) Passing
4.75mm (No.4) 95 -100

2.36mm (No.8) 80 -100
1.18mm (No.16) 45 - 70
300 micron (N0.50) 15 - 30
150 micron (No.100) 3- 8
Maximum silt content - 2 percent
Coarse aggregate shall be well-graded crushed stone or

washed gravel conforming to ASTM C33, having the
following maximum size:
25mm - for plain concrete
20mm - for reinforced concrete sections
Maximum silt content - 1 percent
a.3 Water
Water shall be potable, clean and free from deleterious amounts
of acids, alkalis, oils or organic matter.
a.4 Admixtures
Approved water reducing agent conforming for Ready to
ASTM C494. Type A or D shall be used and shall entrain 3.0
to 5.0 percent air in the resultant concrete. Proportioning and
mixing shall be as recommended by the manufacturer.
No other admixtures will be permitted except that an air

entraining admixture, as a moderate addition to the water
reducing agent may be employed if the water reducing agent
does not give 3.0 to 5.0 percent air, but only with prior
approval of the Construction Officer. Such air-entraining
admixture shall comply with ASTM C260 and shall be
compatible with the water reducing agent and have no chemical
reaction between them in one solution.
156
The total entrained air measured at the discharge from the truck
shall be a maximum 3.0 percent for finished slabs and 3.5 to
5.0 percent for all other concrete. Air shall be measured in
accordance with the Pressure Method. ASTM C231.
If pumping concrete is approved by the Construction Officer

then additional admixtures maybe submitted for the approval.
a.5 Grout
Where a non-shrink or expanding type grout be called for in the
Drawings or specified herein an “expandable” compound, as
approved by the Construction Officer, will be added to the
cement grout mixture.
b. QUALITY OF CONCRETE
The actual development of mix proportions composed of Portland

cement, admixtures, aggregates and water to produce concrete which
conforms to the specific requirements shall be determined by means of
prior laboratory tests performed by the Contractor with the approved
constituents to be used in the Work.
b.1. Proportioning
Well advance of placing any concrete, the Contractor shall
discuss with the Construction Officer the source of materials
and concrete mixture he proposes to use. Representative
samples of aggregate and cement and their test results shall be
furnished to the Construction Officer.
The Contractor shall allow ample time to develop a proposed

design mix or to modify the proposed design mix within the
limits of these Specifications whenever, in the opinion of the
Construction Officer, it becomes necessary or desirable.
The following minimum compressive strengths, water cement
ratios and cement factors as indicated in Table A shall apply for
regular and pumped concrete.
TABLE A
Minimum Maximum Net Minimum Installation

Compressive Water Content (2) Cement Content
Strength at 28 (Litres/100kg (3) (kg/M3)
Days (MPa) (1) Cement)
Concrete Fill 17 62.0 260
All Structural 21 55.0 320

Concrete
157
Consistency of the concrete as measured by the requirements of
ASTM C143 shall be as shown in Table B below:
TABLE B
Type of Structure Slump (mm)
Recommended Range
Pavement and slabs on ground 50 25-75
Plain footings, gravity walls, slabs and 50-75 25-100

beams
Heavy reinforced foundation walls and 50-75 50-100

footings
Thin reinforced walls and columns 75 75-100
No excessively wet concrete will be permitted. Concrete

delivered to the site having a slump in excess of that specified
in Table B will be rejected.
The temperature of the concrete, at the time of placement shall

normally be 30oC or below, but shall never exceed 32oC. Any concrete
delivered to the site of placement having a temperature above 32 oC
will be rejected. The Contractor will be responsible for employing
whatever measures necessary to comply with these temperature
requirements.
c. FORM WORK
The contractor shall design, furnish and install all form works and
supports required to confine the concrete and shape it to the lines
shown in the Drawings. Forms will be required for any concrete
surface that slopes more than 15o from the horizontal. Form design
shall conform to ACI 347. Forms shall have sufficient strength to
withstand the pressure resulting from placement and vibration of the
concrete and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from
the concrete.
Forms shall be made of either steel or new approved lumber and shall
be free from roughness and imperfections.
Steel forms, if used shall be steel plate not less than 4mm thick. All
bolt and rivet heads shall be countersunk. Clamps, pins or other
connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together
and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. The joints
between the metal sheets shall be smooth and as nearly perfect as
practicable. Use of forms with dents, buckled areas or other surface
158
irregularities, or the burning of holes for form ties will not be
permitted.
Form ties encased in concrete, other than those specified in the

following paragraph, shall be designed such that after removal of the
projecting part, no metal shall be within 25mm of the face of the
concrete. That part of the tie to be removed shall be at least 12.5mm in
diameter, or shall be provided with a wood or metal cone with at least
12.5mm in diameter and 25mm long. Form ties in concrete exposed to
view shall be the cone-washer type. Through bolts or common wire
shall not be used for from ties.
Form ties exposed exterior walls shall be as specified in the preceding

paragraph except that the cones shall be of approved wood of plastic.
The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the adequate design
of all forms. However, any forms which in the opinion of the
Construction Officer are unsafe or inadequate in any respect may at
anytime be condemned by the Construction Officer, additional forms
are necessary to maintain the progress schedule, such additional forms
shall be provided by the Contractor at his own expense.
An approved colorless mineral fill conforming to ASTM D1500, free

of kerosene and with a viscosity of not less than 250 seconds at 100
Fahrenheit and a flash point not less than 300oF.
2.1.5 EXECUTION
a. MIXING OF CONCRETE
Mixing of ready-mixed or transit-mixed concrete shall conform to

ASTM C94, and the requirements herein, and as approved by the
Construction Officer. The Contractor shall furnish a statement to the
Construction Officer for his approval, giving the dry proportions to be
used, with evidence that these will produce concrete of the quality
specified.
Ready-mixed or transit-mixed concrete shall be transported to the site

in watertight agitator or mixer trucks, which shall be loaded and in
excess of the rated capacities for the respective condition stated on the
nameplate. Discharge at the site shall be within 1 hour after the
cement was first introduced into the mix. Retampering, that is, mixing
with or without additional cement, aggregate, or water to the concrete,
which has, partially hardened will not be permitted.
Trucks shall be dispatched from the batching plant so that they will
arrive at the site just before the concrete is required, to avoid excessive
mixing while waiting, or delays in placing successive layers of
concrete in the forms.
159
In the event the Contractor is unable to deliver mixed concrete to the
work site within the period specified above, a “Dry-mix” method may
be employed upon prior approval of the Construction Officer. If a
“Dry-mix” method of concrete production is to be used, water tanks,
water pumping and metering facilities required for addition of water to
the trucks upon arrival at or near the work site shall be provided.
b. FORMS
Formwork shall be adequately braced tied to prevent movement. All

shoring shall be periodically checked to ensure that member have not
been dislodged or loosened during concrete placement. No wooden
spreaders will be allowed in the concrete.
Forms shall be thoroughly cleaned before using and shall be treated

with non-staining oil or other approved material and allowed to dry
before placement of the reinforcement steel.
Molding or bevels shall be built into the forms to produce a 20mm

chamber on all exposed projecting corners.
Forms for walls shall have removable panels at the bottom for
cleaning, inspection and scrubbing-in of bonding paste. The size,
number and location of such panels shall be subject to the approval of
the Construction Officer. Alternative method for ensuring bonding to
previously placed concrete may be used only his prior written
approval.
Before form material is reused, all surfaces in contact with concrete

shall be thoroughly cleaned, all damaged places repaired, all projecting
nails withdrawn, and all protrusions smoothen.
c. PLACING OF CONCRETE
No concrete shall be placed until the forms, reinforcement steel, pipes

conduits, sleeves, anchors and other embedded items have been
inspected and approved by the Construction Officer. The Contractor
shall advise the Construction Officer of his readiness to proceed at
least 12 hours prior to each placement of concrete. No concrete shall
be placed except in the presence of a duly authorized representative of
the Construction Officer.
Pipe, conduits, dowels and other ferrous items required to the

embedded in the concrete construction shall be positioned and
supported prior to the placement of concrete such that there will be a
minimum of 50mm clearance between said items and any part of the
concrete reinforcement. Securing such items in position by wiring or
welding it to reinforcement will not be permitted.
160
Before depositing any concrete, all debris, dirt and water shall be
removed from the forms. The surfaces of previously placed concrete,
such as vertical or horizontal construction joints, shall be roughened,
cleaned of foreign matter and laitance to expose a fresh face and
saturated with water at least two hours before and again shortly before
the new concrete is placed. Immediately before the new concrete is
placed, wherever possible, all hardened surfaces shall receive a
thorough coating of neat cement slurry mixed to the consistency of
very thick paste at least 5mm thick which shall first be well scrubbed-
in by means of stiff bristle brushes. The new concrete then shall be
placed before the neat cement sets up.
Concrete which upon or before placing is found not to conform to the

requirements specified herein shall be rejected and immediately
removed from the work. Concrete which is not placed in accordance
with these specifications or which is of inferior quality, as determined
by the Construction Officer, shall be removed and replaced by and at
the expense of the Contractor.
Unless specifically approved in writing by the Construction Officer,

concrete shall not be placed in water or stay submerged within 24
hours after placing, except for curing, nor shall running water be
permitted to flow over concrete surfaces within 4 days after the placing
of concrete.
Concrete shall be uniformly placed as near as possible to its final
location in the forms. The placing of concrete in forms shall not
exceed 0.60 meter of vertical rise per hour. The spreading of mounds
of concrete with vibrators or by shoveling will not be permitted. Each
lift shall be completed with an approximately horizontal upper plastic
surface.
Chutes for conveying concrete shall be of metal, U-shaped and

provided with a baffle plate at the end to prevent segregation. Chutes
shall be placed at an angle of not less than 25 degrees, or more than 45
degrees from horizontal, and shall be kept clean and free from
hardened concrete. Maximum length of chute to b traveled by the
plastic concrete shall not be more than 1.50 meters. Chutes, hoppers,
spouts, etc., shall be thoroughly cleaned before and after each run, and
the water and debris discharged outside the Formwork.
Pumping of concrete will be permitted only with the approval of the

Construction Officer, and under the following conditions:
1. The Construction Officer will inspect the pumping

equipment and hose prior to placement of concrete. Any
equipment, hose, or appurtenances not functioning properly, or
which are otherwise unacceptable to the Construction Officer
shall be replaced before pumping operations are started.
161
2. A fully operable standby complete concrete pumping unit
shall be available at the site during any pumping of concrete.
3. The minimum diameter of hose or conduit shall be 100mm.
4. Aluminum conduits for conveying of concrete will not be

permitted.
In the walls or columns of considerable height, the concrete shall be

placed in such a manner as to prevent segregation and accumulation of
hardened concrete on the forms or the reinforcement steel located
above the concrete mass. In no case shall the free fall of concrete be
permitted to exceed 1.50 meters below the ends of hoppers, chutes,
ducts, tremies, hoses or “windows” in wall forms, without special
approval of the Construction Officer.00
Where water stop type construction joints are provided, special care
shall be taken to ensure that the concrete is properly worked by rotting
and vibration around the water stops to produce watertight joints,
particularly in the case of horizontal water stops in slabs where the
concrete must be in complete contact with the underside surfaces
before any concrete is poured on the upper surfaces of the water stop.
Water stops shall be accurately positioned and securely held in place,

and shall be protected at all times to prevent damage or displacement.
Any damage to, or displacement of water stops shall be corrected by
the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Construction Officer.
d. TAMPING AND VIBRATING
During and immediately after depositing the concrete, compaction

shall be carried out by experienced operators using high-speed internal
mechanical vibrators. Care shall be taken to ensure that vibration is
continued long enough to produce optimum consolidation but without
permitting segregation of the aggregates or migration of air.
At least one vibrator shall be used for every 8 cubic meters of concrete
placed per hour and, in addition, two spare vibrators in operating
condition shall be available on the site.
Vibrators including suitable tamping bars or forked tools shall be

supplemented by proper wooden spade pudding adjacent to forms and
rodding around embedded fixtures to remove trapped air bubbles, and
to prevent honeycombing.
e. CURING AND PROTECTION
It is the intent of these Specifications and to obtain properly cured

concrete. The Protection basic requirement of proper curing is to
maintain continuous moist surface from the time of placing the
162
concrete until the end of curing period. All details of the Contractor’s
curing procedures and materials used shall be subject to the
Construction Officer’s approval. The use of curing compounds may be
acceptable but shall require prior approval in writing by the
The Contractor shall protect all concrete work against injury from the
elements and defacements of by nature during construction operations.
All exposed surfaces including finished surfaces shall be treated

immediately after concrete has been poured, to provide continuous
moist curing for at least 7 days. Walls and vertical surfaces may be
covered with continuously saturated burlap or kept moist by other
approved means. Horizontal surfaces, slabs, etc., shall be pounded to a
depth of 15mm or kept continuously wet by means of sprinklers or
other approved methods.
Formed surfaces shall be thoroughly soaked with water at least twice

each day until the forms are removed.
Where finishing of concrete surfaces is performed before the end

curing period, the concrete shall under no circumstances be permitted
to dry out and shall be kept continuously damp by means of a fog spray
of water from the time the concrete has been placed until the end of the
curing period.
f. REMOVAL OF FORMS
The Contractor shall not remove any forms for at least 48 hours or
until the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30 percent of the
ultimate strength. This is equivalent to approximately 50 day-degrees
of moist-curing. Day-degree represents the total number of day’s
times the average daily air temperature in oC at the surface of the
concrete, e.g. 2 days at an average temperature of 25oC equals 50 day-
degrees.
Forms for beams and slabs shall not be stripped for at least 150 day-
degrees and supports shall not be removed until the concrete has
attained at least 60 percent to the specified 28-day strength and is
capable of safely supporting its own weight. Construction live loads
shall not be placed upon it until the concrete has attained its specified
28-day strength.
Forms shall be stripped such that they will not damage the concrete.
Notwithstanding the specified minimum stripping times mentioned
above the Contractor is ultimately responsible for the safely of all
structures.
163
g. REPAIR OF DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
Defective or honeycombed areas, as determined by the Construction

Officer, shall be chipped down to at least 25mm deep into sound
concrete by means of chisels or chipping hammers. If honeycombs
around reinforcement steel, a clear space at least 10mm wide shall be
chipped all around the steel.
For areas than 40mm deep, the patch may be made for filling form tie
holes, etc.
Thicker repairs will required build-up in successive 40mm deep meters

on successive days, and each layer shall be applied with neat cement
paste as described in paragraph 2 above.
For very deep patches the Construction Officer may order the use of a
non-shrink grout, with or without the addition of pea gravel. The
materials shall be composed of 1 to 1½ cement/sand mortar without
non-shrink grout components to prevent rust staining of the surface.
After hardening, the patch shall be rubbed as for filling form-tie voids.
All exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by spilling

or leakage of concrete shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the
All cracks that appear in the concrete prior to acceptance of the work
shall be “veed” and filled with sealant.
h. EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE
After the removal of the forms any concrete, judged by the

Construction Officer as defective and beyond repair, shall be rejected,
demolished and replaced with new concrete in a manner acceptable to
the CO. The evaluation and acceptance of concrete shall be in
accordance with Chapter 17 of ACI Standard 301.
i. INSPECTION
Installation of reinforcing steel, pipes, sleeves, anchors and other

embedded items, batching, mixing, transportation, placing, curing and
finishing of concrete shall at all times be subject to the inspection of
the Construction Officer.
No concrete shall be placed without prior notice to and approval of the
164
j. FIELD CONTROL
Sets of four (4) field control cylinder specimens will be taken at

random by the Construction Officer, in conformity with ASTM C31.
Generally, approximately one (1) per 50 cubic meters, but not less than
one (1) set per day will be made during concreting operations.
Two (2) cylinders will be tested after 7 days and two cylinders after 28
days. Compressive tests, in accordance with the Standard test
described in ASTM Method C39, will be performed by a laboratory
acceptable to the owner, and paid directly by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall provide the concrete for the test cylinders and
such auxiliary personnel and equipment needed to take the test
specimens.
k. FIELD TESTING
Should the average strength of the 28-day test specimens be less than
that specified in Table A, the Construction Officer may require drilled
core samples from the portion of the structure which was determined
by him to represent the deficient 28-day test specimens.
If the strength of any of the drilled core samples is less than the
minimum requirements shown in Table A, the Construction Officer
may direct the Contractor to strengthen or replace the portions of the
structure concerned at the Contractor’s expense, and the Construction
Officer’s satisfaction
Drilled core samples shall be taken and tested in accordance with

ASTM C42 except that they shall have an L/D ratio of not less than
1.25 prior to capping for testing. All core samples so tested shall be
tested in a saturated state.
All costs associated with the cutting and preparing of drilled core
samples shall be done by the Contractor. Testing of the drilled core
samples shall be at the expense of the Contractor.
Slump tests, entrained air measurements, temperature, and testing of

admixtures will be made in the field by the contractor at his own
expense in the presence of the Construction Officer.
2.2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
2.2.1 GENERAL
a. SCOPE OF WORK
The Contractor shall furnish, fabricate and install all steel bar and tie
wire, clips, supports, chairs and spaces required for the reinforcement
of concrete, as shown on the Drawings and/or specified herein.
165
b. STANDARD SPECIFICATION REFERENCE
The following Standards are referred to:
ASTM A82 Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement

ASTM A497 Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A615 Deformed Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM 315 Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced
Concrete Structures
c. SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit three (3) sets of completely detailed
working drawings and schedules of all reinforcement for review to the
CO. The bending diagrams and bar lists shall be detailed in
accordance with ACI 315.
Fabrication of reinforcement steel shall not proceed until the

construction joint locations and the shop drawings have been reviewed
by the CO and returned to Contractor marked “No comment”.
d. SUBSTITUTIONS
The following reinforcing steel bar sizes shall be used for all
reinforced concrete design under this Contract:
Bar Designation Approximate Cross Approximate

Section Area (mm2) Unit Weight
(kg/m)
#10 78 0.616
#12 113 0.888
#16 201 1.579
#25 492 3.854
#28 615 4.833
#32 804 6.313
#36 1018 7.991
Should the Contractor wish to use reinforcing steel bars having areas
different from those shown (with consequent different designations),
the following requirements shall apply.
If the proposed substitute bar has an area from 97% to 105% of the
designated bar, a direct substitution may be made without changes to
bar spacing.
If the proposed substitute bar has an area less than 97% of the
designated bar, the substitution may be unacceptable without changes
166
in bar spacing. If the proposed substitute bar has an area more than
105% of the designated bar, changes in spacing may be proposed by
the Contractor. Changes in spacing are limited to a maximum spacing
of 300mm. All proposed changes shall be submitted to the CO for
approval.
Proposed changes spacing shall be submitted to the CO for

consideration by way of the reinforcing arrangement drawings
required as shop drawings. These should not be prepared until
the CO’s sanction in principle to the substitution has been
obtained and the CO’s guidelines received on such related
criteria as maximum and minimum spacing and bond
requirements.
Approval by the CO of bar size substitution does not relieve the

Contractor from other specified requirements including steel
grade and bar deformations.
2.2.2 PRODUCTS
a. MATERIALS
Reinforcement steel shall be deformed, new billet steel bars
conforming to ASTM A615, grade 40 substantially free from mill
scale, rust, grease or other foreign matter.
Rail-steel bars will not be permitted in the work.
Reinforcement steel shall bear a mill identification symbol, and shall

be tagged with the size and mark number so that different types may be
identified and shall be stored off the ground to protect the steel
moisture and dirt, until placed in final position.
Steel wire for tying reinforcing and waterstops shall conform to ASTM
A82.
Welded wire fabric for concrete reinforcement shall conform to ASTM
A497. Welded intersections shall be spaced no further apart than 40cm
in the direction of the principal reinforcement.
2.2.3 EXECUTION
a. FABRICATION OF REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcement steel shall be accurately formed to the dimensions
shown on the shop drawings and bar schedules.
All reinforcing bars shall be bent cold around a pin with a free
revolving collar having a diameter proportional to the diameter of the
bar of not less than the following:
a. Two times for stirrups.

b. Six times for bars up to and including 25mm diameter.
167
c. Eight times for bars over 25mm diameter.
Reinforcement steel shall not be straightened nor rebent. Bars with
kinks or bends not shown on the Drawings will not be accepted.
b. INSTALLATION OF REINFORCEMENT
Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed as shown on the Drawings
and in accordance with the shop drawings and schedules. The
reinforcing bars shall be secured against displacement with annealed
iron wire ties of minimum 1.5mm diameter or suitable clips at the
intersections.
Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings, reinforcement steel

shall be installed with a clearance for concrete cover follows:
b.1 Concrete placed directly on earth 75mm

b.2 Formed surfaces in contact with the
soil, water or exposed to the water 50mm
b.3 Concrete cover of main reinforcement
steel for columns and beams 50mm
b.4 Walls not in contact with the soil,
water or exposed to the weather 40mm
b.5 Underside of slabs over water surfaces
but not in contact with the water 50mm
b.6 All other slab surfaces 25mm
No reinforcing bars shall be welded.
All reinforcing bars in slabs shall be supported on concrete cubes or

chairs of the correct height, containing soft steel wires embedded
therein for fastening to the reinforcement steel. Such spacers or chairs
shall have a minimum compressive strength of 21 MPa.
Reinforcing bars for vertical surfaces in beams, columns and walls

shall be properly and firmly positioned from the forms by means of
stainless steel (tipped) boisters or other equal methods approved by the
CO.
Reinforcement steel projecting from structures that are to be concreted

or where concrete has already been poured shall not be bent out of its
correct position.
Lapping of reinforcing bars shall be as indicated on the Drawings.

Before being placed in position, reinforcing bars shall be thoroughly
cleaned of rust, scale, dirt and other coating. When there is delay in
placing of concrete after reinforcing bars are in place, bars shall be re-
inspected and cleaned when necessary.
168
ITEM III. METAL WORKS
3.1 DESCRIPTION
The work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and transportation
required to complete fabrication, delivery and erection of all structural steel indicated
in the drawings and herein specified.
3.2 REFERENCE
The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by
basic designation only, form part of this specification to the extent indicated by the
reference thereto:
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Publications:

Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, dated September 1, 1976.
Manual of Steel Construction - 7th Edition, including Supplements 1,2 and 3.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
B27.2 Plain Washers
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

A27 or A148 Cast Steel
A36 Structural Steel
A53 Steel Pipe
A12-73 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coating on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed
and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, NBA’s and Strips.
A153-73 Zinc-Coating (Hot Dip) on iron and Steel Hardware.
A307-76B Carbon Steel Externally & Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
A325-76C High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, including suitable
Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers.
A550-77 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Structural Tubing in Rounds
and Shapes.
American Welding Society (AWS) Publications:
A5.1 Welding Electrodes
C1.1-75Structural Welding Code
3.3 REQUIREMENT
In conformance with the General Conditions, the Contractor is required to furnish a

certificate from the manufacturer or producer, certifying that all materials or products
delivered to the job site meet the measurements specified herein.
3.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Construction Engineer for approval
in accordance with the General Conditions. Shop Drawings shall consist of all shop
and erection details. All members and connection for any portion of the structure
shown or not shown on the contract drawings shall be detailed by the fabrication and
169
indicated on the shop symbols in accordance with the American Welding Society
(AWS) Structural Welding Code.
3.5 MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements

specified herein and as shown, and shall be the approved products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
Structural Steel shall conform to ASTM A36.
Structural Tubing shall conform to ASTM A500 or A501.
Steel Pipe shall conform to ASTM A53, Grade b.
Cast Steel, except as specified otherwise, and shall conform to ASTM A27 or A148,
as applicable. Castings to be welded shall be of composition suitable for welding
under field conditions.
High Strength Bolts, including Nuts and Washers, shall conform to ASTM A325.
Plain Washers, other those in contact with high strength bolt heads and nuts shall
conform to ASNI Standard B27.2, Type B.
Welding Electrodes and Rods shall conform to AWS A5.1, E60XX series.
Zinc Coating for threaded products shall conform to ASTM A153 and ASTM A123
for structural shapes.
Materials shall be delivered, stored, handled and installed in a manner to protect them
from all damage curing the entire construction period. Storage conditions shall be
approved by the Construction Officer in accordance with the General Conditions.
3.6 FABRICATION
3.6.1 GENERAL
Structural Steelworks material shall be in accordance with the applicable

provisions of these specifications. Fabrications and assembly shall be done in
the shop to the greater extent possible. Structural siteworks, except surfaces of
steel to be encased in concrete and surfaces of friction-type high-strength
bottled connections, shall be prepared for painting in accordance with the
section entitled PAINTING and primed with paint material specified. All
materials shall be cleaned and straight. If straightening is necessary, it shall be
done by a process and in a manner that will not damage the material.
Shearing, Flame cutting, and Chipping, shall be done carefully and accurately.
Flame-cut edges of members shall have all knicks removed. The top and
bottom surfaces of base plates, cap plates of columns and pedestals, sole
plates, and masonry plates shall be planned, or be hot straightened, and parts
of members in contact with them shall be faced. Sole plates of beams and
girders shall have full contact with the flanges. Compression joints, depending
170
upon contact bearing, shall have bearing surfaces machined to a common
plane after the members are completed. Bolts shall not be made or enlarged by
burning. Members that cannot be fitted up properly by cutting with a saw or
by reaming holes to a maximum holes elongation of 3mm larger than the
nominal diameter will be rejected unless other correction is approved by the
Construction Officer. Gas cutting (Flame cutting) shall be done by the use of
mechanically guided torch. The use of a gas torch in the field will not be
permitted on any major member in the structural framing under stress, and
shall be subject to the approval of the Construction Officer. The radius of re-
entrant flame cut fillets shall not be less than 13mm, and all burned edges shall
be finished by grinding.
3.6.2 WELDED CONSTRUCTION
Welding on structural metal works and tubular structures shall be done in

accordance with the applicable standards for welding of AWS Code D1.1.
3.6.2.1 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Welding work shall only be performed by certified welders qualified in

accordance with the requirements of the AWS D1.1.
3.6.2.2 PROCEDURES
Welding procedures, type of electrodes, and type of equipment

required for the work shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions of AWS D1.1. Type of electrodes to be used shall be
compatible with the metal to be welded.
3.6.3 BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
Holes for bolts shall be 1.5mm larger than the nominal diameter of bolt. Holes shall
be clean cut, without torn or rugged edges. Outside burrs resulting from
reaming or drilling shall be removed. Bolt holes shall be at right angles to the
member. The slope of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head shall not
exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Where the surface
of a bolted part has a slope of more than 1:20, a beveled washer shall be used
to compensate for lack of parallelism.
3.6.3.1 COMMON BOLTS
Bolts transmitting shear shall be threaded to which a length that is not more
than one thread will be within the grip of the metal and the bolt shall
be of such length that they will extend entirely through the nuts, with
the beveled end outside of the nut. Bolt heads and nuts shall be drawn
tight against the work with a suitable wrench. Bolt threads shall be
tapped with a hammer while the nut being tightened.
171
3.6.3.2 HIGH-STRENGTH STEEL BOLTS
The allowable working stresses for high-strength steel bolts shall be as given
in ASTM A325. Bolted parts shall not be solidly together when
assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any other
interposed compressible materials. When assembled, all joints
surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolts heads, nuts, or washers,
shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale, and shall also be free of
burrs, dirt, and other foreign material that would prevent seating of the
parts. Contact surfaces within the friction type of joints shall be free
fasteners in the joint are tight, at least the minimum bolt tension shown
in ASTM A325, for the size of fastener used. Threaded bolts shall be
tightened with properly calibrated wrenches or by the “turn-of-the nut”
method. Any bolt tightened by the calibrated wrench method (or by
torque control) shall have a hardened washer under the element (nut or
bolt head) turned tightening.
3.6.3.3 MATCH MARKING
Members and component parts of structures shall be assembled and

matched marked prior to insure accurate assembly and adjustment of
position on final erection. Painted assembly markings shall be removed
from many surfaces to be welded or bolted. Scratch or notch marks
shall be located in a manner that will not affect the strength of the
members or cause concentrations of stress.
3.6.3.4 SHOP PAINTING
Except as otherwise specified, all structural metal works, except zinc-

coated surfaces and steelworks to be embedded in concrete or mortar,
shall be shop primed in accordance with the section entitled
PAINTING.
3.7 ERECTION
3.7.1 GENERAL
Except as modified herein, erection shall be in accordance with the applicable

specifications and standards of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
Erecting equipment shall be suitable for the work and shall be in first class
condition. Safety belts and lines shall be used by workmen aloft on high
structures, unless safe working platforms or safety nets are provided.
3.7.2 ANCHORAGE
Anchor bolts and other connections between the structural steel and
foundations shall be provided and shall be properly located and built into the
connecting work.
172
3.8 BASE AND BEARING PLATES
Base plates for columns and bearing plates for beams, girders and similar members
shall be provided with full bearing after the supported members have been plumbed
and properly positioned. The area under any plate bearing on concrete or masonry
shall be dry-packed solidly with grout.
3.9 ASSEMBLY
All members shall be adjusted to the well planned or bolted and rigidly made together
during final bolting or welding. Drifting done during assembling shall not distort the
metal or enlarge the holes. The member shall be free from twists, bends and other
deformation. The frame of steel structures shall be carried up true and plumb as
shown and shown and all match markings shall be followed.
Temporary bracing shall be used whenever necessary to support all loads to which all
the structure may be subjected and shall be left placed as long may be required for
safety. The various members forming parts of a completed frame or structure after
being assembled shall be aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened.
Fastening of splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces
have been brought completely into contact. No welding or bolting shall be done until
as much of the structure as will be stiffened hereby has been aligned properly.
Bearing surfaces and surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned
before the members are assembled. Bearing plates shall be set in exact position and
shall have a full and even bearing upon the masonry. As erection progresses, the work
shall be bolted or welded sufficiently to take care of all dead load, wind and erection
stresses. Splices will be permitted only where indicated. Erection bolts used in welded
construction may be tightened securely and left in place, unless otherwise indicated.
Field Bolting shall be in accordance with the requirements specified for the shop
fabrication. Unfair holes shall be corrected by reaming.
Field welding shall be as specified for shop fabrication of welded construction. Any
shop paint on surface adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be wire brushed to
reduce the paint film to a minimum.
3.10 FIELD REPAIR OF ZINC COATING
All zinc-coating that has been damaged in handling, transporting, welding or bolting
shall be repaired in accordance with the COATING section entitled PAINTING.
3.11 FIELD PRIMING
After erection, the field bolt heads and nuts, field welds, and any abrasions in the shop
coat shall be cleaned and primed in accordance with the section called PAINTING.
3.12 PAINTING
The type of paint, the number of coats, and the extent of the painting shall be in
conformance with the section entitled PAINTING. In general, all exposed surfaces of
steel work shall be painted. Surfaces where the shop coat has been damaged shall be
retouched using the same system as the original shop painting. Surfaces which will be
173
contact after erection, except when in contact in welded or bolted connections, shall
be given one finish coat or welds and the areas adjacent thereto shall be done
promptly after the acceptance of the weld and shall be as specified under shop
painting.
3.13 INSPECTION
Inspection shall be made promptly to permit immediate correction of defects. The

inspector will mark each piece which is accepted, with the mark assigned to him.
Unrestricted inspection shall be conducted in both shop and field, to verify
preparation, size, gauging, location, acceptability of welds, identification marking and
operation and current characteristics or welding sets in use. The procedure for
calibration of wrenches and installation of bolts shall be subject to the approval of the
Construction Officer. The inspection and testing of welds shall be performed by the
Contractor as deemed necessary by the Construction Officer all at the expense of the
Contractor, and shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS Code
D1.1.
3.14 FINAL CLEAN UP
Upon completion of erection and before final acceptance, the erector shall remove
from the jobsite all false-works, rubbish, and temporary structures furnished by him.
F. CONSTRUCTION OF CHB PERIMETER FENCE
ITEM I. SITEWORKS
See Section E. Construction of Barbed Wire Fence (343.00 l.m.) Item I Siteworks.
ITEM II. CONCRETE WORKS

See Section E. Construction of Barbed Wire Fence (343.00 l.m.) Item II Concrete Works.
ITEM III. MASONRY WORKS

See Section E. Construction of Barbed Wire Fence (343.00 l.m.) Item III Metal Works.
ITEM IV. METAL WORKS
174
4.1 DESCRIPTION
The work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment and transportation
required to complete fabrication, delivery and erection of all structural steel indicated
in the drawings and herein specified.
4.2 REFERENCE
The following publications of the issues listed below, but referred to thereafter by
basic designation only, form part of this specification to the extent indicated by the
reference thereto:
American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Publications:
Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, dated September 1, 1976.
Manual of Steel Construction - 7th Edition, including Supplements 1,2 and 3.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
B27.2 Plain Washers
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:

A27 or A148 Cast Steel
A36 Structural Steel
A53 Steel Pipe
A12-73 Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coating on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed
and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, NBA’s and Strips.
A153-73 Zinc-Coating (Hot Dip) on iron and Steel Hardware.
A307-76B Carbon Steel Externally & Internally Threaded Standard Fasteners.
A325-76C High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, including suitable
Nuts and Plain Hardened Washers.
A550-77 Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Structural Tubing in Rounds
and Shapes.
American Welding Society (AWS) Publications:
A5.1 Welding Electrodes
C1.1-75Structural Welding Code
3.3 REQUIREMENT
In conformance with the General Conditions, the Contractor is required to furnish a

certificate from the manufacturer or producer, certifying that all materials or products
delivered to the job site meet the measurements specified herein.
3.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to the Construction Engineer for approval
in accordance with the General Conditions. Shop Drawings shall consist of all shop
and erection details. All members and connection for any portion of the structure
shown or not shown on the contract drawings shall be detailed by the fabrication and
indicated on the shop symbols in accordance with the American Welding Society
(AWS) Structural Welding Code.
175
3.5 MATERIALS
Materials shall conform to the respective publications and other requirements

specified herein and as shown, and shall be the approved products of manufacturers
regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products.
Structural Steel shall conform to ASTM A36.
Structural Tubing shall conform to ASTM A500 or A501.
Steel Pipe shall conform to ASTM A53, Grade b.
Cast Steel, except as specified otherwise, and shall conform to ASTM A27 or A148,
as applicable. Castings to be welded shall be of composition suitable for welding
under field conditions.
High Strength Bolts, including Nuts and Washers, shall conform to ASTM A325.
Plain Washers, other those in contact with high strength bolt heads and nuts shall
conform to ASNI Standard B27.2, Type B.
Welding Electrodes and Rods shall conform to AWS A5.1, E60XX series.
Zinc Coating for threaded products shall conform to ASTM A153 and ASTM A123
for structural shapes.
Materials shall be delivered, stored, handled and installed in a manner to protect them
from all damage curing the entire construction period. Storage conditions shall be
approved by the Construction Officer in accordance with the General Conditions.
3.6 FABRICATION
3.6.1 GENERAL
Structural Steelworks material shall be in accordance with the applicable

provisions of these specifications. Fabrications and assembly shall be done in
the shop to the greater extent possible. Structural siteworks, except surfaces of
steel to be encased in concrete and surfaces of friction-type high-strength
bottled connections, shall be prepared for painting in accordance with the
section entitled PAINTING and primed with paint material specified. All
materials shall be cleaned and straight. If straightening is necessary, it shall be
done by a process and in a manner that will not damage the material.
Shearing, Flame cutting, and Chipping, shall be done carefully and accurately.
Flame-cut edges of members shall have all knicks removed. The top and
bottom surfaces of base plates, cap plates of columns and pedestals, sole
plates, and masonry plates shall be planned, or be hot straightened, and parts
of members in contact with them shall be faced. Sole plates of beams and
girders shall have full contact with the flanges. Compression joints, depending
upon contact bearing, shall have bearing surfaces machined to a common
176
plane after the members are completed. Bolts shall not be made or enlarged by
burning. Members that cannot be fitted up properly by cutting with a saw or
by reaming holes to a maximum holes elongation of 3mm larger than the
nominal diameter will be rejected unless other correction is approved by the
Construction Officer. Gas cutting (Flame cutting) shall be done by the use of
mechanically guided torch. The use of a gas torch in the field will not be
permitted on any major member in the structural framing under stress, and
shall be subject to the approval of the Construction Officer. The radius of re-
entrant flame cut fillets shall not be less than 13mm, and all burned edges shall
be finished by grinding.
3.6.2 WELDED CONSTRUCTION
Welding on structural metal works and tubular structures shall be done in

accordance with the applicable standards for welding of AWS Code D1.1.
3.6.2.1 QUALIFICATION OF WELDERS
Welding work shall only be performed by certified welders qualified in

accordance with the requirements of the AWS D1.1.
3.6.2.2 PROCEDURES
Welding procedures, type of electrodes, and type of equipment

required for the work shall be in accordance with the applicable
provisions of AWS D1.1. Type of electrodes to be used shall be
compatible with the metal to be welded.
4.6.3 BOLTED CONSTRUCTION
Holes for bolts shall be 1.5mm larger than the nominal diameter of bolt. Holes shall
be clean cut, without torn or rugged edges. Outside burrs resulting from
reaming or drilling shall be removed. Bolt holes shall be at right angles to the
member. The slope of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head shall not
exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Where the surface
of a bolted part has a slope of more than 1:20, a beveled washer shall be used
to compensate for lack of parallelism.
4.6.3.1 COMMON BOLTS
Bolts transmitting shear shall be threaded to which a length that is not more
than one thread will be within the grip of the metal and the bolt shall
be of such length that they will extend entirely through the nuts, with
the beveled end outside of the nut. Bolt heads and nuts shall be drawn
tight against the work with a suitable wrench. Bolt threads shall be
tapped with a hammer while the nut being tightened.
4.6.3.2 HIGH-STRENGTH STEEL BOLTS
The allowable working stresses for high-strength steel bolts shall be as given
in ASTM A325. Bolted parts shall not be solidly together when
assembled and shall not be separated by gaskets or any other
177
interposed compressible materials. When assembled, all joints
surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolts heads, nuts, or washers,
shall be free of scale, except tight mill scale, and shall also be free of
burrs, dirt, and other foreign material that would prevent seating of the
parts. Contact surfaces within the friction type of joints shall be free
fasteners in the joint are tight, at least the minimum bolt tension shown
in ASTM A325, for the size of fastener used. Threaded bolts shall be
tightened with properly calibrated wrenches or by the “turn-of-the nut”
method. Any bolt tightened by the calibrated wrench method (or by
torque control) shall have a hardened washer under the element (nut or
bolt head) turned tightening.
4.6.3.3 MATCH MARKING
Members and component parts of structures shall be assembled and

matched marked prior to insure accurate assembly and adjustment of
position on final erection. Painted assembly markings shall be removed
from many surfaces to be welded or bolted. Scratch or notch marks
shall be located in a manner that will not affect the strength of the
members or cause concentrations of stress.
4.6.3.4 SHOP PAINTING
Except as otherwise specified, all structural metal works, except zinc-

coated surfaces and steelworks to be embedded in concrete or mortar,
shall be shop primed in accordance with the section entitled
PAINTING.
4.7 ERECTION
4.7.1 GENERAL
Except as modified herein, erection shall be in accordance with the applicable

specifications and standards of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction.
Erecting equipment shall be suitable for the work and shall be in first class
condition. Safety belts and lines shall be used by workmen aloft on high
structures, unless safe working platforms or safety nets are provided.
4.7.2 ANCHORAGE
Anchor bolts and other connections between the structural steel and
foundations shall be provided and shall be properly located and built into the
connecting work.
4.8 BASE AND BEARING PLATES
Base plates for columns and bearing plates for beams, girders and similar members
shall be provided with full bearing after the supported members have been plumbed
and properly positioned. The area under any plate bearing on concrete or masonry
shall be dry-packed solidly with grout.
178
4.9 ASSEMBLY
All members shall be adjusted to the well planned or bolted and rigidly made together
during final bolting or welding. Drifting done during assembling shall not distort the
metal or enlarge the holes. The member shall be free from twists, bends and other
deformation. The frame of steel structures shall be carried up true and plumb as
shown and shown and all match markings shall be followed.
Temporary bracing shall be used whenever necessary to support all loads to which all
the structure may be subjected and shall be left placed as long may be required for
safety. The various members forming parts of a completed frame or structure after
being assembled shall be aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened.
Fastening of splices of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces
have been brought completely into contact. No welding or bolting shall be done until
as much of the structure as will be stiffened hereby has been aligned properly.
Bearing surfaces and surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned
before the members are assembled. Bearing plates shall be set in exact position and
shall have a full and even bearing upon the masonry. As erection progresses, the work
shall be bolted or welded sufficiently to take care of all dead load, wind and erection
stresses. Splices will be permitted only where indicated. Erection bolts used in welded
construction may be tightened securely and left in place, unless otherwise indicated.
Field Bolting shall be in accordance with the requirements specified for the shop
fabrication. Unfair holes shall be corrected by reaming.
Field welding shall be as specified for shop fabrication of welded construction. Any
shop paint on surface adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be wire brushed to
reduce the paint film to a minimum.
4.10 FIELD REPAIR OF ZINC COATING
All zinc-coating that has been damaged in handling, transporting, welding or bolting
shall be repaired in accordance with the COATING section entitled PAINTING.
4.11 FIELD PRIMING
After erection, the field bolt heads and nuts, field welds, and any abrasions in the shop
coat shall be cleaned and primed in accordance with the section called PAINTING.
4.12 PAINTING
The type of paint, the number of coats, and the extent of the painting shall be in
conformance with the section entitled PAINTING. In general, all exposed surfaces of
steel work shall be painted. Surfaces where the shop coat has been damaged shall be
retouched using the same system as the original shop painting. Surfaces which will be
contact after erection, except when in contact in welded or bolted connections, shall
be given one finish coat or welds and the areas adjacent thereto shall be done
promptly after the acceptance of the weld and shall be as specified under shop
painting.
179
4.13 INSPECTION
Inspection shall be made promptly to permit immediate correction of defects. The

inspector will mark each piece which is accepted, with the mark assigned to him.
Unrestricted inspection shall be conducted in both shop and field, to verify
preparation, size, gauging, location, acceptability of welds, identification marking and
operation and current characteristics or welding sets in use. The procedure for
calibration of wrenches and installation of bolts shall be subject to the approval of the
Construction Officer. The inspection and testing of welds shall be performed by the
Contractor as deemed necessary by the Construction Officer all at the expense of the
Contractor, and shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS Code
D1.1.
4.14 FINAL CLEAN UP
Upon completion of erection and before final acceptance, the erector shall remove
from the jobsite all false-works, rubbish, and temporary structures furnished by him.
180
I. TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A. Scope of Work
This section shall include the mobilization and demobilization of Contractor's plant,
equipment, materials and employee to the site; construction/ rental and maintenance
of Engineer's staff house, and service vehicle in compliance with the contract
requirements during the entire project duration.
This section shall include the furnishing of labor, materials, transportation, tools,
supplies, plant, equipment and appurtenances to complete satisfactorily the
construction of the proposed project.
B. Mobilization and Demobilization
The Contractor upon receipt of the Notice-to-Proceed shall immediately mobilize and
transport his plant, equipment, materials and labor forces to the site and demobilize or
remove the same at the completion of project and level/ clear the site acceptable to the
Engineer and the Owner.
Mobilization and Demobilization are incidental to other items of work and will not be
measured for payment.
C. Facilities for the Engineer’s Staff House
A.1Staff House for the Engineer (DOTr–PMO)
During the performance of the contract, the Contractor shall provide and maintain
field office for the Engineer and Engineer’s representative within the site of the
work at designated location indicated on the Drawings while the work is in
progress.
The Contractor shall also maintain the existing staff house of the Engineer and
shall also provide and maintain a separate office on rental basis for the Engineer’s
Representative at location approved by the Engineer during the entire duration of
the contract.
Construction shanties, sheds and temporary facilities provided as required for the
Contractor's convenience shall be maintained in good condition and neat
appearance including finishes as required by the Engineer.
The field office for the Engineer/Engineer’s representative shall be constructed all
in accordance with the Standard Specification and design shown on the approved
Drawings.
181
The building shall have the floor area prescribed on the Plans and shall have a 24-
hour security services and shall strictly comply with the provisions of Batas
Pambansa 344 (Accessibility Law) and the Building National Code.
All facilities to be provided by the Contractor shall conform to the best standard
for the required types. The facilities provided by the Contractor including utilities
and communication facilities shall revert to the Government including office
equipment, furniture, etc. upon completion of the Project.
The Contractor shall be responsible for raising the ground (if necessary), the
grading and provision of drainage facilities in the vicinity of the facility with
suitable access walkways, seeding and sodding of the ground as directed and
approved by the Engineer. Also, the Contractor shall provide a parking area at the
compound near the building and a satisfactory access road to the parking area. The
Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance and protection of all facilities
to be provided during the entire duration of the Contract including provision of
adequate stock of all expendable items, such as light bulbs, light tubes, laboratory
equipment and supplies, etc., at all times to ensure proper and continuous
functioning of all the Engineer’s facilities.
The buildings shall be provided with air-conditioning system, complete with all
standard accessories which will operate on a 220 volt, 60 cycle, 3-phase current at
the location and quantity/capacity reflected per approved Plans which can cool
and dehumidify the air.
It shall be understood that if the Contractor cannot provide the articles as

described or intends to supply equivalent substitutes, the Engineer may execute
their availability and the Contractor shall pay therefore as certified by the
Engineer or the Engineer shall have the right to deduct the sums from any money
which is due or which will become due to the Contractor.
A.2Temporary Light and Power
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary electrical service including
installation of temporary power and lighting within the construction site and
facilities constructed thereat.
The electrical services shall be adequate in capacity to supply power to

construction tools and equipment without over-loading the temporary facilities
and shall be made available to supply power, lighting and construction operations
of all trades. All temporary equipment and wiring for power and lighting shall be
in accordance with the applicable provisions of the local governing codes. At the
completion of the construction work, all temporary wiring, lighting, equipment
and devices shall be removed.
A.3Temporary Toilets
The Contractor shall provide and maintain in sanitary condition enclosed toilets
for the use of all construction personnel located within the contract limits,
complete with fixtures, water and sewer connections and all appurtenances.
182
Installation shall be in accordance with all applicable codes and regulations of the
local authorities having jurisdiction thereof. Upon completion of the work,
temporary toilet and their appurtenances shall be removed.
A.4Temporary Water Service
The Contractor shall provide and maintain temporary water supply service,
complete with necessary connections and appurtenances. Installed water supply
lines shall be used as a source of water for construction purposes subject to the
approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall pay the cost of operation,
maintenance and restoration of the water system.
All temporary water service including equipment and piping shall be removed
upon completion of the work and all worn out and damaged parts of the
permanent system shall be replaced and restored in first class condition equal to
new.
A.5Security
The Contractor shall provide sufficient security in the construction site to prevent
illegal entry or work damaged during nights; holidays and other period when work
is not executed; and during working hours. The Contractor shall take ample
precautions against fire by keeping away flammable materials, and ensure that
such materials are properly handled and stored. Fires shall not be allowed within
the area of construction, except when permitted by the Engineer.
A.6Disposal Area
The proposed location of disposal area shall be at the site designated by the
Engineer. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to disposed off site all
construction debris and be considered in the preparation of his proposal.
D. Service Vehicle for the Engineer
The Contractor shall provide within ten (10) calendar days after notice to commence
work of service vehicle of at least 2020 model, air-con, in good running condition and
updated registration driven by a competent qualified and experienced driver for the
exclusive use of the Engineer.
The vehicles shall comply in all respects with all relevant Philippine national or local
laws, statutes and regulations. All vehicles shall carry or be fitted with the accessories
as may be prescribed by laws and have comprehensive insurance.
The Contractor shall maintain the vehicles in good running condition and shall be
supplied with appropriate fuel, lubricants and servicing driver at all times as well as
minor repair at all times at his own expense. Provide the minimum liters of fuel per
day indicate on the Specifications - Scope of Work under the Temporary Facilities.
He shall provide equivalent substitute vehicles when taken out of service for
maintenance, repair or any other reason. Unless otherwise specified, the vehicles shall
at the end of the contract become the property of the Procuring Entity.
183
E. Measurement and Payment
A.1Staff House for the Engineer
Maintenance of Staff House for the Engineer

The maintenance of staff house for the Engineer shall include provision of water
and electricity 24 hours daily and shall be paid for from the date the Engineer’s
representative’s occupancy reckoned from the commencement of the Works until
completion of the contract. Unit of measurement and payment is “Month”.
A.2Service Vehicle for the Engineer
Payment of the service vehicle for the Engineer shall be on a rental basis
(“Vehicle-Daily”) from the date the Contractor is supplied with each type of
vehicle until the completion of the Project.
A.3Payment
Payment shall be made under the following pay items included in the Bill of
Quantities. Such payments shall be full compensation for furnishing, maintaining
and insuring against loss of the facilities and equipment specified including
removal and restoration of the site(s). The requirement that ownership of facilities
shall revert to the government shall not apply if such facilities are provided on
rental basis under terms approved by the Procuring Entity.
For all work executed or goods, materials, or services supplied by the Contractor
under lump sum items, the quantities as determined above shall be paid for at the
appropriate contract lump sum unit price as indicated in the Bid Schedule.
UNIT OF
MEASUREMENT
Temporary Facilities
I (Staff House and Service l.s.
Vehicle)
184
II. MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION
2.1 SCOPE OF WORK
This Section includes mobilization, demobilization, assembly and disassembly of

equipment including incidentals necessary to complete the work.
2.2 MOBILIZATION
a. The Contractor shall mobilize and put into operation all equipment to undertake
the Contract.
b. Mobilization s h a l l i n c l u d e t h e t r a n s f e r r i n g t o t h e j o b -sites o f
a l l equipment, supplies and materials, personnel, and all items necessary for the
execution and completion of the work, and shall also include the setting up of all
equipment, instruments and all other plants until rendered operable, subject to the
confirmation of the Engineer.
c. Sufficient supply of spares for the equipment and plants shall be carried on
board the towing/carrying vessels. Equipment/plants encountering breakdowns
must be repaired on site by the most expeditious method possible at no cost to
DOTr. In the event that the equipment/plants call for major repair works that
cannot be undertaken at the site, the Contractor shall replace such equipment /
plants with equal or better performance capacity at no additional mobilization
costs to DOTr and the Contractor shall not be entitled to any time extension.
2.3 DEMOBILIZATION
Demobilization u p o n r e q u e s t o f t h e C o n t r a c t o r a n d a p p r o v e d b y t h e
Engineer, shall include the following:
a. The dismantling, preparation and loading for removal and shipment of all
Contractor's equipment and personnel at each site after completion of the works.
b. Transportation of all the above equipment and materials from each site to the
Contractor's home station or somewhere else outside the sites.
c. Removal of all supplementary markers furnished and installed by the

Contractor, provided that the Engineer has not taken the option to retain the
markers.
d. The cleanup of the Site and the removal of materials, debris, waste, etc., and
making good damages or temporary alterations.
185
2.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Payment for this item includes the expenses incurred by the Contractor for
moving-in of minimum major equipment and/or plant required for the project and
moving out of the same after final acceptance of the work including cleaning-up.
A list of equipment showing the detailed cost for its mobilization and
demobilization works shall be included in the bid amount for this item
III. PROJECT BILLBOARD

See Scope of Work Section G. General Requirements Item III Project Billboard.
IV. HEALTH AND SAFETY
GENERAL GUIDELINES
In compliance with Section 17 of DOLE D.O. No. 13, the implementation of construction
safety shall be considered in all stages of project procurement (design, estimate, and
construction) and its cost shall be integrated to the overall project cost under Pay Item
"SPL- Construction Safety and Health" as a lump sum amount, to be quantified in the
detailed estimate. Likewise, all requirements, provisions, and instructions pertaining to
the implementation of Construction Safety and Health in every project shall be included
in the project bidding documents specifically under the Instructions to Bidders. Further
considering industry practices and applicable government requirements, the following
guidelines are hereby issued to all concerned:
DEFINITION OF TERMS
As used herein, the terms below shall be defined as follows:
A.1 Occupational Safety and Health - As defined is the:
1. Promotion and maintenance of the highest degree of physical, mental, and

social well-being of workers in all occupation;
2. Prevention among its workers of any departures from health caused by
their working conditions;
3. Protection among workers in their employment from risk usually from
factors adverse to health; and,
4. Placing and maintenance of worker in an environment adopted to his/her
psychological ability.
A.2 Occupational Safety and Health Standard (OSHS)
186
By the powers vested in the Department of Labor and Employment under
Article 162 of the Labor Code of the Philippines, the Occupational Safety and
Health Standards (OSHS) was promulgated for the guidance and compliance
of all concerned with the main objective of protecting every workingman
against the dangers of injury, sickness or death through safe and healthful
working conditions, thereby assuring the conservation of valuable manpower
resources and the preservation of loss or damage to lives and properties,
consistent with national development goals and with the State's commitment
for the development of every worker as a complete human being.
Likewise, further described as: rules and regulations implementing Article 162
(Safety and Health Standards), Book IV, Title I, P. 0.442; set of mandatory
OSH standards which codifies all safety orders being enforced prior to its
promulgation; and - contains administrative requirements, general safety and
health rules, technical safety regulations, and other measures to eliminate or
reduce OSH hazards in the work place.
A.3 Construction Safety and Health Standards - shall mean Rule 1410,
Construction Safety and other relevant rules of the Occupational Safety and
Health Standards (as amended) of the Department of Labor and Employment
(DOLE).
A.4 Construction Safety and Health Program - refers to a set of detailed rules to
cover the processes and practices that should be utilized in a specific
construction site in conformity with the OSHS including the personnel
responsible and the penalties for violations thereof.
A.5 Construction Safety and Health Officer - refers to safety personnel or any
employee/worker trained by his employer to implement occupational safety
and health programs in accordance with the provisions of DOLE D.O. No. 13
and the Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHS).
A.6 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and Devices - are equipment and
devices designed to protect employees from workplace injuries or illness
resulting from contact with chemical, radiological, physical, electrical,
mechanical, or other workplace hazards. It also includes variety of devices and
garments such as face shields, safety glasses, hard hats, safety shoes, goggles,
coveralls, gloves, vests, earplugs, respirators, safety harness and lifelines.
PURPOSE
The purpose of these guidelines is to establish a uniform methodology in estimating the

required resources (manpower and equipment) for the implementation of Construction Safety
and Health Standards in the workplace in compliance with the provisions of DOLE D.O. No.
13.
METHODOLOGY
The minimum construction safety and health requirements for project shall be prepared
during the detailed engineering stage.
187
In order to establish a uniform basis for estimating the required quantity of resources
(manpower and equipment) for a project the following methodology shall be used.
C.1 Construction Safety and Health Program (CSHP)

Section 5 of the DOLE D.O. NO.13 provides that every construction project
shall have a suitable Construction Safety and Health Program (CSHP).
For the purpose of these guidelines, all projects regardless of amount, funding
source and mode of implementation shall comply with the minimum safety
and health requirements.
The contractor's proposed CSHP shall be in accordance with DOLE D.O. No.
13, series of 1998 and its Procedural Guidelines to be submitted as part of the
first envelope (Technical Proposal) during the bidding process and later the
winning bidder shall submit the same for approval of the DPWH authority,
subject to concurrence by DOLE-BWC.
For project to be implemented by administration, a CSHP shall also be

prepared by the DPWH Implementing Office in accordance with the
requirements of DOLE D. O. No. 13, s. of 1998 and likewise it shall also be
submitted to DPWH authority for approval and thereafter to be concurred also
by the DOLE-BWC.
The required Construction Safety and Health Program (CSHP) for specific
project shall include but not limited to the following:
1. Composition of the Safety and Health personnel responsible for the proper
implementation of CSHP;
2. Specific safety policies which shall be undertaken in the construction site,
including frequency of and persons responsible for conducting toolbox and
gang meetings;
3. Penalties and sanctions for violations of the Construction Safety and
Health Program;
4. Frequency, content and persons responsible for orienting, instructing and
training all workers at the site with regard to the Construction Safety and
Health Program which they operate; and
5. The manner of disposing waste arising from the construction.
C.2 Construction Safety and Health Organization

To ensure that the Construction Safety and Health Program are observed and
implemented at the project site, at the start of D.O. No. 56 s. 2005
construction, each site shall have an established construction safety and health
organization composed of the following personnel:
1. Safety Engineer/Officer
Section 7.1 of D.O. NO.13 states that "The general contractor must
provide for a full time Officer, who shall be assigned as the General
Construction Safety and Health Officer to oversee full time the overall
management of the Construction Safety and Health Program".
188
Section 7.2 states that " The general contractor must provide for additional
Construction Safety and Health Officer/s in accordance with the
requirements for Safety Man / Officer of Rule 1033, Training and
Personnel Complement, as amended by DOLE D.O. No. 16 depending on
the total number of personnel assigned to the construction project site, to
oversee the effective compliance with the Construction Safety and Health
Program at the site, under the direct supervision of the General
Construction Safety and Health Officer".
For the purpose of these guidelines, and as recommended by DOLE, for

every construction project with 100 and above workers, an accredited
safety officer by DOLE-BWC shall be employed. Only the cost for the
Construction Safety and Health Officer, whether on full time or part time
basis, actually assigned at the construction site shall be included in the cost
estimate.
On the part of the government, the implementing office shall designate as

part of their project staff a Safety Engineer who shall be responsible for
ensuring compliance with the pertinent DOLE Guidelines as well as the
DPWH Guidelines on Occupational Safety and Health during the
execution of the construction. The counterpart safety and health officer of
the contractor shall closely coordinate and report to the government Safety
Engineer.
2. Health Personnel
Rule 1412.01 of OSHS states that "at every construction site there shall be
an organized and maintained medical and dental health service and
personnel' conforming with Rule 1960 Occupational Health Services.
For the purpose of these guidelines only the medical and dental
practitioners actually assigned in the project site and as required on the
above stated Rule shall be included in the total cost of safety.
Manpower rates shall be based on the prevailing rates of such

professionals in the area which is found favorable to the government.
Employment period shall be based on the approved project duration and

shall be adjusted correspondingly as the duration increases/decreases.
3. Personal Protective Equipment and Devices (PPE)

Section 6 (Personal Protective Equipment) of D. O. No. 13 guidelines
states that "every employer shall, at his own expense, furnish his workers
with protective equipment for eyes, face, hands and feet, lifeline, safety
belt/harness, protective shields and barriers whenever necessary by reason
of the hazardous work process or environment, chemical or radiological or
other mechanical irritants of hazards capable of causing injury or
impairment in the function of any part of the body through absorption,
inhalation or physical agent".
189
All Personal Protective Equipment and Devices shall be in accordance
with the requirement of the Occupational Safety and Health Standards
(OSHS) and should pass the test conducted and/or standards sets by the
Occupational Safety and Health Center (OSHC).
For General Construction Work the required Basic PPEs for all workers
shall be Safety Helmet, Safety Gloves and Safety Shoes. Specialty PPEs
shall be provided to workers in addition to or in lieu of the corresponding
basic PPE as the work or activity requires.
4. Signages and Barricades

Construction Safety Signages and Barricades shall be provided as a
precaution and to advice the workers and the general public of the hazards
existing in the worksite.
For road construction signages and barricades, it shall be in accordance
with or in compliance to Department Circular No.9, Series of 2004 (Re:
Road Safety Manuals and Handbooks) particularly on the 'Road Works
Safety Manual.
5. Facilities
Section 16 of DOLE D.O. NO.13 requires that the employer shall provide
the following welfare facilities in order to ensure humane working
conditions;
a. adequate supply of safe drinking water;
b. adequate sanitary and washing facilities;
c. suitable living accommodation for workers, and as may be applicable,
for their families; and
d. separate sanitary, washing and sleeping facilities for men and women
workers.
For the purpose of these guidelines, facilities related to construction safety and health
shall be in accordance with OSH Standards and the manner of costing shall be based
on previously approved guidelines of the Department, duly quantified as a separate
pay item.
C.3 SAFETY AND HEALTH TRAINING
Section 13 of DOLE D.O. No. 13 requires that the contractor shall provide
continuing construction safety and health training to all technical personnel
under his employ.
Costing
In consideration of the cost involved of providing the necessary safety

equipment and manpower for an effective implementation of safety in the
workplace, and in compliance with DOLE D.O. No. 13, with safety as a
separate pay item, the following shall be used as a guide:
190
a. Personal Protective Equipment
The PPEs shall be provided by the Constructor, and its cost shall be duly
quantified and made part of the overall cost of safety and health (SPL).
The use of PPEs shall conform to Rule 1080, Personal Protective
Equipment and Devices of OSHS.
b. Clinical Materials and Equipment

Clinical materials and equipment such as medicines, beds and linens, other
related accessories shall be to the account of the Constructors
implementing the project and shall be in accordance with Rule 1960,
Occupational Health Services of OSHS.
c. Signages and Barricades

The quantities and cost of signages and barricades necessary for a specific
item of work shall be quantified and made part of that particular pay item
of work.
For general signages and barricades not included in specific pay item of
work but necessary for promoting safety in and around the construction
site, the quantities and cost shall be a separate pay item and included in the
overall cost of safety and health (SPL).
d. Facilities
Facilities such as portable toilets, waste disposal, sanitary and washing
facilities, convenient dwellings and office, adequate lighting, and other
facilities related to construction safety and health shall be in accordance
with OSH Standards and previously approved guidelines of the
Department and shall be quantified and the cost thereof be made a separate
pay item under "Facilities for the Engineers" and "Other General
Requirements" as required in the DPWH Standard Specifications.
e. Salaries/wages of Health and Safety Personnel

Labor cost for the medical and safety personnel actually assigned in the
field shall be included in the overall cost of safety and health (SPL).
Duration of employment shall be based on project duration of the
particular project.
f. Safety and Health Training

Cost associated for the provision of basic and continuing construction
safety and health training to all safety and technical personnel shall be
made part of the indirect/overhead cost of the project.
UNIT OF
MEASUREMENT
IV Safety and Health l.s.
V. PERMITS AND CLEARANCES

See Scope of Work Section G. General Requirements Item V. Permits and Clearances.
191
Section VII. Drawings
[The actual Drawings, including site plans, should be attached to this section, or annexed in
a separate folder.]
192
Section VIII. Bill of Quantities
193
BID ANNEX 5
PROPOSAL SCHEDULE
PROJECT TITLE : ANTIQUE AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT C.Y. 2023

SITE DEVELOPMENT AND EXTENSION OF RUNWAY INCLUDING DRAINAGE SYSTEM
LOCATION : San Jose de Buenavista, Antique
(14.1) (14.2) (14.3) (14.4) (14.5) (14.6)

ITEM ITEM OF WORK UNIT QUANTITY UNIT BID AMOUNT
NO. COST
A. STRIP GRADE CORRECTION (STA. 1+430 TO STA. 1+860)

100 Clearing & Grubbing sq.m 69,139.00
102 Excavation and Disposal cu.m. 42,797.00
104 Embankment (from other source) cu.m. 69,249.00
508 Class II Rocks (100-900 kgs./pc.) cu.m 9,783.00
B. CONCRETING OF RUNWAY (STA. 1+430 TO STA. 1+710) - 280m x 45m width

105 Sub-grade Preparation sq.m. 12,600.00
201 Aggregate Base Course (0.30 m. thick) cu.m. 3,780.00
207 Cement Treated Base (0.15 m. thick) cu.m. 1,890.00
311 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement (0.30m thick), 4,500 psi sq.m. 12,600.00
C. CONSTRUCTION OF CONCRETE BOX CULVERT WITH WINGWALLS @ STA. 1+480

102 Excavation and Disposal cu.m 1,881.00
405 Structural Concrete (4,500 psi) l.m. 120.00
4" THICK ASPHALT OVERLAY OF RUNWAY (STA. 1+430 TO STA. 1+710) INCLUDING
D.
SHOULDER GRADE CORRECTION 7.5M WIDTH ON BOTH SIDES
302 Bituminous Tack Coat M.T. 26.00
310 Bituminous Concrete Surface Coarse, Hot-Laid 4" thk sq.m. 12,600.00
SPL-1 Cutting & Removal of Temporary Transition sq.m. 7,200.00
SPL-2 Runway Markings sq.m. 7,811.00
201 Aggregate Base Course (0.3m thk.) - shoulder grade correction cu.m. 1,260.00
E. CONSTRUCTION OF BARBED WIRE FENCE (343 l.m.)

101 Removal of Structures and Obstruction l.m 188.00
I Siteworks cu.m. 20.00
II Concrete Works (3,500 psi) cu.m. 28.00
III Metal Works l.m. 343.00
F. CONSTRUCTION OF CHB PERIMETER FENCE (624 l.m.)

I Siteworks cu.m. 471.00
II Concrete Works (3,500 psi) cu.m. 119.00
III Masonry Works sq.m. 1,282.00
IV Metal Works l.m. 624.00
I Temporary Facilities lot 1.00
II Mobilization & Demobilization lot 1.00
III Project Billboards lot 1.00
IV Health & Safety lot 1.00
V Permits & Clearances lot 1.00
*** nothing follows ***
TOTAL PROJECT COST
194
Section IX. Checklist of Technical and Financial
Documents
195
Checklist of Technical and Financial Documents
I. TECHNICAL COMPONENT ENVELOPE
Class “A” Documents
Legal Documents
⬜ (a) Valid PhilGEPS Registration Certificate (Platinum Membership) (all pages);
Technical Documents
⬜ (e) Statement of the prospective bidder of all its ongoing government and
private contracts, including contracts awarded but not yet started, if any,
whether similar or not similar in nature and complexity to the contract to be
bid; and
⬜ (f) Statement of the bidder’s Single Largest Completed Contract (SLCC) similar
to the contract to be bid, except under conditions provided under the rules;
and
⬜ (g) Philippine Contractors Accreditation Board (PCAB) License;
or
Special PCAB License in case of Joint Ventures;
and registration for the type and cost of the contract to be bid; and
⬜ (h) Original copy of Bid Security. If in the form of a Surety Bond, submit also a
certification issued by the Insurance Commission;
or
Original copy of Notarized Bid Securing Declaration; and
(i) Project Requirements, which shall include the following:
⬜ a. Organizational chart for the contract to be bid;
⬜ b. List of contractor’s key personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project
Engineers, Materials Engineers, and Foremen), to be assigned to the
contract to be bid, with their complete qualification and experience
data;
⬜ c. List of contractor’s major equipment units, which are owned, leased,
and/or under purchase agreements, supported by proof of ownership
or certification of availability of equipment from the equipment
lessor/vendor for the duration of the project, as the case may be; and
⬜ (j) Original duly signed Omnibus Sworn Statement (OSS);
and if applicable, Original Notarized Secretary’s Certificate in case of a
corporation, partnership, or cooperative; or Original Special Power of
Attorney of all members of the joint venture giving full power and authority
to its officer to sign the OSS and do acts to represent the Bidder.
Financial Documents
⬜ (k) The prospective bidder’s audited financial statements, showing, among
others, the prospective bidder’s total and current assets and liabilities,
stamped “received” by the BIR or its duly accredited and authorized
institutions, for the preceding calendar year which should not be earlier than
two (2) years from the date of bid submission; and
⬜ (l) The prospective bidder’s computation of Net Financial Contracting Capacity
(NFCC).
196
Class “B” Documents
⬜ (m) If applicable, duly signed joint venture agreement (JVA) in accordance with
RA No. 4566 and its IRR in case the joint venture is already in existence;
or
duly notarized statements from all the potential joint venture partners stating
that they will enter into and abide by the provisions of the JVA in the
instance that the bid is successful.
II. FINANCIAL COMPONENT ENVELOPE

⬜ (n) Original of duly signed and accomplished Financial Bid Form; and
Other documentary requirements under RA No. 9184

⬜ (o) Original of duly signed Bid Prices in the Bill of Quantities; and
⬜ (p) Duly accomplished Detailed Estimates Form, including a summary sheet
indicating the unit prices of construction materials, labor rates, and equipmentt
rentals used in coming up with the Bid; and
⬜ (q) Cash Flow by Quarter.
197
BID FORM
___________________________________________________________________________
Date : _________________
Project Identification No. : _________________
To: [name and address of Procuring Entity]
Having examined the Philippine Bidding Documents (PBDs) including the

Supplemental or Bid Bulletin Numbers [insert numbers], the receipt of which is hereby duly
acknowledged, we, the undersigned, declare that:
a. We have no reservation to the PBDs, including the Supplemental or Bid Bulletins,

for the Procurement Project: [insert name of contract];
b. We offer to execute the Works for this Contract in accordance with the PBDs;
c. The total price of our Bid in words and figures, excluding any discounts offered
below is: [insert information];
d. The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are: [insert
information];
e. The total bid price includes the cost of all taxes, such as, but not limited to:
[specify the applicable taxes, e.g. (i) value added tax (VAT), (ii) income tax, (iii)
local taxes, and (iv) other fiscal levies and duties], which are itemized herein and
reflected in the detailed estimates,
f. Our Bid shall be valid within the a period stated in the PBDs, and it shall remain
binding upon us at any time before the expiration of that period;
g. If our Bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a Performance Security in the amount

of [insert percentage amount] percent of the Contract Price for the due
performance of the Contract, or a Performance Securing Declaration in lieu of the
the allowable forms of Performance Security, subject to the terms and conditions
of issued GPPB guidelines1 for this purpose;
h. We are not participating, as Bidders, in more than one Bid in this bidding process,
other than alternative offers in accordance with the Bidding Documents;
i. We understand that this Bid, together with your written acceptance thereof
included in your notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between
us, until a formal Contract is prepared and executed; and
1
currently based on GPPB Resolution No. 09-2020
198
j. We understand that you are not bound to accept the Lowest Calculated Bid or any
other Bid that you may receive.
k. We likewise certify/confirm that the undersigned, is the duly authorized
representative of the bidder, and granted full power and authority to do, execute
and perform any and all acts necessary to participate, submit the bid, and to sign
and execute the ensuing contract for the [Name of Project] of the [Name of the
Procuring Entity].
l. We acknowledge that failure to sign each and every page of this Bid Form,
including the Bill of Quantities, shall be a ground for the rejection of our bid.
Name: ___________________________________________________________________
Legal Capacity: ____________________________________________________________
Signature: ________________________________________________________________
Duly authorized to sign the Bid for and behalf of: __________________________________
Date: ___________________
199
Contract Agreement Form (Revised)
[not required to be submitted with the Bid, but it shall be submitted within ten (10) days after receiving the
Notice of Award]
__________________________________________________________________________
CONTRACT AGREEMENT
THIS AGREEMENT, made this [insert date] day of [insert month], [insert year]
between [name and address of PROCURING ENTITY] (hereinafter called the “Entity”) and
[name and address of Contractor] (hereinafter called the “Contractor”).
WHEREAS, the Entity is desirous that the Contractor execute [name and
identification number of contract] (hereinafter called “the Works”) and the Entity has
accepted the Bid for [contract price in words and figures in specified currency] by the
Contractor for the execution and completion of such Works and the remedying of any defects
therein.
NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH AS FOLLOWS:
1. In this Agreement, words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are
respectively assigned to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred
to.
2. The following documents as required by the 2016 revised Implementing Rules

and Regulations of Republic Act No. 9184 shall be deemed to form and be read
and construed as part of this Agreement, viz.:
a. Philippine Bidding Documents (PBDs);
i. Drawings/Plans;
ii. Specifications;
iii. Bill of Quantities;
iv. General and Special Conditions of Contract;
v. Supplemental or Bid Bulletins, if any;
b. Winning bidder’s bid, including the Eligibility requirements, Technical and
Financial Proposals, and all other documents or statements submitted;
Bid form, including all the documents/statements contained in the Bidder’s
bidding envelopes, as annexes, and all other documents submitted (e.g., Bidder’s
response to request for clarifications on the bid), including corrections to the bid,
if any, resulting from the Procuring Entity’s bid evaluation;
c. Performance Security;
d. Notice of Award of Contract and the Bidder’s conforme thereto; and
e. Other contract documents that may be required by existing laws and/or the
Procuring Entity concerned in the PBDs. Winning bidder agrees that
additional contract documents or information prescribed by the GPPB
that are subsequently required for submission after the contract
200
execution, such as the Notice to Proceed, Variation Orders, and
Warranty Security, shall likewise form part of the Contract.
3. In consideration for the sum of [total contract price in words and figures] or such
other sums as may be ascertained, [Named of the bidder] agrees to [state the
object of the contract] in accordance with his/her/its Bid.
4. The [Name of the procuring entity] agrees to pay the above-mentioned sum in
accordance with the terms of the Bidding.
IN WITNESS whereof the parties thereto have caused this Agreement to be executed
the day and year first before written.
[Insert Name and Signature] [Insert Name and Signature]
[Insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity] [Insert Signatory’s Legal Capacity]
for: for:
[Insert Procuring Entity] [Insert Name of Supplier]
Acknowledgment
[Format shall be based on the latest Rules on Notarial Practice]
201
Omnibus Sworn Statement (Revised)
_________________________________________________________________________
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES)

CITY/MUNICIPALITY OF ______) S.S.
AFFIDAVIT
I, [Name of Affiant], of legal age, [Civil Status], [Nationality], and residing at [Address of
Affiant], after having been duly sworn in accordance with law, do hereby depose and state
that:
1. [Select one, delete the other:]
[If a sole proprietorship:] I am the sole proprietor or authorized representative of [Name

of Bidder] with office address at [address of Bidder];
[If a partnership, corporation, cooperative, or joint venture:] I am the duly authorized

and designated representative of [Name of Bidder] with office address at [address of
Bidder];
2. [Select one, delete the other:]
[If a sole proprietorship:] As the owner and sole proprietor, or authorized representative
of [Name of Bidder], I have full power and authority to do, execute and perform any and
all acts necessary to participate, submit the bid, and to sign and execute the ensuing
contract for [Name of the Project] of the [Name of the Procuring Entity], as shown in the
attached duly notarized Special Power of Attorney;
[If a partnership, corporation, cooperative, or joint venture:] I am granted full power and
authority to do, execute and perform any and all acts necessary to participate, submit the
bid, and to sign and execute the ensuing contract for [Name of the Project] of the [Name
of the Procuring Entity], as shown in the attached [state title of attached document
showing proof of authorization (e.g., duly notarized Secretary’s Certificate,
Board/Partnership Resolution, or Special Power of Attorney, whichever is applicable;)];
3. [Name of Bidder] is not “blacklisted” or barred from bidding by the Government of the
Philippines or any of its agencies, offices, corporations, or Local Government Units,
foreign government/foreign or international financing institution whose blacklisting rules
have been recognized by the Government Procurement Policy Board, by itself or by
relation, membership, association, affiliation, or controlling interest with another
blacklisted person or entity as defined and provided for in the Uniform Guidelines
on Blacklisting;
4. Each of the documents submitted in satisfaction of the bidding requirements is an

authentic copy of the original, complete, and all statements and information provided
therein are true and correct;
5. [Name of Bidder] is authorizing the Head of the Procuring Entity or its duly authorized
202
representative(s) to verify all the documents submitted;
6. [Select one, delete the rest:]
[If a sole proprietorship:] The owner or sole proprietor is not related to the Head of the
Procuring Entity, members of the Bids and Awards Committee (BAC), the Technical
Working Group, and the BAC Secretariat, the head of the Project Management Office or
the end-user unit, and the project consultants by consanguinity or affinity up to the third
civil degree;
[If a partnership or cooperative:] None of the officers and members of [Name of Bidder]
is related to the Head of the Procuring Entity, members of the Bids and Awards
Committee (BAC), the Technical Working Group, and the BAC Secretariat, the head of
the Project Management Office or the end-user unit, and the project consultants by
consanguinity or affinity up to the third civil degree;
[If a corporation or joint venture:] None of the officers, directors, and controlling
stockholders of [Name of Bidder] is related to the Head of the Procuring Entity, members
of the Bids and Awards Committee (BAC), the Technical Working Group, and the BAC
Secretariat, the head of the Project Management Office or the end-user unit, and the
project consultants by consanguinity or affinity up to the third civil degree;
7. [Name of Bidder] complies with existing labor laws and standards; and
8. [Name of Bidder] is aware of and has undertaken the responsibilities as a Bidder in

compliance with the Philippine Bidding Documents, which includes:
a. Carefully examining all of the Bidding Documents;

b. Acknowledging all conditions, local or otherwise, affecting the implementation of
the Contract;
c. Making an estimate of the facilities available and needed for the contract to be bid, if
any; and
d. Inquiring or securing Supplemental/Bid Bulletin(s) issued for the [Name of the
Project].
9. [Name of Bidder] did not give or pay directly or indirectly, any commission, amount, fee,
or any form of consideration, pecuniary or otherwise, to any person or official, personnel
or representative of the government in relation to any procurement project or activity.
10. In case advance payment was made or given, failure to perform or deliver any of the
obligations and undertakings in the contract shall be sufficient grounds to constitute
criminal liability for Swindling (Estafa) or the commission of fraud with
unfaithfulness or abuse of confidence through misappropriating or converting any
payment received by a person or entity under an obligation involving the duty to
deliver certain goods or services, to the prejudice of the public and the government
of the Philippines pursuant to Article 315 of Act No. 3815 s. 1930, as amended, or the
Revised Penal Code.
203
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this __ day of ___, 20__ at
____________, Philippines.
[Insert NAME OF BIDDER OR ITS AUTHORIZED

REPRESENTATIVE]
[Insert signatory’s legal capacity]
Affiant
[Jurat]
204
Bid Securing Declaration Form
___________________________________________________________________________
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES)
CITY OF _______________________) S.S.
BID SECURING DECLARATION

Project Identification No.: [Insert number]
To: [Insert name and address of the Procuring Entity]
I/We, the undersigned, declare that:
1. I/We understand that, according to your conditions, bids must be supported by a Bid
Security, which may be in the form of a Bid Securing Declaration.
2. I/We accept that: (a) I/we will be automatically disqualified from bidding for any
procurement contract with any procuring entity for a period of two (2) years upon receipt
of your Blacklisting Order; and, (b) I/we will pay the applicable fine provided under
Section 6 of the Guidelines on the Use of Bid Securing Declaration, within fifteen (15)
days from receipt of the written demand by the procuring entity for the commission of
acts resulting to the enforcement of the bid securing declaration under Sections 23.1(b),
34.2, 40.1 and 69.1, except 69.1(f),of the IRR of RA No. 9184; without prejudice to other
legal action the government may undertake.
3. I/We understand that this Bid Securing Declaration shall cease to be valid on the
following circumstances:
a. Upon expiration of the bid validity period, or any extension thereof pursuant to your
request;
b. I am/we are declared ineligible or post-disqualified upon receipt of your notice to
such effect, and (i) I/we failed to timely file a request for reconsideration or (ii) I/we
filed a waiver to avail of said right; and
c. I am/we are declared the bidder with the Lowest Calculated Responsive Bid, and I/we
have furnished the performance security and signed the Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I/We have hereunto set my/our hand/s this ____ day of [month]
[year] at [place of execution].
[Insert NAME OF BIDDER OR ITS AUTHORIZED

REPRESENTATIVE]
[Insert signatory’s legal capacity]
Affiant
[Jurat]

205
206
Note:
The SLCC shall be supported by an Owner’s Certificate of Final Acceptance issued by the project owner other than the contractor or a final rating of at least
Satisfactory in the Constructors Performance Evaluation System (CPES). In case of contracts with the private sector, an equivalent document shall be submitted.
207
Standard Form No.: SF-INFR-18
Revised on: July 29, 2004
STATEMENT OF AVAILABILITY OF KEY PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
(Date)
JAIME J. BAUTISTA
Secretary
The Columbia Tower, Ortigas Avenue,
Mandaluyong City
Attention: TIMOTHY JOHN R. BATAN

Chairman, Bids and Awards Committee and Undersecretary for Planning and
Project Development
Dear Sir/Madame:
In compliance with the requirements of the DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION’s

BIDS AND AWARDS COMMITTEE for the bidding of the (Name of the Project/Contract
and/or Project ID No.), we certify that (Name of the Bidder) has in its employed key
personnel, such as project managers, civil engineers, architects, materials engineers and
safety officers, who shall be engaged for the construction of the said contract.
Further, we likewise certify the availability of equipment that (Name of the Bidder) owns, has
under lease, and/or has under purchase agreements, that may be used for the construction of
the said contract.
Very truly yours,
(Name and Signature of the Authorized Representative)

(Position)
(Name of the Bidder)
208
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES
SF-INFR-48 Qualification of Key Personnel assigned for ANTIQUE AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
QUALIFICATION OF KEY PERSONNEL PROPOSED TO BE ASSIGNED TO THE PROJECT
Company Name : ________________________________________________________________________

Business Address : ________________________________________________________________________
Safety Officer
Licensed Geodetic Engineer Materials Engineer I with Certificate of Training in
Project Manager Licensed Civil Engineer
duly accredited by the DPWH Construction Safety and Health
Training (COSH)
1. Name
2. Address
3. Date of Birth
4. Employed since
5. Experience
6. Previous Employment
7. Education
8. PRC License
Minimum Requirements:
Key Personnel General Experience Relevant Experience
Project Manager 5 years 2 years
Licensed Civil Engineer 3 years 2 years
Licensed Geodetic Engineer 3 years 2 years
Materials Engineer I, duly 2 years 2 years
accredited by DPWH
5. Health and Safety 2 years 2 years
Engineer/Officer
with Certificate of Training in
Construction Safety and Health
Training (COSH)
NOTE : Individual Curriculum Vitae (CV), copy of the PRC License of the personnel (if required as minimum requirement), copy of the Certificate of DPWH Accreditation
for Materials Engineer, and a copy of the Certificate of Training of Occupational and Heath for Safety Officer shall be submitted during Post-Qualification.
Submitted by : (Signature over Printed Name)_________________________

Name of Authorized Representative
Designation : ____________________________________________________________
Date : ____________________________________________________________
209
REPUBLIC OF THE PHILIPPINES
SF-INFR-49 List of Contractor’s Equipment assigned to the Proposed Contract for ANTIQUE AIRPORT DEVELOPMENT PROJECT
LIST OF EQUIPMENT ASSIGNED TO THE PROJECT

Company Name : ________________________________________________________________________
Business Address : ________________________________________________________________________
Specify whether Plate No. Motor No. / Body No.

Capacity /
Description Model Name / Year Location Condition Proof of Ownership
OWNED/LEASED/PURCHASED Performance/ Size (if applicable, (if applicable,
AGREEMENT indicate N/A if not) indicate N/A if not)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
List of Equipment:
Particular Owned Lease/Purchased Particular Owned Lease/Purchased

Agreement Total Agreement Total
Unit Capacity Unit Capacity Unit Capacity Unit Capacity
Dump Truck 1 10 cu.m. 3 10 cu.m. 4 Bulldozer 2 165 hp 2
Backhoe 1 0.80 cu.m. 1 At least
Payloader 1 1.50 cu.m. 1 Asphalt Paver 1 3.0m 1
Roadgrader 1 135 hp 1 width
_ Vibratory Compactor 1 10 MT Pneumatic Tire Roller 1 10MT 1
1
Generator Set 1 40KVA 1
One Bagger Concrete Asphalt Batching Plant or
1 - 1 Certification of Availability of 1 -
Mixer 1
Ready-Mix (Asphalt); if any
Concrete Vibrator 2 - 2 Improvised Concrete Batch Plant
Towerlight with Genset 4 - 4 or *Certification of Availability of 1 - 1
Service Truck 1 - 1 Ready-Mix (Concrete); if any
Water Tank Truck 1 4,000 Liters 1 Power Broom (Tower Type with
1 -
Transit Mixer 1 5 cu.m 1 Engine) 1
Asphalt Distributor 1 5T 1 Service Vehicle 1 -
Pick up at least 2020 Model 1
TOTAL 13 15 28
NOTE : Proof of Ownership or Certification of availability of equipment from the equipment lessor/vendor for the duration of the Project, as the case may be, shall
be submitted during Post-Qualification.
Submitted by : ___________________________________________________________
Name of Authorized Representative / Designation/ Date
Designation : ___________________________________________________________
Date : _______________________________________________
210
CERTIFICATE OF AVAILABILITY OF READY-MIX
(CONCRETE/ASPHALT)
LETTERHEAD OF READY MIX (CONCRETE/ASPHALT)

SUPPLIER
Date: __________
CERTIFICATION
This is to certify that our company (Name of Supplier of Ready Mix) has committed
to enter into a contract with (Name of the Participating Bidder) for the supply of ready mix
concrete relative to the implementation of the proposed development of (Name of the Project
and/or Project ID No.) , once the said Project has been awarded to (Name of the
Participating Bidder) .
This is to certify further that our concrete batching plant is located at (specify complete
location address of batching plant) which is in close proximity from (Location of the
Project).
This certification was issued for the compliance of requirements by the Bids and Awards
committee (BAC) for Aviation and Airports of the Department of Transportation (DOTr).
[ Signature over Printed Name ]

Name and Position of the Authorized
Managing Officer of the Ready-mix Supplier
Office Telephone No.: __________________
Mobile No.: __________________________
Email Address: _______________________
211
212

Antique Airport - DOTR

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Antique Airport - DOTR

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PHILIPPINE BIDDING DOCUMENTS

Government of the Republic of the Philippines

GLOSSARY OF TERMS, ABBREVIATIONS, AND ACRONYMS.................................4

ARCC – Allowable Range of Contract Cost.

BAC – Bids and Awards Committee.

Bidder – Refers to a contractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor and/or consultant who

BIR – Bureau of Internal Revenue.

BSP – Bangko Sentral ng Pilipinas.

CDA – Cooperative Development Authority.

CPI – Consumer Price Index.

DOLE – Department of Labor and Employment.

DTI – Department of Trade and Industry.

GFI – Government Financial Institution.

GOCC – Government-owned and/or –controlled corporation.

GOP – Government of the Philippines.

Infrastructure Projects – Include the construction, improvement, rehabilitation, demolition,

LGUs – Local Government Units.

NFCC – Net Financial Contracting Capacity.

NGA – National Government Agency.

PCAB – Philippine Contractors Accreditation Board.

PhilGEPS - Philippine Government Electronic Procurement System.

Procurement Project – refers to a specific or identified procurement covering goods,

PSA – Philippine Statistics Authority.

SEC – Securities and Exchange Commission.

SLCC – Single Largest Completed Contract.

Invitation to Bid for

1. The Department of Transportation (DOTr), through the 2023 GAA Locally

5. A complete set of Bidding Documents may be acquired by interested bidders on 17

11. For further information, please refer to:

TIMOTHY JOHN R. BATAN

THE BAC SECRETARIAT

Issued this 17th day of February 2023.

The Procurement Project (referred to herein as “Project”) is for the construction of

2.2. The source of funding is:

a. NGA, the General Appropriations Act (GAA) CY 2023.

4. Corrupt, Fraudulent, Collusive, Coercive, and Obstructive Practices

A contract is considered to be “similar” to the contract to be bid if it has the

6. Origin of Associated Goods

9. Clarification and Amendment of Bidding Documents

10.4. A List of Contractor’s key personnel (e.g., Project Manager, Project

11. Documents Comprising the Bid: Financial Component

11.3. For Foreign-funded procurement, a ceiling may be applied to bid prices

13. Bid Prices

14. Bid and Payment Currencies

Payment of the contract price shall be made in Philippine Pesos.

15. Bid Security

16. Sealing and Marking of Bids

18. Opening and Preliminary Examination of Bids

18.2. The preliminary examination of Bids shall be governed by Section 30 of the

19. Detailed Evaluation and Comparison of Bids

20. Post Qualification

Road, Highways, Pavements, Railways, Airport Horizontal Structure, and

with a contract amount of not less than Php135,228,158.54.

Medium B for Road, Highways, Pavements, Railways, Airport Horizontal

Key Personnel General Experience Relevant Experience

2. Duly signed Statement of Availability of Key Personnel and

 Proof of Ownership or certification of availability of equipment from the

2. Sectional Completion of Works

4. The Contractor’s Obligations

6. Site Investigation Reports

7.2. The warranty against Structural Defects/Failures, except that occasioned-on

8. Liability of the Contractor

9. Termination for Other Causes